FACULTY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

M.St. & M.Phil. Course Details Booklet 2018-19

Introduction Page 2 of 246

Version Details Date

Version 1.0 2018 course details published 04/07/2018

Version 1.1 Formatting corrections (1550-1700 B-course) 11/09/2018

Disclaimer We expect the contents of this booklet to be updated over the course of the summer, due to the planned arrival of new staff. If any changes are made, we will issue an updated version and students will be informed. Contents Introduction to the M.St. in English Language and Literature by Period, the M.St. in English and American Studies, the M.St. in World Literatures in English, and the M. Phil. in English Studies (Medieval Period) ...... 5

Course convenors ...... 5

A-Course: Literature, Contexts and Approaches ...... 5

B-Course: Research Skills (Bibliography, Palaeography, Transcription, Book-History etc.) ...... 6

Assessment ...... 6

C-Course: Special Options ...... 7

Assessment ...... 7

Dissertation ...... 7

Introduction to the M.Phil. in English Studies (Medieval Period) ...... 8

Second Year Assessment ...... 8

A-COURSES ...... 10

M.St. in English (650-1550) A-Course ...... 10

M.St. in English (1550-1700) A-Course ...... 13

M.St. in English (1700-1830) A-Course ...... 24

M.St. in English (1830-1914) A-Course ...... 25

M.St. in English (1900-Present) A-Course ...... 32

M.St. in World Literatures in English A-Course ...... 37

M.St. in English & American Studies A-Course ...... 43

B-COURSES ...... 48 M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Introduction Page 3 of 246

Overview ...... 48

M.St. in English (650-1550) and the M.Phil. in English (Medieval Period) B-Course ...... 49

M.St. in English (1550-1700) B-Course ...... 50

M.St. in English (1700–1830) B-Course ...... 59

M.St. in English (1830–1914) B-Course ...... 64

M.St. in English (1900-present day) B-Course ...... 68

M.St. in World Literatures in English B-Course ...... 73

M.St. in English and American Studies B-Course ...... 82

OPTIONAL MODULES and B-COURSES ...... 90

Practical printing workshop for postgraduate students ...... 90

Issues in Editing ...... 90

Latin for beginners (Medievalists and Early Modernists): optional course ...... 93

C-COURSES ...... 94

Michaelmas Term C-Courses...... 94

Devotional Texts and Material Culture c. 1200-1500 ...... 94

Chaucer before the Tales ...... 97

Reading Old English poetry: narrative, genre and style ...... 97

The New Theatre History: Dramatists, Actors, Repertories, Documents ...... 99

Milton and the Philosophers ...... 109

Shakespeare, History, and Politics ...... 116

Wordsworth and Coleridge 1797-1817 ...... 128

Prose Fiction of the Late Eighteenth Century ...... 132

Reading Visual Satire ...... 136

Writing the City, 1820-1920 ...... 141

The Utopian Imagination, 1800 – 2472 ...... 144

The Body in Victorian Literature, Science and Medicine ...... 148

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Introduction Page 4 of 246

Fiction in Britain Since 1945: History, time and memory ...... 154

Humanitarian Fictions ...... 160

Contemporary Canadian Literature and the World ...... 163

Virginia Woolf: Literary and Cultural Contexts ...... 166

The Second Wave of Anglo-American Feminism ...... 168

Political Histories of Modern Reading ...... 179

Hilary Term C-Courses ...... 181

Old Norse Literature ...... 181

The Age of Alfred ...... 182

The Pearl Poet ...... 184

Early Modern Biography ...... 185

The Forensic Imagination ...... 190

Thinking With The Faerie Queene ...... 195

The Philosophical Poem: Pope, Wordsworth, and Tennyson ...... 199

Forming the Critical Mind ...... 203

Women's Poetry 1680-1830 ...... 206

Senses of Humour: Wordsworth to Ashbery ...... 210

Queer Identities in Fin-de-Siècle Literature and Culture ...... 214

Proto- and the novel: Joseph Conrad and Nineteenth-century Contexts ...... 218

Modernism and Philosophy ...... 221

Popular Performance and the Literary Imagination ...... 224

Women and Drama ...... 227

Contemporary Poetry by the Book ...... 230

African Literature ...... 235

Literatures of Empire and Nation, 1880-1935 ...... 238

Life-writing ...... 242

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Introduction Page 5 of 246

Introduction to the M.St. in English Language and Literature by Period, the M.St. in English and American Studies, the M.St. in World Literatures in English, and the M. Phil. in English Studies (Medieval Period)

Course convenors  650-1550 / M.Phil. (Medieval): Dr Siân Grønlie, Professor Andy Orchard  1550-1700: Dr Kathryn Murphy, Professor  1700-1830: Professor Fiona Stafford, Dr Freya Johnston  1830-1914: Professor Kirsten Shepherd-Barr; Professor Matthew Bevis  1900-Present: Professor Laura Marcus, Professor Kate Mcloughlin  English and American Studies: Professor Lloyd Pratt, Dr Nicholas Gaskill  World Literatures in English: Dr Graham Riach, Professor Patrick Hayes

The course consists of four components, outlined briefly below; for further detail, you should consult the strand-specific descriptions. The M.St./M.Phil. Handbook will be circulated before the beginning of term and will provide further important information needed once you begin your course.

A-Course: Literature, Contexts and Approaches For all strands other than 650-1550, this will consist of 8 weeks of 2-hour classes, taught in Michaelmas Term.

The precise format of the A-course will vary across strands, but in general, the course is meant to stimulate open-ended but guided exploration of key primary and secondary texts, of critical and theoretical debates, and of literary historiography. The A-course therefore is not assessed formally. However, the pedagogic formation fostered by the A-course will be vital for the M.St. as a whole, and will inform, support and enrich the research you undertake for your B- and C-essays and the dissertation. For details of individual A-courses, please see below. You are strongly recommended to begin reading for the A-course before you commence the M.St. The reading-lists included in this document may be quite comprehensive, and you can expect further on-course guidance from your course-convenors and tutors according to your specific intellectual interests.

In every strand, attendance is compulsory. If you are unable to attend a class because of illness or other emergency, please let your course-convenors know. Non-attendance without good cause may trigger formal procedures.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Introduction Page 6 of 246

There is no formal assessment for the A-course, but written work and/or oral presentations may be required. Convenors will enter their informal assessment of performance on GSR, the Graduate Supervision Report system at the end of Michaelmas Term, and will provide feedback on class- presentations.

A student-led all-day conference will be held in Trinity Term (usually in the fourth week) at which all students will give brief papers on topics arising from their dissertation work, and will receive feedback from the course convenor(s).

B-Course: Research Skills (Bibliography, Palaeography, Transcription, Book-History etc.) The B-Course is a compulsory component of the course. It provides a thorough foundation in some of the key skills needed to undertake research.

The B-Course for the 650-1550 strand is described in the ‘Strand Specific Course Descriptions’ section of this booklet.

B-courses: Post-1550; English and American; World Literatures strand In Michaelmas, the B-Course is divided into four sub-courses: 1550-1700, 1700-1830, 1830-1914, and post-1900, all of which are described in detail later in this booklet. Students should select the B- Course that best fits the period-based or thematic strand of the M.St. into which they have been accepted, or which best suits their research interests.

Strand specific classes on manuscript transcription and palaeography are taught in Michaelmas Term; formal assessment of this element of the B-Course takes the form of class tests. This assessment is pass/fail, and while students must pass in order to proceed with the course, scores on the test will not affect their final degree result. Further details about the examination of the B-Course are provided later in this booklet and in the M.St./M.Phil. Handbook.

In Hilary, students take their strand’s specific B-Course, which is described in the ‘Strand Specific Course Descriptions’ section of this booklet.

Assessment In Hilary Term, candidates will be required to submit an essay of 6,000-7,000 words on a topic related to the B-Course.

Further details about the structure of the B-Course for all strands can be found here.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Introduction Page 7 of 246

C-Course: Special Options These will be taught as 2-hour classes in weeks 1-6 of Michaelmas and Hilary Terms. Students must choose one of these options in each term. All C-course options are open to students in all strands – you do not have to choose an option which sits neatly within your strand boundaries. However, it is recommended that you consult with the option convenors if you are choosing an option outside of your area(s) of expertise. You must register your preferred options online for both terms by 25th July 2018 . You will need to list three preferences for each term.

The Faculty reserves the right not to run a Special Options C-Course if there are insufficient numbers enrolled or should a tutor become unavailable due to unforeseen circumstances; please bear this in mind when selecting your options. Students cannot assume that they will be enrolled in their first choice of option; please also bear this in mind when planning your reading before the course begins. We strongly recommend that you start with your A and B-Course reading, and do not invest too much time in preparing for your C-Course options until these are confirmed.

Remember that you can select any C-Course(s), depending on your interests and research plans.

Assessment In Michaelmas Term candidates will be required to submit an essay of 6,000-7,000 words on a topic related to a C-Course studied in that term.

In Hilary Term, candidates will be required to submit an essay of 6,000-7,000 words on a topic related to the C-Course studied in that term.

Details on approval of topics and on the timing of submission for all components are found in the M.St. /M.Phil. Handbook.

Please note: If you wish to change any of your options, you must first contact the Graduate Studies Office who will seek approval from your convenor and the tutor for the course you wish to take. Requests for option changes for Hilary Term must be submitted by the end of week 4 of Michaelmas Term. We do not accept any changes after this time. Please note that undersubscribed Hilary term courses may be withdrawn before the start of Michaelmas term.

Dissertation Each student will write a 10,000-11,000-word dissertation on a subject to be defined in consultation with the strand convenors, written under the supervision of a specialist in the Faculty, and submitted for examination at the end of Trinity Term.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Introduction Page 8 of 246

Introduction to the M.Phil. in English Studies (Medieval Period)

In their first year candidates for the M.Phil. in English (Medieval Period) follow the same course as the M.St. in English (650-1550) students. Provided they achieve a pass mark in the first-year assessments, students may proceed to the second year.

The second year of the MPhil offers great freedom of specialization. Candidates choose three further courses to be studied during the year, and write a longer dissertation as the culmination of the degree. The three courses may include up to two of the MSt C courses offered in that year (provided the candidate has not done the same course the year before); or they may choose to submit coursework essays in any medieval topic agreed with the convenors for which a supervisor is available. These courses are entered under the following titles (each of which may only be entered once, to ensure breadth as well as specialization). Candidates are strongly encouraged to consult with their course convenors in Trinity Term or early in the Long Vacation of the first year in order to make an informed and feasible choice of options.

1. The History of the Book in Britain before 1550 (Candidates will also be required to transcribe from, and comment on specimens written in English in a 1-hour examination) 2. Old English 3. The Literature of England after the Norman Conquest 4. The Medieval Drama 5. Religious Writing in the Later Middle Ages 6. Medieval Romance 7. Old Norse sagas 8. Old Norse poetry 9. Old Norse special topic (only to be taken by candidates offering either option 7 or 8, or both) 10./11. One or two of the C-Course Special Options as on offer in any strand, as specified by the M.St. English for the year concerned; candidates may not re-take any option for which they have been examined as part of their first year. 12./13./14./15. Relevant options offered by other Faculties as agreed with the M.Phil. Convenors. The teaching and assessment of these options will follow the provisions and requirements as set by the Faculty offering the option.

Second Year Assessment Students will be required to submit three essays of 6,000-7,000 words each in either Michaelmas Term or Hilary Term (depending on the term in which the course was offered).

Students will write a dissertation of 13,000-15,000 words on a subject related to their subject of study.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Introduction Page 9 of 246

Each candidate’s choice of subjects shall require the approval the Chair of the M.St./M.Phil. Examiners, care of the Graduate Studies Office. Details on approval of topics and timing of submission for all components are found in the M.St. /M.Phil. Handbook.

Candidates are warned that they must avoid duplicating in their answers to one part of the examination material that they have used in another part of the examination. However, it is recognised that the dissertation may build on and develop work submitted for the first-year dissertation.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 10 of 246

A-COURSES

M.St. in English (650-1550) A-Course Professor Andy Orchard & Dr Siân Grønlie

This M.St. ‘A’ course is designed to give you an introduction to key works, textual witnesses, concepts and critical debates in the 650-1550 period. It is deliberately wide in range in order to equip you with the best possible knowledge of this period and to provide a historical, cultural and critical context for the specialist interests that you will develop in the ‘C’ courses and in your dissertation. Topics will be covered in two-week sessions, with a primary focus each week on the pre- or post-Conquest period, as set out below. Each week, we will ask you to read in advance a few key primary texts and/or extracts and some secondary works. It is important that you participate in every session regardless of whether your interests in the medieval period are early or late, as the questions and debates have been chosen for their relevance to the period as a whole. The class will take the form of presentations from students with discussion to follow, and/or roundtable debate about key texts and ideas. Although you are not expected to read everything on the reading list, it is important that you engage with the topics to be discussed: this course is the main forum in which you can discuss your ideas with one another, make connections between texts and across the period, hone skills such as close reading, and get valuable feedback on oral presentations. In preparation for these seminars, we suggest that you familiarize yourself with some of the most influential works for the period as a whole, if you have not encountered them already. Introductory reading is provided below, and we encourage you to get started with this as soon as possible. You may find it useful to purchase one of the readers listed below to get started with reading Old and Middle English texts in the original language.

Introductory Reading

• Virgil, Aeneid (available in multiple translations) • The Anglo-Saxon World, trans. Kevin Crossley-Holland (Woodbridge, 2002) • The Vulgate Bible: Douay-Rheims Translation (online) – read Genesis, Exodus, The Psalms, Jonah, The Gospels, Acts, Revelation • Bede’s Ecclesiastical History of the English People, ed. and trans. Colgrave and Mynors (1969) - also in Oxford World’s and Penguin Classics • Beowulf – multiple translations by Michael Alexander, Michael Swanton, Kevin Crossley-Holland, Seamus Heaney, Howard Chickering, J. R. R. Tolkien. • Boethius, The Consolation of Philosophy, trans. V. E. Watts (Harmondsworth, 1976) • Chrétien de Troyes, Arthurian Romances, trans. William Kibler – read Yvain. • The Riverside Chaucer, ed. Larry Benson and F. A. Robinson – read Troilus and Criseyde and The Canterbury Tales • Egil’s saga, trans. Bernard Scudder (Penguin, 2004) • Sir Gawain and the Green Knight, Pearl, Cleanness, Patience, ed. J. J. Andersson (London, 1996) • The Saga of Grettir the Strong, trans. Bernard Scudder (Penguin, 2005)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 11 of 246

• Robert Henryson, The Complete Works, ed. David John Parkinson (Kalamazoo, 2008) – read Orpheus and Eurydice and Testament of Cresseid • The Lais of Marie de France, trans. Glyn Burgess and Keith Busby (London, 1999) • The Book of Margery Kempe, ed. Barry Windeatt (Woodbridge, 2004) • Thomas More, Utopia • Tyndale’s New Testament, ed. David Daniell • Sir Thomas Wyatt, The Complete Poems (Penguin Classics, 1997) • York Mystery Plays: A Selection in Modern Spelling, ed. Richard Beadle and Pamela King (Oxford, 2009)

Language Readers

• A Guide to Old English, ed. Bruce Mitchell and Fred Robinson (Chichester, 2012) • Old and Middle English c. 890-c. 1400, ed. Elaine Treharne (Oxford, 2004) • The Cambridge Old English Reader, ed. Richard Marsden (Cambridge, 2015) • A Book of Middle English, ed. J. A. Burrow and Thorlac Turville-Petre (Oxford, 1996)

Many ME texts can be found online at http://www.lib.rochester.edu

Introductions and Companions

• Marc Amodio, The Anglo-Saxon Literature Handbook (Chichester, 2014) • Daniel Donohue, Old English Literature: A Short Introduction (Oxford, 2004) • The Cambridge Companion to Old English Literature, ed. Malcolm Godden and Michael Lapidge (Cambridge, 2013) • The Cambridge History of Early Medieval English Literature, ed. Clare Lees (Cambridge, 2012) • A Companion to Anglo-Saxon Literature, ed. Philip Pulsiano and Elaine Traherne (Oxford, 2001) • R. D. Fulk and Christopher Cain, A History of Old English Literature (Chichester, 2013) • Hugh Magennis, The Cambridge Introduction to Anglo-Saxon Literature (2011) • A New Critical History of Old English Literature, ed. Stanley Greenfield and Daniel Caulder (London, 1986) • Old English Literature: Critical Essays, ed. R. M. Liuzza (London, 2002) • Laura Ashe, The Oxford English Literary History, Volume 1, 1000-1350, conquest and transformation (2017) • Jeremy Burrow, Medieval Writers and their Work: Middle English Literature 1100- 1500 (Oxford, 1992) • Christopher Cannon, The Grounds of English Literature (Oxford, 2004) • Douglas Gray, Later Medieval English Literature (Oxford, 2008) • The Cambridge Companion to Medieval English Literature, 1100-1500, ed. Larry Scanlon (2009) • A Companion to Medieval English Literature and Culture, c. 1350-c. 1500, ed. Peter Brown (Oxford, 2007) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 12 of 246

• The Oxford Handbook of Medieval Literature in English, ed. Elaine Traherne and Greg Walker (2010) • Middle English, ed. Paul Strohm (Oxford, 2009)

Michaelmas Term Programme

Weeks 1-2: Anthology, Miscellany & Meaning Week 1: The Exeter Book of Old English Poetry and the Franks Casket Week 2: The Auchinleck Manuscript and Flateyjarbók

Weeks 3-4: Tradition and Transmission Week 3: Bede and Cædmon; Beowulf and Andreas Week 4: Biblical Translations and Adaptations (Texts to include Patience, Cleanness, Cycle Drama, Picture Bibles, Tyndale)

Weeks 5-6: Authors, Texts and Audiences Week 5: Authorship and Revising the Text: Wulfstan’s Sermo Lupi ad Anglos and Cynewulf’s signed poems Week 6: Women’s Writing and Writing for Women (Texts to include: Christina of Markyate, Katherine-Group, Margery Kempe)

Hilary Term Programme

Weeks 1-2 Literary Form and Genre Week 1: Wulf & Eadwacer, Wife’s Lament, Riddles Week 2: Breton lay, romance, Malory (Texts to include Marie de France, Chrétien de Troyes, Malory)

Weeks 3-4 The Politics of Medieval History and Historicisms Week 3: Widsith, Orosius, Ælfric, Life of St Edmund, Anglo-Saxon Chronicle Week 4: History and Saint’s Life (Texts to include: South English Legendary, The Golden Legend, Book of Martyrs)

Weeks 5-6: Multiculturalism and Cultural Context Week 5: Latin and the Vernaculars (Texts to include: Gesta Herwardi and Grettis saga; Celtic lyric and Latin elegiac Week 6: Classical Myth and Legend (Texts to include: Chaucer, Henryson, Sir Orfeo)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 13 of 246

M.St. in English (1550-1700) A-Course Michaelmas Term, 2018

Critical Questions in Early Modern Literature

Dr Kathryn Murphy, Professor Lorna Hutson and others

The class meets on Thursdays, 11.00am-1pm, History of the Book Room, St Cross Building.

This course is designed both to help you think about how to identify a research topic in Renaissance/early modern literary studies and, as a part of that process, to introduce you to major critical debates about how to approach and interpret the literary texts of the period. To this end, our classes each week will focus on a key primary text or texts, but will situate these within a framework of critical debate. Each of you will be asked to present a brief position paper on the critical debate for a particular week; you will be able to choose your topic in the induction and first class. The course offers a unique opportunity to engage with leading scholars who are themselves actively engaged in shaping the critical reception of early modern literature and in formulating the research questions that define it as an object of study. By the end of the course, you should therefore be well-informed about shifts in critical, editorial, and cultural-historical frameworks through which writings of the period have been interpreted. You should have a better understanding of how crucially these shifts inform the work of canon-formation and determine political and aesthetic reception of the early modern. You will also have been introduced to, or re-acquainted with, exemplary literary productions of the period. You should be in a good position to start identifying a topic, approach and questions for your own dissertation in readiness for individual dissertation meetings with the course convenor in week 6. There will be feedback on individual presentations and in convenors’ reports on the Graduate Supervision Report System (GSR).

General Notes: The first class is taught by the two course convenors. Thereafter classes are either taught by convenors, or by another period specialist with a convenor. This ensures coherence, oversight and exposure to a range of expertise.

Topics and Texts at-a-glance: • Week 1. Introduction: ‘Renaissance Subjects’. [handout] • Week 2. ‘Inkpots, Pedantry and Polyglottism’. [John Florio, Thomas Nashe] • Week 3. ‘Spenser and Allegory’. [Spenser, Faerie Queene, book 1] • Week 4. ‘Drama on Stage and Page’. [Shakespeare, Hamlet] • Week 5. ‘Literary Criticism and Poetics’ [Samuel Daniel, Ben Jonson] • Week 6. ‘Early Modern Violence: A Critical Argument’. [Milton, Samson Agonistes] • Week 7. ‘Historicism: Stuart Restoration’. [Dryden, Cowley] • Week 8. ‘The Female Signature: Gender and Style’. [Mary Queen of Scots; Katherine Philips]

Week 1: Renaissance Subjects (Kathryn Murphy and Lorna Hutson)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 14 of 246

A handout of short critical extracts will be distributed at the pre-course meeting for this introductory seminar.

Week 2: Pedants, Inkpots, and Polyglots (Kathryn Murphy with Lorna Hutson)

John Florio, tutor in Italian and French, and the author of conversation manuals and translations of Montaigne and (probably) Boccaccio, wrote of English in 1578 that it was ‘a language that wyl do you good in England, but passe Dover, it is woorth nothing’. Ours is a period in which, despite its manifest literary richness, English was not a lingua franca, but marginal and isolated, not much understood by foreigners, still in the process of establishing its own ‘rules’ for style, rhetoric, rhyme, and prosody, and measuring itself, often negatively, against Latin, Greek, Italian, French. It is also during the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries that the English language underwent its widest expansion of vocabulary, in borrowings, calques, and coinages.

The purpose of this week’s class is to think about what this means for the period’s literature; how to think about English literature transnationally and translinguistically; and also, pragmatically speaking, how we are to handle literature that is thick with quotations in other languages, puns on etymology, and a heightened awareness of literature as in dialogue with European and classical forebears. All of the learned men of the Renaissance, and many gentry women, were fluent in reading and writing in languages other than English. Latin was the foundation of education in grammar schools, of learning in general, and of instruction at the universities. Many would also have encountered Greek and even some Hebrew in this scholarly context, and a grounding in ancient literature – Virgil, Ovid, Cicero, Horace – was the foundation of learning. At the same time, courtly life, education in gentry households, soldiery, mercantile exchange, diplomacy, the immigration of persecuted religious minorities from the Continent (e.g. Huguenots), travel, and the urge to read the literatures of other vernaculars, especially French, Italian, and Dutch, meant that proficiency in another language was very common, and hearing and encountering other languages was normal. The big cities of early modern England – London, Norwich – were polyglot, multilingual places.

We will approach these from two angles. First, we will consider aspects of what has been called the ‘inkpot controversy’, and the peculiar style of university wit which veers between the potently vernacular and an elevated style; and secondly, the representation of conversations between languages in dialogue and drama. At the beginning of the term I will also supply a handout with various visual materials, helping us see how polyglottism and linguistic difference were represented on the page. Cheke, Florio, and Nashe will be made available as handouts at the start of term. They can also be read on EEBO, where you can download complete texts by clicking the box beside the title after you have found it by searching, then going to your ‘marked list’.

Primary Texts

• John Cheke, ‘A Letter of Syr. I. Cheekes’, in Baldassare Castiglione, The Courtyer, trans. Thomas Hoby (London, 1561), sigs. Zz[5]r-v • John Florio, First Fruites (London, 1578), 12v-19r, 49v-63r, 100r-v. • John Florio, Second Frutes (London, 1591), 127-139, 165-205.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 15 of 246

• Thomas Nashe, ‘To the Gentlemen Students of both Vniversities’, in Robert Greene, Menaphon (London, 1589), **1r-A3r • William Shakespeare, Henry V, paying particular attention to the following scenes: III.iii, III.iv, IV.iv, V.ii

Secondary Reading

If you find the mingling of vernacular and learned styles particularly interesting, you might also wish to read the opening of Robert Burton’s ‘Democritus Junior to the Reader’, in his Anatomy of Melancholy (1621-1651), and use Noel Malcolm’s The Origins of English Nonsense, which contains a mini-anthology of works in this vein: John Taylor, the Water-Poet, is particularly interesting here. Nashe’s second, revised preface to Christs Teares Over Jerusalem (1594) is also useful here.

(Everyone should read the asterisked suggestions; otherwise you are free to pursue whatever angle you find most interesting; it can also work as a more general, miscellaneous, and introductory guide to literature on linguistic questions in the period)

• **Ardis Butterfield, ‘National Histories’, in Cultural Reformations: Medieval and Renaissance in Literary History, eds Brian Cummings and James Simpson (Oxford, 2011) [on Henry V] • Anne Coldiron, Printers without Borders: Translation and Textuality in the Renaissance (Cambridge, 2014) • **-----, ‘Macaronic Verse, Plurilingual Printing, and the Uses of Translation’ in Early Modern Cultures of Translation, ed. K. Newman and J. Tylus (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2015) • John Considine, Small Dictionaries and Curiosity: Lexicography and Fieldwork in Post-Medieval Europe (Oxford, 2017) • Hannah Crawforth, Etymology and the Invention of English in Early Modern Literature (Cambridge, 2013) [inc. chapters on Spenser, Jonson, Donne, Milton] • Tania Demetriou and Rowan Tomlinson (eds), The Culture of Translation in Early Modern England and France, 1500-1660 (Palgrave, 2015) • Stuart Farley, ‘Opus musivum, opus variegatum: the mosaic form in early modern culture’, Renaissance Studies 31/1 (2017), 107-24 • John Gallagher, ‘The Italian London of John North: Cultural Contact and Linguistic Encounter in Early Modern England’, Renaissance Quarterly 70 (2017), 88-131 • Kenneth Haynes, English Literature and Ancient Languages (Oxford, 2003) • Lorna Hutson, Thomas Nashe in Context (Oxford, 1989) • Eric MacPhail, Dancing Around the Well: The Circulation of Commonplaces in Renaissance Humanism (Leiden, 2014) [useful for Burton] • **Noel Malcolm, The Origins of English Nonsense (London, 1997) [useful for macaronic poetry, and thinking about obscurity and learning], chapter 2: ‘Fustian, Bombast, and Satire: The Stylistic Preconditions of English Seventeenth-Century Nonsense Poetry’ • Ann Moss, Renaissance Truth and the Latin Language Turn (Oxford, 2003)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 16 of 246

• -----, ‘Being in Two Minds: The Bilingual Factor in Renaissance Writing’, in Acta Conventus Neo- Latini Hafniensis 1991 (Binghampton, NY, 1994), 61-74 • Lucy Munro, Archaic Style in English Literature, 1590-1674 (Cambridge, 2013) • Jennifer Richards, ‘Commonplacing and Prose Writing: Robert Burton’, in The Oxford Handbook of Early Modern Prose, ed. Andrew Hadfield (Oxford, 2013) • Hugh Roberts, ‘Comparative Nonsense: French galimathias and English fustian’, Renaissance Studies 30/1 (2016), 102-19 • Daniel Tiffany, Infidel Poetics: Riddles, Nightlife, Substance (Chicago, 2009) – not focused on the early modern, but interesting on linguistic obscurity and the languages of cant) • **Alvin Vos, ‘Humanistic Standards of Diction in the Inkhorn Controversy’, Studies in Philology 73/4 (1976), 376-96 • Michael Wyatt, The Italian Encounter with Tudor England: A Cultural Politics of Translation (Cambridge, 2005) [useful for Florio]

Week 3: Meddling with Allegory (Joe Moshenska with Kathryn Murphy)

William Hazlitt, writing about readers of Edmund Spenser’s Faerie Queene, famously wrote: “If they do not meddle with the allegory, the allegory will not meddle with them.” As modern readers of Spenser we can hardly help meddling with his allegorical fictions, but, this seminar will suggest, the question of how best to do so remains an open one. Should we look backwards, towards Spenser’s classical and medieval predecessors? Or forwards, towards theoretical meddlers like Walter Benjmain and Paul de Man? Focusing on Book I, the Book of Holiness, we will consider the interpretative questions that Spenser’s allegory seems both to pose and elude, and how these can inflect our wider approaches to early modern texts.

Primary Reading: The Faerie Queene, Book 1 and proem; dedicatory sonnets; ‘Letter to Raleigh.’ Please read this in the Longman edition of The Faerie Queene, second revised edition, ed. A.C. Hamilton, with Hiroshi Yamashita, Toshiyuki Suzuki & Shohachi Fukuda.

Required secondary Reading:

Closer to the seminar I will circulate a document of short extracts on allegory from Quintilian, Puttenham and others.

• Paul de Man; ‘The Rhetoric of Temporality,’ from Blindness and Insight. • Rita Felski, The Limits of Critique, ch.2: ‘Digging Down and Standing Back.’ • Maureen Quilligan, The Language of Allegory, ch.1: ‘The Text.’ • Gordon Teskey, entry on ‘Allegory,’ in The Spenser Encyclopedia, ed. A.C. Hamilton.

Suggested secondary Reading:

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 17 of 246

• Judith Anderson, Reading the Allegorical Intertext • Walter Benjamin, ‘Allegory and Trauerspiel,’ from The Origins of German Tragic Drama, trans. John Osborne. • Bill Brown, ‘The Dark Wood of Postmodernity (Space, Faith, Allegory),’ PMLA 120.3 (2005), 734– 50. • The Cambridge Companion to Allegory, ed. Rita Copeland & Peter T. Struck (especially the chapters by Zeeman, Cummings, Murrin and Caygill) • Angus Fletcher, Allegory: The Theory of a Symbolic Mode • C.S. Lewis, The Allegory of Love • Gordon Teskey, Allegory and Violence • Jon Whitman, Allegory: The Dynamics of an Ancient and Medieval Technique

Week 4: Drama on stage and page (Emma Smith with Lorna Hutson)

Shakespeare, Hamlet. Please compare the play in the complete works Oxford edition edited by Stanley Wells and Gary Taylor, with the 2-volume Arden 3 text edited by Ann Thompson and Neil Taylor. Look at the Enfolded Hamlet (hamletworks.net) as well as the two quartos and the Folio text in a facsimile or online (http://www.bl.uk/treasures/shakespeare/homepage.html and http://firstfolio.bodleian.ox.ac.uk and http://quartos.org). Bring along any examples of any other noteworthy textual interventions you find.

• Lukas Erne, Shakespeare as Literary Dramatist (2nd ed, 2013): read the introduction and chapters 8 and 9 on Hamlet. • Zachary Lesser and Peter Stallybrass, ‘The First Literary Hamlet and the commonplacing of professional plays’, Shakespeare Quarterly 59 (via JSTOR) (2008) • Zachary Lesser, Hamlet after Q1: An Uncanny History of the Shakespearean Text (2014) • Kirk Melnikoff, ‘Nicholas Ling’s Republican Hamlet (1603)’ in Shakespeare’s Stationers: Studies in Cultural Bibliography ed Maria Straznicky (2012) • *Andrew Sofer ‘Dropping the Subject: the skull on the Jacobean Stage’ in his The Stage Life of Props • Tiffany Stern, ‘Sermons, Plays and Note-Takers: Hamlet Q1 as a “Noted” Text’, Shakespeare Survey, 66 • W.B. Worthen, Shakespeare and the Authority of Performance chapter 1 (1997)

Week 5: Literary Criticism and Poetics: Ideas in Context (Michael Hetherington with Kathryn Murphy)

Was there a unified and coherent vernacular poetic theory in the English Renaissance, and how should such writing inform our own literary critical work on the period? Modern scholars, whatever scruples they may otherwise have in favour of historical particularity and nuanced differences between the various texts of the early modern critical canon, often find themselves gesturing to a reified early modern (or “Tudor”, or “Elizabethan”, or “Metaphysical”) poetics. Brian Vickers, for example, in the introduction to his edited collection of Renaissance critical texts, writes that “writers in this period had a perfectly coherent theory of literature”, founded in a “union of rhetoric and ethics” and an unproblematic “agreement M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 18 of 246

between writers and readers over the representation of good and evil.” It is likewise common to treat a text like Sidney’s Defence of Poesy or Puttenham’s Art of English Poesy as a normative or exemplary statement of doctrines widely shared among early modern writers. This class will challenge such approaches and explore more particular and situated ways of apprehending the production of literary theory in the period. This class will assume familiarity with Sidney’s Defence (c. 1580–82), but its main focus will be on a slightly later moment in the history of critical discourse, at the very turn of the seventeenth century. For a number of reasons, the years 1598–1601 constituted a remarkably intense and unusually well-documented period of literary critical activity: these were the years of the late- Elizabethan satire-boom (followed by an episcopal satire ban); of a rapid-fire contest among a number of playwrights, including Marston, Dekker, Jonson and, less centrally, Shakespeare (the so-called poetomachia or War of the Theatres); of the cultural and political excitement provoked by the Earl of Essex; of an especially self-conscious and lively literary culture in the Inns of Court. These years therefore allow us to watch early modern literary criticism and poetics in action, not as an amalgam of timeless theoretical abstractions but in specific times, places, and cultural dialogues and debates.

Please read Philip Sidney’s Defence of Poesy and at least two of the three other texts below:

• Daniel, Samuel, Musophilus (1599), in Poems and A Defence of Ryme, ed. Arthur Colby Sprague (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1930), pp. 65–98

• Jonson, Ben, Poetaster (1601), ed. Gabriele Bernhard Jackson, in The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Ben Jonson, 7 vols (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2012), II, pp. 1–181; OR ed. Tom Cain (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1995)

• Scott, William, The Model of Poesy (1599), ed. Gavin Alexander (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013)

Sidney’s Defence of Poesy is widely available in a range of editions. For the purposes of this class, those by Gavin Alexander (London, 2004) or Robert Maslen (Manchester, 2002) are particularly recommended.

For those who wish to explore further the critical writings of 1599-1601, a list of other relevant works from the period (by authors including John Davies, Joseph Hall, John Hoskyns and John Marston) is available on request.

Secondary Reading

Extracts from Catherine Bates’s recent book—which aims to spark a critical debate about the way we understand and use Sidney’s poetics—will be circulated in advance of the class. The other items listed here either shed light on one of the primary works or provide wider context: feel free to consult any that match your interests.

• Alexander, Gavin, ‘Sidney, Scott, and the Proportions of Poetics’, Sidney Journal, 33 (2015), 7–28 • Archer, Jayne Elisabeth, Elizabeth Goldring and Sarah Knight (eds), The Intellectual and Cultural World of the Early Modern Inns of Court (Manchester, 2011)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 19 of 246

• Bates, Catherine, On Not Defending Poetry: Defense and Indefensibility in Sidney’s Defence of Poesy (Oxford, 2017) [short extracts will be circulated in advance of the class] • Bednarz, James P., Shakespeare and the Poets’ War (New York, 2001) • Cain, Tom, ‘“Satyres, That Girde and Fart at the Time”: Poetaster and the Essex Rebellion’, in Refashioning Ben Jonson: Gender, Politics, and the Jonsonian Canon, ed. Julie Sanders, Kate Chedgzoy and Susan Wiseman (Basingstoke, 1998), pp. 48–70 • Finkelpearl, Philip J., John Marston of the Middle Temple: An Elizabethan Dramatist in his Social Setting (Cambridge, MA, 1969) • Hetherington, Michael, ‘“An Instrument of Reason”: William Scott’s Logical Poetics’, Review of English Studies, 67 (2016), 448–67 • Kneidel, Gregory, ‘Samuel Daniel and Edification’, Studies in English Literature, 1500–1900, 44 (2004), 59–76 • LaBranche, Anthony, ‘Samuel Daniel: A Voice of Thoughtfulness’, in The Rhetoric of Renaissance Poetry from Wyatt to Milton, ed. Thomas Sloane and Raymond Waddington (Berkeley, 1974), pp. 123–39 • Manley, Lawrence, Convention, 1500–1750 (Cambridge, MA, 1980), pp. 15–25, 106–33, 137–58 • McCabe, Richard A., ‘Elizabethan Satire and the Bishops’ Ban of 1599’, Yearbook of English Studies, 11 (1981), 188–93 • Meskill, Lynn S., Ben Jonson and Envy (Cambridge, 2009), pp. 94–109 • Turner, Henry S., The English Renaissance Stage: Geometry, Poetics, and the Practical Spatial Arts 1580–1630 (Oxford, 2006), pp. 1–40, 114–52

Week 6: Early Modern Violence: a critical argument (Margaret Kean with Lorna Hutson)

Read John Milton’s poem, Samson Agonistes (1671), and his prose tract The Tenure of Kings and Magistrates (1649). Laura Knoppers, ed., The 1671 Poems (2008), vol.2 of The Complete Works of John Milton (Oxford: , 2008-). You must use this volume for the introduction and notes – what does it tell you about current scholarly approaches to early modern studies in general, and Milton in particular? This will be a key section of our class discussion. [you might find it helpful to compare another earlier editorial approach, eg. John Carey Milton: Complete Shorter Poems (1968, 1997: Longman)].

• N.H. Keeble & Nicholas McDowell, eds. Vernacular Regicide and Republican Writings (2013), vol. 6 of The Complete Works of John Milton (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008-). [You might wish to contrast this with the previous standard multivolume edition of Milton’s Prose Works from Yale.] • Sharon Achinstein ‘Samson Agonistes and the Drama of Dissent’ MS 33 (1997). 133-58. • Janel Mueller ‘The Figure and the Ground: Samson as Hero of London Nonconformity, 1662-1667’ in Grahan Parry and Joad Raymond, eds Milton and the Terms of Liberty (Cambridge: D.S. Brewer, 2002) 137-62. • Victoria Kahn Wayward Contracts: the crisis of political obligation in England, 1640-1674 (Princeton: Princeton UP, 2004), chp 10 ‘Critique’, 252-78.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 20 of 246

• Julia R. Lupton ‘Samson Dagonistes’ in Citizen Saints: Shakespeare and Political Theology’ (Chicago: Chicago UP, 2005), 181-204. • John Carey ‘A Work in Praise of Terrorism’ TLS, Sept 6 2002, 16-17 • Alan Rudrum ‘Milton Scholarship and the Agon over Samson Agonistes’ HLQ 65 3-4 (2002), 465- 88. • Feisal Mohamed ‘Confronting Religious Violence in Milton’s Samson Agonistes’ PMLA 120.2 (2005), 327-40.

Week 7: The Politics of Regime Change: Literature of the Stuart Restoration (Paulina Kewes with Lorna Hutson)

NB this class will take place in the Habakkuk Room at Jesus College.

The Stuart Restoration in 1660 was greeted by a myriad of texts. These texts were all involved, in different ways, in efforts to determine the public perception of the interregnum, and to shape the image and values of the new king and the restored monarchy. They were also engaged in debates over the meanings and the nature of the British constitution. Though overwhelmingly celebratory and often overtly compliant, these publications performed important work, politically and culturally. In this class we shall concentrate on the Declaration of Breda and the Act of Indemnity and Oblivion, foundational documents of the new order, and the panegyrics by Abraham Cowley and the future Poet Laureate John Dryden as well as the writings by lesser lights. We shall consider how the legal or quasi-legal documents set the tone for public eulogy and shaped the treatment of national memory and expression of hopes for the new regime.

You should have a look at two relevant websites: http://stuarts.exeter.ac.uk/ and: http://stuarts- online.com/ and, using the on-line database available via the former, be prepared to discuss what the publications appearing in 1660-61 allow us to infer about the public understanding of, and attempts to shape, this latest regime change. Glance at one of the unfamiliar texts on EEBO and be ready to say a few words about it. And dip into Literature of the Stuart Successions: An anthology, ed. Andrew McRae and John West (MUP, 2017).

There will be three presentations:

1. Please consider the rhetorical structure and implications of the Declaration of Breda. How far might it illuminate contemporary imaginative writing? Please relate it to 'Charles II, 1660: An Act of Free and Generall Pardon Indempnity and Oblivion', in Statutes of the Realm: Volume 5, 1628- 80, ed. John Raithby (s.l, 1819), pp. 226-234. British History Online http://www.british- history.ac.uk/statutes-realm/vol5/pp226-234 [accessed 22 November 2017].

As well as offering a close reading of the Declaration, please say a few words about its context. Chuck II is still on the Continent – not in Breda in fact – and furiously negotiating for his return. So he is making a M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 21 of 246

number of public pitches, of which the DoB is the principal one. What is he promising? How is he speaking about the blood-soaked recent past? Figuring his relationship with his people? Parliament? What about his title/legitimacy? And how far might his periphrastic rhetoric shape the construction of his/the monarchy’s return in early Restoration poetry? Dryden had recently written an elegy for Cromwell – how is he welcoming the son of the royal martyr? Remember, the majority of the people had reconciled themselves to the Cromwellian regime, and while the royalists may have been harbouring vindictive feelings, those had to be held in check or else another revolution might follow. Have a look at the preamble to the Act of Indemnity and Oblivion (below) – which echoes the DoB.

'Charles II, 1660: An Act of Free and Generall Pardon Indempnity and Oblivion.', in Statutes of the Realm: Volume 5, 1628-80, ed. John Raithby (s.l, 1819), pp. 226-234. British History Online http://www.british-history.ac.uk/statutes-realm/vol5/pp226-234 [accessed 22 November 2017].

2. Please discuss Dryden’s response to, and construction of, the Restoration in Astraea Redux. Think in terms of genre, formal properties, cultural frames of reference, format and typography, etc.

3. Please do the same for Cowley.

All presenters: please formulate questions to be discussed by the whole group.

Primary

• Charles II, The Declaration of Breda (1660). • John Dryden, Astraea Redux (1660), in Dryden: Selected Poems, ed. Paul Hammond and David Hopkins (London, 2007). • Abraham Cowley, Ode Upon the Blessed Restoration and Returne of His Sacred Majestie Charls the Second (1660). • A chosen text from Gerald MacLean (ed.), The Return of the King: An Anthology of English Poems Commemorating the Restoration of Charles II (Electronic Text Center, University of Virginia Library). http://cowley.lib.virginia.edu/MacKing/MacKing.html

If you have the time and inclination, you might also glance at:

• George Morley, Bishop of Worcester, A sermon preached at the magnificent coronation of the most high and mighty King Charles the IId King of Great Britain, France, and Ireland, Defender of the Faith, &c.: at the Collegiate Church of S. Peter Westminster the 23d of April, being S. George's Day, 1661(London, 1661). • John Ogilby, The Entertainment of His Most Excellent Majestie Charles II . . . (London, 1662). [see The Entertainment of His Most Excellent Majestie Charles II in His Passage Through the City of

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 22 of 246

London to His Coronation, facsimile with Introd. by R. Knowles (Binghamton, N.Y: Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 1987).]

Secondary

• Paulina Kewes & Andrew McRae, Introduction to Stuart Succession Literature: Moments and Transformations, ed. Kewes & McRae (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2019): to be supplied in pdf. • Kevin Sharpe, Rebranding Rule The Restoration and Revolution Monarchy, 1660-1714 (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 2014). • Paulina Kewes, ‘Acts of Remembrance, Acts of Oblivion: Rhetoric, Law, and National Memory in Early Restoration England’, in Ritual, Routine, and Regime: Institutions of Repetition in Euro- American Cultures, 1650-1832, ed. Lorna Clymer (Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2006), pp. 103-31. • Andrew McRae, ‘Welcoming the King: The Politics of Stuart Succession Panegyric’, in Stuart Succession Literature, ed. Kewes & McRae. • Carolyn A. Edie, ‘Right Rejoicing: Sermons on the Occasion of the Stuart Restoration, 1660’, Bulletin of the John Rylands University of Manchester Library, 62 (1972), 61-86. • N. H. Keeble, The Restoration: England in the 1660s (Oxford: Blackwell, 2002). • David R. Evans, ‘Charles II’s “Grand Tour”: Restoration Panegyric and the Rhetoric of Travel Literature, Philological Quarterly, 72 (1993), 53-71. • Gerard Reedy S.J., ‘Mystical Politics: The Imagery of Charles II’s Coronation’, in Paul J. Korshin (ed.), Studies in Change and Revolution: Aspects of English Intellectual History 1640-1800 (Menston: The Scholar Press, 1972), pp. 19-42. • Jessica Munns, ‘Accounting for Providence: Contemporary Descriptions of the Restoration of Charles II’, in Dan Doll and Jessica Munns (eds), Recording and Reordering: Essays on the Seventeenth- and Eighteenth-Century Journal (Lewisburg, PA: Bucknell UP, 2006), pp. 102-121. • Tim Harris, ‘The Restoration in Britain and Ireland’, in Michael Braddick (ed.), The Oxford Handbook of the English Revolution (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2015). • See also the Stuart Successions database and bibliographies available at http://stuarts.exeter.ac.uk/.

Week 8: The Female Signature (Lorna Hutson with Kathryn Murphy)

This class is not about adding women into the canon; rather, it asks students to think about how we gender literary utterance, assigning it ‘feminine’ or ‘masculine’ characteristics. After all, for many people, the most compelling ‘feminine’ voices of the period are those of Shakespeare’s women characters and criticism often treats these as ‘women’s voices’. Boys were taught at grammar school to imitate the ‘women’s’ voices created by Ovid’s Heroides or Letters of Heroines; Sidney and Donne imitate Sappho. At the same time, good style is linked to masculinity, as we see in Jonson’s Discoveries (1641). Can women themselves produce a ‘woman’s voice’? Can they be said to achieve their own ‘style’? For this class, we

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 23 of 246

will consider Elizabeth Harvey’s theorization of the ‘ventriloquized voice’ and will focus on two case studies: first, the so-called ‘Casket Sonnets’, attributed to Mary Queen of Scots (1542-1587), and second, selected poems by the royalist Katherine Philips (1632-1664). For Mary Stewart, students will compare the sonnets as they appear in Ane detectioun of the doingis of Marie Quene of Scottis (1572 – you can consult this on EEBO, or in the Weston Library) with one modern edition, such as that by Clifford Bax or . What generic characteristics and paratextual framings encourage the Casket Sonnets to read these as ‘a woman’s voice’? For Katherine Philips, you will read a selection of poems, some of which turn on the questions of permission, authority and liability for writing and circulating poetry, as well as questions of judgement in reading and listening to it. How do these poems constitute the femininity of the writer and of the scene of poetic judgement?

Primary Reading:

• Mary Stuart, Casket Sonnets in Ane detectioun of the doingis of Marie Quene of Scottis: tuiching the murther of hir husband, and hir conspiracie, adulterie, and pretensit mariage with the Erle Bothwell. And ane defence of the trew Lordis, M.G.B. (St Andrews: Robert Lekprevik, 1572 or London, John Day, 1571) [On EEBO, and in the Weston Library]* • Katherine Philips, from The Collected Works of Katherine Phillips: the Matchless Orinda ed. Patrick Thomas (Stump Cross Books, 1990), read the following: 1. ‘Upon the double murther of K. Charles, in answer to a libellous rime made by V. P.’; 33. ‘To Antenor, on a paper of mine wch J. Jones threatened to publish to his prejudice’; 36. ‘To my excellent Lucasia, on our friendship. 17th July 1651’; 38. ‘Injuria amici’; 54. ‘To my dearest Antenor on his parting.’; 59. ‘To my Lucasia, in defence of declared friendship’; 69. ‘To my Lady Elizabeth Boyle, Singing --- Since affairs of the State &co.’ *

• [You can also find these in Poems by the most deservedly Admired Katherine Philips: The matchless Orinda (London: 1667) which you can find on EEBO]

Secondary Reading: (asterisked items are required reading)

• Elizabeth Harvey, ‘Travesties of Voice: Cross-Dressing the Tongue’ and ‘Ventriloquizing Sappho, or the Lesbian Muse’ in Ventriloquized Voices: Feminist Theory and English Renaissance Texts (Routledge, 1992), pp. 15-53, 116-139.* • Rosalind Smith, ‘Generating Absence: The Sonnets of Mary Stuart’ in Sonnets and the English Woman Writer: The Politics of Absence, 1561-1621 (Palgrave, 2005) 39-60, 132-139.* • James Emerson Philips, Images of a Queen: Mary Stuart in Sixteenth Century Literature (University of California Press, 1964) ch. 3 pp. 52-84. • Sarah Dunningan, Eros and Poetry at the Court of Mary Queen of Scots and James VI (Palgrave, 2002) • Carol Barash, 'Women's Community and the Exiled King: Katherine Philips's Society of Friendship', in English Women's Poetry 1649-1714 (Oxford, 1996).*

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 24 of 246

• Valerie Traub, ‘“Friendship so curst”: amor impossibilis, the homoerotic lament, and the nature of lesbian desire’, The Renaissance of Lesbianism in Early Modern England (Cambridge, 2002) 276- 325. • Lorna Hutson, ‘The Body of the Friend and the Woman Writer: Katherine Philips’s Absence from Alan Bray’s The Friend (2003)’, Women’s Writing, 14:2 (August, 2007) 196-214. • Kate Lilley, ‘Fruits of Sodom: The Critical Erotics of Early Modern Women's Writing’, Parergon 29.2 (2012) 175-192. • Patricia Pender and Rosalind Smith, eds., Material Cultures of Early Modern Women’s Writing (Palgrave, 2014) [NB: chapters on Mary Stuart and Katherine Philips] • On masculine style, see Patricia Parker, ‘Virile Style’, in Premodern Sexualities ed. Louise Fradenburg and Carla Freccero (1996).

M.St. in English (1700-1830) A-Course

Professor Fiona Stafford & Dr Freya Johnston

A-Course Michaelmas Term 2018 (Mondays 11 am)

The A-course is designed to introduce some of the key genres, ideas, and critical debates that characterize literature written between 1700 and 1830. It is organized chronologically and thematically. Week by week, students will be asked to read in advance several primary texts and secondary works (details of the latter will be provided in the seminars). We will consider in various ways the emergence of a literary canon in the course of the long eighteenth century, and how such a canon has fared since then.

The A-Course is not formally assessed, but offers a chance for the whole MSt group to read, explore, and discuss the period both widely and closely: it should therefore stimulate and support work for the B- Course, C-Course, and dissertation. All students will give one presentation in the course of the term.

Week 1

• Alexander Pope, The Rape of the Lock (1714); • John Gay, Trivia, or the Art of Walking the Streets of London (1716); • Jonathan Swift, A Beautiful Young Nymph Going to Bed (1734).

Week 2

• Thomas Gray, Elegy Written In a Country Churchyard (1751); • Oliver Goldsmith, The Vicar of Wakefield (1766); • Laurence Sterne, A Sentimental Journey (1768).

Week 3

• Samuel Johnson, The Lives of the English Poets (1779-81): Swift, Pope, Gray, Gay, Savage; • Mary Leapor, ‘The Muse’s Embassy’, ‘Epistle of Deborah Dough’ (1748-51).

Week 4 M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 25 of 246

• James Boswell, Journal of a Tour to the Hebrides (1785); • Robert Burns, Poems, Chiefly in the Scottish Dialect (1786), Tam O’Shanter (1791). Week 5

• William Wordsworth and Samuel Taylor Coleridge, Lyrical Ballads (1798); • Dorothy Wordsworth, Alfoxden Journal (1797-8) • William Hazlitt, ‘My First Acquaintance with Poets’ (1823)

Week 6

• Jane Austen, Sense and Sensibility: A Novel (1811) • Anna Laetitia Barbauld, Eighteen Hundred and Eleven, A Poem (1812) Week 7

• George Gordon, Lord Byron, Don Juan (1818-24) • Percy Bysshe Shelley, Julian and Maddalo: A Conversation (1818-19)

Week 8

• John Keats, ‘Ode to a Nightingale’, ‘Ode on a Grecian Urn’, ‘The Eve of St Agnes, ‘Hyperion’ (1820), ‘Epistle to Reynolds’, Letter to George and Tom Keats, Dec 21/27 1817, Letter to Reynolds, 3 May, 1818, Journal Letter to George and Georgian Keats, April-May 1819 • John Clare, ‘Bird’s Nest Poems’, The Shepherd’s Calendar (1827)

M.St. in English (1830-1914) A-Course

Michaelmas Term 2018

Convenors: Professor Kirsten Shepherd-Barr & Professor Matthew Bevis

This strand’s A-course aims to further students’ knowledge of the literature in the period 1830-1914, and to deepen their sense of established and emerging critical debates in the field. The course ranges across genres and modes, engaging with theatrical works, poetry, and prose writing, and classes will draw on both primary and secondary texts. Unless specified below, students are required to bring their own copies of the primary texts to class (the editions listed below are highly recommended). Each class will open with one or two presentations by students, who are asked to engage critically with the material, not just to summarize it. Access to some materials for the classes will be provided via two routes: either via the URLs below, or as scanned documents via Weblearn.

Week 1 – Boundaries (MB, KSB)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 26 of 246

What does ‘culture’ mean in the nineteenth century? How does it develop across the period in a rapidly changing intellectual, social, political, and literary landscape? And how does the ‘theory’ of culture meet and part company with the ‘practice’ of it? This session focuses on the work of Matthew Arnold—the figure Henry James called ‘the poet of his age, of the moment in which we live, of our ‘modernity’”—in order to explore some key issues relating to culture. It also provides a literary toolkit for students engaging with this dynamic concept throughout the course, as well as broaching the problematics of ‘beginnings’ and ‘endings’ and the arbitrariness of periodization.

Primary Reading:

• Matthew Arnold, Culture and Anarchy, ed. Jane Garnett (Oxford Classics, 2006)

• Matthew Arnold, Preface to Poems (1853) + selected poems from Complete Poems, ed. Kenneth Allott (1979) – handout will be provided

Secondary Reading:

• Stefan Collini, introduction to his edition of Culture and Anarchy and Other Writings (1993) + Collini, Matthew Arnold: A Critical Portrait (2008) • Ian Hamilton, Matthew Arnold: A Gift Imprisoned (1998) • Lionel Trilling, Matthew Arnold (repr. 1982) • John Holloway, chapter on Arnold in The Victorian Sage: Studies in Argument (1953) • Raymond Williams, from Culture and Society, 1780-1950 (1958): “Introduction”, + Chs. 3, “Mill on Bentham and Coleridge” and 6, “J. H. Newman and Matthew Arnold”, and, from Keywords: A Vocabulary of Culture and Society (1976), chapters on “Criticism” and “Culture” • Isobel Armstrong, ed., Section II from Victorian Scrutinies: Reviews of Poetry 1830-1970 (1972) • David Russell, ‘Matthew Arnold and The Function of Criticism’, in On Tact: Aesthetic Liberalism and the Essay Form in Nineteenth-Century Britain (2017) • Rita Felski, “‘Context Stinks!’”, New Literary History 42 (Autumn 2011) • Introduction, Twenty-First Century Approaches to Literature: Late Victorian into Modern, ed. Laura Marcus, Michele Mendelssohn, and Kirsten E. Shepherd-Barr (2016); available as e-book via SOLO • Matthew Bevis, introduction to The Art of Eloquence (2007)

Week 2 – Science and Interdisciplinarity (KSB leading)

This session reads examples of Darwin and other scientists as a way into ‘science’ in the period and how it relates to literature. The session will touch on key debates raised by scientific work, the ways in which we read these writings as literature, and the implications and challenges of ‘interdisciplinarity’ both in the 19th century and now.

Primary reading:

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 27 of 246

• Charles Darwin, extracts as follows, with links to where they appear on Darwin Online: • On the Origin of Species (1859, first edition): Chapter 3, "Struggle for Existence," and chapter 14, "Recapitulation and Conclusion" • http://darwin-online.org.uk/content/frameset?itemID=F373&viewtype=text&pageseq=1 • The Descent of Man (1871, first ed.): Part II, "Sexual Selection" • http://darwin-online.org.uk/content/frameset?pageseq=13&itemID=F937.1&viewtype=side • (p. 253 begin) • The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals (1872): Chapter 13: "Self-Attention— Shame—Shyness—Modesty: Blushing" • http://darwin-online.org.uk/content/frameset?itemID=F1142&viewtype=text&pageseq=1 • George Eliot, excerpt from The Mill on the Floss (1860)—final chapter • Gilbert and Sullivan, excerpt from Princess Ida (1884), Song number 15: ‘A Lady Fair, of Lineage High’. http://www.gsarchive.net/princess_ida/webop/pi_15.html • John Tyndall, ‘Address Delivered before the British Association Assembled at Belfast, with Additions, 1874’. http://www.victorianweb.org/science/science_texts/belfast.html

Secondary reading:

• Laura Otis, ed., Literature and Science in the Nineteenth Century: An Anthology (2002), Introduction • Gillian Beer, Open Fields: Science in Culture Encounter, chapter on ‘The Death of the Sun’ (1999) • Charlotte Sleigh, introduction to Literature and Science (2010) • Kirsten E. Shepherd-Barr, Theatre and Evolution from Ibsen to Beckett (2015)—see introduction and early chapters for evolution and Victorian culture, particularly pp. 32ff on Princess Ida

Week 3 – Maddened Selves (MB leading)

The word ‘subjectivity’ is a nineteenth-century coinage, and in the course of the period it came to mean both ‘the quality in literature or art which depends on the expression of the personality or individuality of the artist’, and ‘the condition of being dominated by or absorbed in one’s personal feelings, thoughts, concerns’ (OED). This class focuses on two dramatic poems published in the same year in order to explore Victorian debates about psychology, sanity, and madness. We also explore female ‘madness’ as rendered in an iconic story by Perkins Gilman.

Primary reading:

• Tennyson, Maud: A Monodrama, in Tennyson: Selected Poems, ed. Christopher Ricks (2007) • Browning, ‘Childe Roland to The Dark Tower Came’, in Robert Browning: Selected Poems, ed. Daniel Karlin (2000) • Charlotte Perkins Gilman, ‘The Yellow Wall-Paper’ (1892)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 28 of 246

Secondary reading:

• James Whitehead, Madness and The Romantic Poet: A Critical History (2017) • Harold Bloom, ‘The Internalization of Quest-Romance’ in Romanticism and Consciousness (1970) • Eric Griffiths, The Printed Voice of Victorian Poetry (1989) – chapter on Tennyson (especially sub-section ‘Morbidly Speaking’) • Jenny Bourne-Taylor and Sally Shuttleworth, eds., Embodied Selves: An Anthology of Psychological Texts 1830-1890 (1998) – see especially the short introductory sections on ‘The Unconscious Mind and the Workings of Memory’ and ‘Insanity and Nervous Disorders’

Week 4 – Nature and the Environment (KSB leading)

In this session we focus on what nature and the environment meant in nineteenth-century contexts, through the prism of selected writers and across a range of genres. Where is ‘eco-criticism’ now, and how are we reading Victorian writers in relation not only to their own experiences of ecology, nature, and environment but in light of our own? The session also extends the study we made of science and literature in week 2.

Primary reading:

• Christina Rossetti, ‘Hurt no living thing,’ ‘Hopping Frog, hop here and be seen,’ ‘Hear what the mournful linnets say’, all in Christina Rossetti: Complete Poems, ed. Betty Flowers (2001), or in In Nature’s Name: An Anthology of Women’s Writing and Illustration, 1780-1930, ed. Barbara T. Gates (2002) • Gerard Manley Hopkins, ‘Binsey Poplars’, in Hopkins: The Major Works, ed. Phillips (2009) • Charles Dickens, Our Mutual Friend (Oxford Classics edition), chapter 1 • Thomas Hardy, Two on a Tower (1882)

Secondary reading:

• Richard Kerridge, ‘Ecological Hardy,’ in Beyond Nature Writing: Expanding the Boundaries of Ecocriticism, ed. Karla Ambruster and Kathleen R. Wallace (Univ. of Virginia Press, 2001), 126-42. • Gillian Beer, ‘Darwin and The Uses of Extinction’, Victorian Studies, 51.2 (Winter 2009) • If you are interested in further sources of and on Victorian eco-crit: http://www.victorianweb.org/victorian/science/environment/index.html

Week 5 – Comedy and Culture (MB leading)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 29 of 246

The nineteenth century is not generally renowned for its comedy, and yet the period witnessed increasing debate about the causes and effects of comic writing, and about how humour might be used to resist and respond to wider socio-political developments. By taking two novels from the 1880s—one from Britain, and one from the US—and considering them side-by-side, this class seeks to examine how—or whether—comedy may be used (and, perhaps, abused) as part of the work and play of culture.

Primary reading:

• Mark Twain, The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (1884) – ed. Elliott (Oxford Classics, 2008) + Twain’s essay, ‘How to Tell a Story’ • Jerome K. Jerome, Three Men in A Boat (1889), ed. Jeremy Lewis (Penguin Classics, 2004)

Secondary reading:

• George Meredith, On the Idea of Comedy and the Uses of the Comic Spirit (1877) • T. S. Eliot, ‘Introduction to The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn’, repr. in the Norton Critical Edition of the Novel, ed. Cooley (1999) • Henri Bergson, Laughter (1900) • R.B. Henkle, Comedy and Culture: 1820-1900 (1980) • R. B. Martin, The Triumph of Wit: A Study of Victorian Comic Theory (1974)

Week 6 – Performance (KSB leading)

George Henry Lewes observed toward the end of the century that ‘we are all spectators of ourselves.’ What accounts for this apparent emergence of a self-conscious performative element in everyday life and culture? How does it relate to the concomitant, and seemingly diametrically opposed, emergence of naturalism in the theatre—and where does ‘realism’ fit on this spectrum of performative modes? The session explores such questions through examples that specifically feature female playwrights.

Primary reading:

• Elizabeth Robins, Alan’s Wife (1893) • Anna Cora Mowatt, Fashion (1845) • Beatrice Harraden, ‘Lady Geraldine’s Speech (1909), in The Methuen Book of Suffrage Plays, ed. Naomi Paxton (2013) • Emile Zola, ‘Le Naturalisme au theatre’ (1878) • G.B. Shaw, How to Write a Good Play and other extracts

Secondary reading:

• Lynn Voskuil, Acting Naturally (2004) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 30 of 246

• Sos Eltis and Kirsten E. Shepherd-Barr, ‘What Was the New Drama?’ in Late Victorian into Modern (2016) • Sheila Stowell, ‘Rehabilitating Realism’, Journal of Dramatic Theory and Criticism, 6.2 (Spring 1992)

Week 7 — Knowing Children (MB leading)

‘Realism’ as a literary term was inaugurated in this period. Realism, though, has not generally been seen in relation to another form that flowered alongside it: nonsense. This class brings two prose fictions into dialogue in order to reconsider some questions that exercised the age: What do children know? And how do we know children?

Primary reading:

• Lewis Carroll, Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland and Through the Looking-Glass, ed. Hugh Haughton (Penguin Classics, 1998) • Henry James, What Maisie Knew, ed. Adrian Poole (Oxford Classics, 2008)

Secondary reading:

• William Empson, ‘Alice in Wonderland’, in Some Versions of Pastoral (1935) • Gillian Beer, Alice in Space: The Sideways Victorian World of Lewis Carroll (2016) • Seth Lerer, Children’s Literature (2008), chapter 9 on Nonsense • Michael Wood, ‘What Henry Knew’, in Literature and The Taste of Knowledge (2005) • Rachel Bowlby, A Child of One’s Own: Parental Stories (2013), ch. 11 ‘Between Parents: What Maisie Knew’ • Sally Shuttleworth, The Mind of The Child: Child Development in Literature, Science, and Medicine, 1840-1900 (2010)

Week 8 – Essayisms (MB and KSB leading)

‘Essayical’, ‘essaying’, ‘essayish’, ‘essaylet’, ‘essayistic’, ‘essayism’: according to the OED, these are all nineteenth-century coinages. This class examines the many lives of the essay in the period—its styles, pleasures, and preoccupations—and considers why so many writers turned to the form in order to explore cultural, aesthetic, and socio-political questions.

Primary reading:

• Selection of essays by Ralph Waldo Emerson, Thomas Carlyle, John Ruskin, George Eliot, Robert Louis Stevenson, Oscar Wilde, Vernon Lee, William James, Walter Pater, and [handout will be provided] • George Eliot, ‘Silly Novels by Lady Novelists’ Westminster Review, (Oct 1856): 442-461. [print]

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 31 of 246

Secondary reading:

• Gertrude Himmelfarb, The Spirit of the Age: Victorian Essays (2009) • Michael Hurley and Marcus Waithe, eds., Thinking Through Style: Non-Fiction Prose of the Long Nineteenth Century (2018) • Thomas Karshan and Katie Murphy, eds., Of Essays (2018) • David Russell, On Tact: Aesthetic Liberalism and the Essay Form in Nineteenth-Century Britain (2017) • Carl H. Klaus and Ned Stuckey-French, Essayists on the Essay: Montaigne to Our Time (2012) • Kuisma Korhonen, Textual Friendship: The Essay as Impossible Encounter from Plato and Montaigne to Levinas and Derrida (2006)

General information:

You might also prepare for the A-course by reading around in some of the edited collections below:

• Collins and Rundle, eds., The Broadview Anthology of Victorian Poetry and Poetic Theory (1999) • Josephine Guy, ed., The Victorian Age: An Anthology of Sources and Documents (1998) • Bristow, Joseph, ed., The Victorian Poet: Politics and Persona (1987) • Isobel Armstrong, Victorian Scrutinies: Reviews of Poetry 1830-1870 (1972) • Edwin Eigner and George Worth, eds., Victorian Criticism of the Novel (1985) • Edmund Jones, ed., English Critical Essays: The Nineteenth Century (1971) • Carol Hares-Stryker, ed., Anthology of Pre-Raphaelite Writings (1997) • Jenny Bourne-Taylor and Sally Shuttleworth, eds., Embodied Selves: An Anthology of Psychological Texts 1830-1890 (1998) • Laura Otis, ed., Literature and Science in the Nineteenth Century: An Anthology (2002) • Sally Ledger and Roger Luckhurst, eds, The Fin de Siècle: A Reader in Cultural History (2000)

Two particularly useful general studies:

• Philip Davis, The Victorians 1830-1880 (2004) – highly recommended • Robin Gilmour, The Victorian Period (1993)

Other ‘companions’, handbooks, etc. – useful for initial orientation:

• Herbert Tucker, ed., A Companion to Victorian Literature and Culture (1999) • Patrick Brantlinger and William B. Thesing, eds., A Companion to the Victorian Novel (2002) • Richard Cronin, Alison Chapman and Anthony Harrison, eds., A Companion to Victorian Poetry (2002) • Matthew Bevis, ed., The Oxford Handbook of Victorian Poetry (2013) • Lisa Rodensky, ed., The Oxford Handbook of the Victorian Novel (2013)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 32 of 246

See also the Cambridge Companions Online archive (available through SOLO). It contains all the Cambridge Companions to Literature, including volumes on Victorian Culture, Victorian Poetry, Victorian and Edwardian Theatre, and the Victorian Novel, as well as volumes on individual authors (Dickens, Wilde, Brontes, Eliot, Hardy, etc).

The Oxford Bibliographies Online: Victorian Literature is an excellent resource, accessed via SOLO and covering key authors and topics.

Also have a look at The Broadview Anthology of British Literature: The Victorian Era – useful sections on Darwin, Photography, The Aesthetic Movement, and much else besides.

Finally, two other superb sources of material:

• The Norton Critical and Broadview editions of particular texts. • The Critical Heritage series on particular authors – highly recommended. A really good way to get a sense of how contemporaries responded to the work of writers. See, for example, volumes on Tennyson (ed. Jump), George Eliot (ed. Carroll), Browning (ed. Litzinger), Hopkins (ed. Roberts), Dickens (ed. Collins), and Ibsen (ed. Egan).

M.St. in English (1900-Present) A-Course

A-course: literature, contexts, and approaches, 1900-present Thursday 9-11, History of the Book Room

Post-1900 Conveners: Professor Laura Marcus ([email protected]) Professsor Kate McLoughlin ([email protected])

This course will explore significant texts, themes, and critical approaches in our period, drawing on expertise from across the Faculty in modern literary studies. You should read as much in the bibliography over the summer as you can—certainly the primary literary texts listed in the seminar reading for each week. In weeks 2-8, a group of three members of the seminar will present for around 20 minutes on a question or topic inspired by the reading for the week in which they are presenting. Week 1: Models of Modernity (Professor Marcus and Professor McLoughlin)

How can we tell the story of literature from 1900 to the present? The nature of the overview will vary according to which authors, which literatures, and which modes of writing. This seminar, without pretending to offer a complete picture, will consider a range of influential and emergent accounts of the modern.

Seminar reading M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 33 of 246

• Raymond Williams, ‘When Was Modernism? New Left Review I/175 (May-June 1989): https://newleftreview.org/I/175/raymond-williams-when-was-modernism • Friedman, Susan Stanford. ‘Definitional Excursions: The Meanings of Modern/ Modernity/ Modernism’, Modernism / Modernity, 8 (2001): 493-513 • Douglas Mao and Rebecca Walkowitz, ‘The New Modernist Studies’, PMLA 123, 3 (May 2008): 737-48 • Michael H Whitworth, ‘When Was Modernism’, in Laura Marcus et al. Late Victorian into Modern (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016), 119-32 • Amy Hungerford, ‘On the Period Formerly Known as Contemporary’, American Literary History 20, 1-2 (Spring/Summer 2008): 410-19

Week 2: Keywords and Contested Signs (Dr Michael Whitworth)

How can we focus the cultural history of the period using the history of linguistic signs? What are the strengths and weaknesses of such an approach? What methodological questions does it raise? In this session we will be studying entries from Raymond Williams’s classic study and from more recent projects in a similar vein, and reading criticisms of these works.

Seminar reading • Cuddy-Keane, Melba, Adam Hammond, and Alexandra Peat. Modernism: Keywords • (Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell, 2014). • Leary, John Patrick. ‘Keywords for the Age of Austerity’ • https://theageofausterity.wordpress.com/ • Williams, Raymond. Keywords (1976, or, ideally, the expanded 1983 edition).

Further reading

If you can obtain the following easily, then read them; copies will be provided in term time: • Empson, William. ‘Compacted Doctrines’ (1977) • Argufying: Essays on Literature and Culture, ed. John Haffenden (London: Chatto & Windus, 1987), 185–6. A review of Williams, first published in the New York Review of Books • Skinner, Quentin. ‘The Idea of a Cultural Lexicon.’ Essays in Criticism 29 no.3 (July 1979), pp.205- 24

Week 3: Formalisms and Historicisms (Professor Kate McLoughlin)

Seminar Reading

• Hope Mirlees, Paris: A Poem [1918] in Collected Poems, ed. Sandeep Parmar (Manchester: Carcanet, 2011) (a facsimile is accessible at http://hopemirrlees.com/mirrlees-resources/) • Jean E. Howard ‘The New Historicism in Renaissance Studies’, English Literary Renaissance 14.1 (December 1986), 13-43

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 34 of 246

• Marjorie Levenson, ‘What is New Formalism?’, PMLA 122.2 (March 2007), 558-69 (long version at http://sitemaker.umich.edu/pmla_article/home) • John Bender and David E. Wellbery, ‘Rhetoricality: On the Modernist Return of Rhetoric’ in The Ends of Rhetoric: History, Theory, Practice, ed. John Bender and David E. Wellbery (Stanford, California: Stanford University Press, 1990), 3-39 • Rita Felski, ‘Context Stinks!’, Context? special issue of New Literary History, 42.4 (Autumn 2011), 573-9

Week 4: Modernist Narrative (Jeri Johnson)

Seminar reading

, (1922) • Virginia Woolf, (1925)

Further reading • Joseph Frank, ‘Spatial Form in Modern Literature: An Essay in Two Parts’, The Sewanee Review, Vol. 53, no. 2 (Spring, 1945), pp. 221-240i • Erich Auerbach, Mimesis: the Representation of Reality in Western Literature (Princeton University Press, 1953, esp. chapter on Woolf, ‘The Brown Stocking’) • Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, trans. K.McLaughlin and D. Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984), Vol. 2 [chapter on the modernist time-novel, including Mrs Dalloway] • J.Hillis Miller, Fiction and Repetition: Seven English Novels (Oxford: Blackwell, 1982) [Includes chapters on Mrs Dalloway and Between the Acts] • Michael Levenson, Modernism and the Fate of Individuality: Character and Novelistic Form from Conrad to Woolf (Cambridge University Press, 2005) • Paul Saint-Amour, Tense Future: Modernism, Total War, Encyclopedic Form (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2015)

Week 5: Theatre and Society (Dr Eleanor Lybeck)

This seminar will attend to social changes in Britain since the Second World War as they are reflected in plays for theatre and in theatre history. The set texts will give us the opportunity to critique constructions of class, gender, and religion, and analyse how a playwright’s exploration of such issues requires innovations in form and performance. Contemporary reaction to these plays and their production histories will also be subjects for discussion, as we consider how the spirit of the age might be located in London’s theatreland, and beyond.

Seminar Reading

• John Osborne, Look Back in Anger (1956) • Samuel Beckett, Happy Days (1961) • Caryl Churchill, Vinegar Tom (1978)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 35 of 246

Further Reading

• David Hare, Racing Demon (1990) • Tom Stoppard, Rock ‘n’ Roll (2006) • Michael Billington, State of the Nation: British Theatre Since 1945 (London: Faber, 2007) • Richard Eyre and Nicholas Wright, Changing Stages: A View of British Theatre in the Twentieth Century (London: Bloomsbury, 2000) • Christopher Innes, Modern British Drama 1890-1990 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992) • Dan Rebellato, 1956 and All That: The Making of Modern British Drama (London: Routledge, 1999) • Alex Sierz, Rewriting the Nation: British Theatre Today (London: Methuen Drama, 2011) • John Russell Taylor, Anger and After: A Guide to the New British Drama (London: Methuen, 1962)

Week 6: Colonial Contact Zones (Professor Elleke Boehmer/Dr Graham Riach)

This seminar will consider some of the ways what we now call modernist writing registered the impact of empire. Was modernism a response to a far more intensive and disruptive contact with other cultures than Europe had registered previously? In what ways were both the expansion of empire and modernist writing catalysed by a global process of modernization?

Seminar reading

• Joseph Conrad, Heart of Darkness (1899) • Katherine Mansfield, Collected Short Stories, particularly: ‘Prelude’, ‘At the Bay’, ‘The Garden Party’ (i.e. her longer short fiction) • W.B. Yeats, Introduction to Rabindranath Tagore, Gitanjali (1912) • T.S. Eliot, The Waste Land (1922)

Further reading

• Edward Said, Culture and Imperialism (1993) (especially chapters 1-3) • Laura Doyle and Laura Winkiel (eds.) Geomodernisms: Race, Modernism, Modernity (2005) • Chinua Achebe, ‘An Image of Africa’, Norton Anthology 7th edn • Rod Edmond, Representing the South Pacific (Cambridge University Press, 1997)

Week 7: Literature and Visual Culture (Professor Laura Marcus)

Is modern culture a visual culture? If so, whose gaze does it privilege? In this seminar we’ll discuss some of the classic theoretical texts in visual culture studies in order to interrogate the association of modernity with the visual, the gendering of the gaze, and the impact of technological change. In a case study of Woolf’s To the Lighthouse, we’ll think about how literary texts are embedded in visual cultures and how they can depict and critique those cultures. We will also look at a recent novel, Don DeLillo’s Point Omega M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 36 of 246

(2010), in order to assess the new and different ways in which contemporary fiction is engaging with and incorporating visual media.

Seminar reading • Virginia Woolf, To the Lighthouse (1927); ‘The Cinema’ (1926) • Don DeLillo, Point Omega (2010). [Douglas Gordon’s video installation Psycho 24, a remaking of Hitchcock’s Psycho in slow time, is central to the novel – clips of Gordon’s installation should be available on YouTube.] • Walter Benjamin, ‘The Work of Art in the Age of its Technological Reproducibility’, in Walter Benjamin: Selected Writings, Vol 2, 1927-1934 (Harvard University Press, 1999), pp. 101-133. • W.J.T. Mitchell, ‘Showing Seeing: A Critique of Visual Culture’, Journal of Visual Culture, 1.2 (2002), 165-81 • Laura Mulvey, ‘Visual Pleasure and Narrative Cinema’, Screen, 16.3 (1975), 6-18

Further reading • John Berger, Ways of Seeing (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1972) • Norman Bryson, Michael Ann Holly and Keith Moxey, eds, Visual Culture: Images and Interpretations (Hanover, NH: University Press of New England, 1994) • Stanley Cavell, The World Viewed: Reflections on the Ontology of Film (Harvard University Press, 1999) • Jonathan Crary, Techniques of the Observer: On Vision and Modernity in the Nineteenth Century (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press) • Guy Debord, The Society of the Spectacle (New York: Zone Books, 1994) • Hal Foster ed., Vision and Visuality (Seattle, WA: Bay View Press/ Dia Art Foundation, 1988) • Michel Foucault, ‘The Eye of Power’, in Power/ Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings, 1972-1977, ed. by Colin Gordon (Brighton: Harvester Press, 1980), pp. 146-65 • Martin Jay, Downcast Eyes: The Denigration of Vision in Twentieth-Century French Thought (Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, 1993) • Nicholas Mirzoeff, ed., The Visual Culture Reader, 2nd edn (London: Routledge, 2002) • Laura Marcus, The Tenth Muse: Writing about Cinema in the Modernist Period (Oxford University Press, 2007) [Chapter 2 is on Virginia Woolf and cinema] • W.J.T. Mitchell, Iconology: Image, Text, Ideology (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986) • Jacqueline Rose, Sexuality in the Field of Vision (London: Verso, 1986) • Trotter, David, Cinema and Modernism (Blackwell: 2007); Literature in the First Media Age: Britain Between the Wars (Harvard University Press, 2013) • ‘Visual Culture Questionnaire’, October, 77 (1996), 25-70

Week 8: Late Styles (Dr David Dwan)

This seminar aims to explore different and sometimes rival conceptions of ‘lateness’ in contemporary poetry – the poet’s reflections on his/her own aging; the maturity of his/her own voice or style; the

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 37 of 246

lateness of a cultural movement or what we might call mannerism; the cultural practices of an epoch defined by a sense of its own lateness - or what we used to call postmodernism. How do these issues bear upon poetic form and our broader understanding of the function of poetry?

Seminar reading • Seamus Heaney, District and Circle (London: Faber, 2006) • Paul Muldoon, Songs and Sonnets (London: Enitharmon, 2012) Further reading • Theodor Adorno, ‘Late Style in Beethoven’, Essays on Music, trans. Susan Gillespie (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002) • Edward Said, from On Late Style (London: Bloomsbury, 2006) • Ben Hutchinson, Lateness and Modern European Literature (Oxford University Press, 2016)

M.St. in World Literatures in English A-Course

Professor Patrick Hayes [email protected]

Dr Graham Riach [email protected]

The Colonial, the Postcolonial, the World:

Literature, Contexts and Approaches (A/Core Course)

The A-course comprises 8 x 2-hour seminars and is intended to provide a range of perspectives on some of the core debates, themes and issues shaping the study of world and postcolonial literatures in English. In each case the seminar will be led by a member of the Faculty of English with relevant expertise, in dialogue with one or more short presentations from students on the week’s topic. There is no formally assessed A-course work, but students are asked to give at least one presentation on the course, and to attend all the seminars. You should read as much as possible of the bibliography over the summer – certainly the primary literary texts listed in the seminar reading for each week. The allocation of presenters will be made in a meeting in week 0.

Seminars take place on Tuesdays from 11-1 in the History of the Book Room in the English Faculty, except the seminar in week 4, which is held at St Hugh’s College.

Week 1

Theories of World Literature I: What Is World Literature?...What Isn’t World Literature? (Graham Riach)

This seminar will consider what we mean when we say ‘world literature’, looking at models proposed by critics as Emily Apter, David Damrosch, the WReC collective, and others. The category of ‘world literature’ has been in constant evolution since Johan Wolfgang von Goethe popularised the term in the early 19th Century, and in this session we will explore some of the key debates in the field. M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 38 of 246

Primary

• David Damrosch, What is World Literature? (2003). • ––– ‘What Isn’t World Literature’, lecture available at https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jfOuOJ6b-qY • WReC (Warwick Research Collective), Combined and Uneven Development: Towards a New Theory of World-Literature (Liverpool University Press, 2015) • Extracts from Johan Wolfgang von Goethe, Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels, Franco Moretti, Pascale Cassanova, Emily Apter and others.

Secondary

• David Damrosch, ‘World Literature in a Postcanonical, Hypercanonical Age’ in Haun Saussay ed., Comparative Literature in an Age of Globalization (2006), pp. 43-53. • Franco Moretti, ‘Conjectures on World Literature’, New Left Review 1 (2000) 54-68. • Mariano Siskind, ‘The Globalization of the Novel and The Novelization of the Global: A Critique of World Literature’, Comparative Literature 62 (2010) 4: 336-60

Week 2

Colonial Discourse (Professor Elleke Boehmer)

In this seminar we will spend time thinking of the global and of worldliness through various imperial and historical lenses, most notably, for those of us in Anglophone studies, of the British Empire. We will also consider whether it is possible to think of the global separately from various forms of imperialism or of what is called colonial discourse. In what other ways has the world been interconnected in the past? Here we might think of trade and trade routes, of kinship networks, of pilgrimage and crusading.

Primary

Extracts from Empire Writing, ed. Elleke Boehmer (OUP), in particular by Trevelyan, Schreiner, Kipling, Conrad, Sorabji, Tagore.

Secondary

• Patrick Brantlinger. The Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism 1830-1914 (1988) • James Belich et al, eds. The Prospect of Global History. (Oxford: OUP, 2016) • Anne McClintock. Imperial Leather: Race, Gender and Sexuality in the Colonial Contest (New York and London: Routledge, 1995) • Edward Said, Culture and Imperialism (Cape, 1993) • Patrick Williams and Laura Chrisman, Colonial Discourse and Postcolonial Theory (1993)

Week 3 M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 39 of 246

The (Un)translatability of World Literature (Dr Adriana X. Jacobs)

This seminar will examine the role of translation in the development of the category of world literature with a particular focus on the term “translatability.” We will consider how translation into “global” English has shaped contemporary understandings of translatability and how to reconcile these with the more recent turn to “untranslatability” in literary scholarship. To what extent are the parameters of world literature contingent on a translation economy that privileges certain languages, authors and texts over authors? What room is there in current configurations of world literature for works that “do not measure up to certain metrics of translational circulation” (Zaritt)?

Primary

• Emily Apter, Against World Literature: On the Politics of Untranslatability (New York: Verso, 2013) • “To Translate,” in Dictionary of Untranslatables: A Philosophical Lexicon, Barbara Cassin, ed., ed. and trans. Emily Apter, Jacques Lezra, and Michael Wood (Princeton: Princeton UP, 2014): 1139- 1155. (read introduction online: http://press.princeton.edu/titles/10097.html)

Secondary

• Antoine Berman, “Translation and the Trials of the Foreign,” trans. Lawrence Venuti, in The Translation Studies Reader, 3rd edition (New York/Abingdon: Routledge, 2012): 240-253 • Johannes Göransson, “‘Transgressive Circulation’: Translation and the Threat of Foreign Influence,” Cordite Poetry Review (November 1, 2016): www.cordite.org.au/essays/transgressive-circulation • Ignacio Infante, “On The (Un)Translatability of Literary Form: Framing Contemporary Translational Literature,” Translation Review 95.1 (2016): 1-7 • Lydia Liu, “The Problem of Language in Cross-Cultural Studies,” in Translingual Practice:Literature, National Culture, and Translated Modernity—China, 1900-1937 (Stanford: Stanford UP, 1995): 1-42 • Ronit Ricci, “On the untranslatability of ‘translation’: Considerations from Java, Indonesia,” Translation Studies 3.3 (2010): 287-301 • Saul Zaritt, “‘The World Awaits Your Yiddish Word’: Jacob Glatstein and the Problem of World Literature,” Studies in American Jewish Literature (1981-) 34.2 (2015): 175-203

Week 4

English in the world/Language beyond relativity (Professor Peter McDonald)

NOTE: Venue for this week is St Hugh’s College, Louey Seminar Room. Take the Canterbury Road entrance to St Hugh’s.

Primary

• The Oxford English Dictionary (especially 1989 print edition and online, 2000-) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 40 of 246

• Sarah Ogilvie, Words of the World: A Global History of the Oxford English Dictionary (2012) • Florian Coulmas, Guardians of the Language (2016) • Perry Link’s short essay ‘The Mind: Less Puzzling in Chinese? (New York Review of Books, 30 June 2016), which is available via: http://www.nybooks.com/daily/2016/06/30/the-mind-less-puzzling-in- chinese/?utm_medium=email&utm_campaign=NYR%20Krugman%20on%20King%20Als%20on%20Mart in%20Cole%20on%20police&utm_content=NYR%20Krugman%20on%20King%20Als%20on%20Martin %20Cole%20on%20police+CID_9def725d3263b14fe6dce4894ed64907&utm_source=Newsletter&ut m_term=The%20Mind%20in%20Chinese

Secondary

• Jacques Derrida, Monolingualism of the Other, or The Prosthesis of Origin, trans. Patrick Mensah, 1998 (French edition, 1996) • Charles Taylor, The Language Animal (2016)

Preparation

A (2 students: position papers, maximum 1000 words, on ONE of the following. Please ensure both topics are covered. Also bring along a handout with your key quotations—copies for the entire group)

1. Explain the significance of the epigraphs from Glissant and Khatibi for Derrida’s argument and analysis in Monolingualism.

2. Explain Taylor’s distinction between ‘designative-instrumental’ and ‘expressive-constitutive’ theories of language.

B (all remaining students: single-sided A4 handout—copies for the entire group)

Browse the OED, especially using the online feature that allows you to group words by origin and/or region, and select ONE loanword from a non-European language. On one side of an A-4 sheet give an account of the word, explaining why you think it has particular significance in the long history of lexical borrowing that constitutes the English language and the shorter history of the linguistic relativity thesis.

Week 5

Theories of World Literature II: Is World Literature Beautiful? (Graham Riach)

Traditional definitions of world literature are heavily based on the idea of universal cultural value. This seminar will consider some of the main issues in universalist conceptions of world literary value, particularly in relation to aesthetics, and the role of interpretive communities in dealing with distances in time, culture and language.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 41 of 246

Primary

• Simon Gikandi, Slavery and the Culture of Taste (Princeton University Press, 2014) • Sianne Ngai, Our Aesthetic Categories: Zany, Cute, Interesting (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2012)

Secondary

• Isobel Armstrong, The Radical Aesthetic (Oxford: Blackwell, 2000) • Bill Ashcroft, ‘Towards a Postcolonial Aesthetics’, Journal of Postcolonial Writing, 51, 4 (2015), pp. 410-421 • Elleke Boehmer, ‘A Postcolonial Aesthetic: Repeating Upon the Present’, in Janet Cristina Şandru Wilson and Sarah Lawson Welsh eds., Rerouting the Postcolonial: New Directions for the New Millennium (2010), pp. 170-181 • Peter de Bolla, Art Matters (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2001) • Simon Gikandi, ‘Race and the Idea of the Aesthetic’, Michigan Quarterly Review, 40,2 (2001), pp.318–50. • Peter J. Kalliney, Commonwealth of Letters: British Literary Culture and the Emergence of Postcolonial Aesthetics (Oxford: OUP, 2013) • Catherine Noske, ‘A Postcolonial Aesthetic? An Interview with Robert Young’, Journal of Postcolonial Writing, 50, 5, 609-621 (2014) • Rethinking Beauty, special issue of diacritics (32.1, Spring 2002)

Week 6

Between Nation and World, English and Other Languages (Professor Margaret Hillenbrand)

Many writers and critics feel anxious about the entrenched status of English as the language for World Literature, while others again remain unmoved by the lure of the planetary even as their work travels well beyond the limiting geography of the nation. In this seminar, we look at the idea of regional, continental, trans-oceanic, or area-based alignments for writers and thinkers, with a particular focus on Asia. On the one hand, such sub-global confederacies rely on the kind of rooted knowledge of texts and contexts that deracinated global English is threatening to make academically redundant. But on the other, these literary alliances seldom have a single language in common. What, then, might their critical terms of engagement be? What kind of communal, communicative spaces can writers and theorists open up between nation and world, English and other languages?

Primary

• Takeuchi Yoshimi, What is Modernity?: Writings of Takeuchi Yoshimi, translated by Richard F. Calichman (New York: Columbia University Press, 2005), chapter 6 • Kuan-hsing Chen, Asia as Method (Durham: Duke University Press, 2010), chapter 5

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 42 of 246

Secondary

• Aamir Mufti, Forget English! Orientalisms and World Literatures (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 2015), prologue and chapter 3 • Gayatri Spivak, Other Asias (Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell, 2007), chapter 7 • David Damrosch and Gayatri Spivak, “Comparative Literature/World Literature: A Discussion with David Damrosch and Gayatri Spivak”, Comparative Literary Studies 48/4 (2011): 455-85 • Haruo Shirane, “What Global English Means for World Literature”, Public Books, October 1 2015 http://www.publicbooks.org/what-global-english-means-for-world-literature/

Week 7

Autoethnography (Professor Patrick Hayes)

This seminar is about the ways in which self-representation is affected by ideas about multiculturalism, diversity, and hybridity, particularly as those ideas function within the institutions of publishing, prize- giving, and reviewing. Particular attention will be paid to the handling of language variation and voice.

Primary

• Daljit Nagra, Look We Have Coming to Dover! (2007) • Sarah Howe, Loop of Jade (2015)

Secondary

• Sonia Dyer, Boxed In: How Cultural Diversity Policies Constrict Black Artists (2007) – available online • Arif Dirlik, ‘Literature/Identity: Transnationalism, Narrative and Representation’, The Review of Education, Pedagogy, and Cultural Studies, 24: 209–234, 2002

Week 8

The World at War (Dr Kate Kennedy)

This session looks at how the world was written during the First World War. It examines nurses and soldiers’ narratives, writing about and from different parts of the world. Ranging from Rupert Brooke’s travels to Tahiti to Florence Farmborough’s description of the daily experience of a British woman in wartime Russia, this session will consider the First World War in its global dimensions.

Primary

• Rupert Brooke, Selection from his Letters • Florence Farmborough, Nurse on the Russian Front: A Diary 1914-1918 (1974)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 43 of 246

• Alexander Craig Aitken, Gallipoli to the Somme: Recollections of a New Zealand Infantryman (1963) [If hard to find, excerpts will be available. Please contact tutor]

Secondary

• Santanu Das, Race, Empire and First World War Writing (2011) and India, Empire and the First World War: Words, Images and Objects (2018 [Forthcoming])

M.St. in English & American Studies A-Course Dr Nick Gaskill & Professor Lloyd Pratt

Michaelmas Term

Stories of American Literature

This course offers an overview of several dominant, residual, oppositional, and emergent accounts of American literature. It does not propose a comprehensive history of American literature or American literary studies—far from it. It instead reads some key primary texts in light of several influential twentieth- and twenty-first-century frameworks for studying American writing, prose fiction in particular. The central assumption is that in order to understand American literature, you have to understand the ways others have understood it. The goal is not to overcome these other understandings. It is to begin constructing a sketch of the field of American literary studies, as well as its (sometimes oblique) relations to American studies, cultural studies, and the broader discipline of literary studies, across the twentieth- and twenty-first-centuries. We will also attend to how scholars have answered several fundamental methodological questions: What are our objects of study? What geographical, national, institutional, or cultural frames are best suited to analyze those objects? What are the conditions necessary for a group of texts to be bundled together as a coherent literary tradition? What is the relationship of literature (and literary studies) to history and philosophy?

Each week we will expect you to have read the full primary text and selections from the secondary texts as listed below the bibliographic entry. You will receive an email from us in mid-September explaining how to access the secondary readings online. If you do not have access to a library with the secondary materials before arriving in Oxford, you should concentrate on reading (or re-reading) the primary texts, all of which should be readily available. If you do have access to the secondary materials, we would recommend you start your reading of them as soon as possible.

In advance of Week 1, we will distribute a list of four questions we’ll use to guide our discussion of that week’s readings. We will provide a brief introduction to the readings at the beginning of each meeting. In Week 2, we will meet individually with each of you; we will not meet for seminar in Week 2. In Weeks 3-6, two (or three) students will work together to produce and distribute four discussion questions in advance. They will also lead the discussion after my brief introduction.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 44 of 246

In the final two weeks of the course, each of you will present a report on a recent primary text and a recent scholarly text. The list of texts you may choose from and the format of the reports are found at the end of this reading schedule. In addition to your A, B, and C Courses and Dissertation, you are expected to attend the American Literature Research Seminar. Any conflicts with attending the ALRS should be cleared in advance with the course-convenors.

Week 1: What’s “American” about American Literature?

 Melville, Herman. Moby-Dick (1851): Norton Critical Edition (3rd ed.), ed. Hershel Parker (New York: Norton, 2018)

Secondary Sources (in chronological order)

 Lawrence, D.H. Studies in Classic American Literature (New York: Penguin, 1923) o Ch. 1: “The Spirit of Place”  Matthiessen, F.O. American Renaissance: Art and Expression in the Age of Emerson and Whitman (New York: Oxford UP, 1941) o “Method and Scope”  Book 3: Melville, especially Ch. X, “The Revenger’s Tragedy”  Trilling, Lionel. The Liberal Imagination [1950] (New York: NYRB Books, 2008) o “The Sense of the Past”  Miller, Perry. Errand into the Wilderness (Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1956) o “Preface” o Ch. 1: “Errand into the Wilderness”  Chase, Richard. The American Novel and Its Tradition (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1957) o Introduction o Ch. 1: “The Broken Circuit” o Recommended: Ch. 5: “Melville and Moby-Dick”  Bercovitch, Sacvan. The Puritan Origins of the American Self (New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1975) o Preface o Ch. 1: “Puritanism and the American Self”  Wise, Gene. “ ‘Paradigm Dramas’ in American Studies: A Cultural and Institutional History of the Movement,” American Quarterly 31.3 (1979): 293-337

Week 2: Individual Meetings

Week 3: Philosophy and the Work of Style

• Emerson, Ralph Waldo. Essays and Lectures (New York: Library of America, 1983) • ––– Nature (1836) • ––– “The American Scholar” (1838) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 45 of 246

• ––– Divinity School Address (1838) • ––– “The Method of Nature” (1841) • ––– from Essays: First Series (1841) o “Self-Reliance” o “Compensation” o “Circles” • ––– from Essays: Second Series (1844) o “The Poet” o “Experience” • Poirier, Richard. A World Elsewhere: The Place of Style in American Literature [1966] (Madison, WI: U of Wisconsin P, 1985). o Ch. 1: “Self and Environment” • Cavell, Stanley. This New Yet Unapproachable America: Lectures after Emerson after Wittgenstein (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1988) o II: “Finding as Founding: Taking Steps in Emerson’s ‘Experience’” • Richardson, Joan. A Natural History of Pragmatism: The Fact of Feeling from Jonathan Edwards to Gertrude Stein (Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2007) o Ch. 1: “Introduction: Frontier Instances” o Ch. 3: “Emerson’s Moving Pictures” • Arsić, Branka. On Leaving: A Reading in Emerson (Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 2010) o “Introduction: In the Mode of Water” o Ch. 1: “Standing Still” o Ch. 4: “Brain Walks: Thinking”

Week 4: The Object of Study: From Myths to Interventions (and Back Again)

• Ralph Ellison, Invisible Man [1952] (New York: Vintage, 1995) • Fieldler, Leslie. Love and Death in the American Novel (New York: Anchor, 1960, revised 1966) o Pt. 1, Ch. 1: “The Novel and America” o Pt. 2, Ch. 11: “The Failure of Sentiment and the Evasion of Love” • Pease, Donald E., “New Americanists: Revisionist Interventions into the Canon,” boundary 2 17.1 (Spring 1990): 1-37. • Morrison, Toni. Playing in the Dark: Whiteness and the Literary Imagination (New York: Vintage, 1992): beginning to p. 17, 44-59, 63-69, 90-91. • Winfred Fluck, “American Literary History and the Romance with America,” American Literary History 21.1 (spring 2009): 1-18. • Castiglia, Christopher. Practices of Hope: Literary Criticism in Disenchanted Times (New York: NYU P, 2017). o “Introduction: Practices of Hope and Tales of Disenchantment”

Week 5: African American Literature and the Legacy of Slavery

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 46 of 246

• Morrison, Toni. Beloved [1987] (New York: Vintage, 2004) • Gilroy, Paul. The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double Consciousness (Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1995) o Preface o Ch. 1: “The Black Atlantic as a Counterculture of Modernity” • Hartman, Saidiya. Scenes of Subjection: Terror, Slavery, and Self-Making in Nineteenth-Century America (New York: Oxford, 1997) • Introduction o Ch. 1: “Innocent Amusements: The Stage of Sufferance” o Ch. 2: “Redressing the Pained Body: Toward a Theory of Practice” • Warren, Kenneth. What Was African American Literature? (Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 2011) o Ch. 1: Historicizing African American Literature” o Ch. 3: “The Future of the Past” • Best, Stephen. “On Failing to Make the Past Present,” MLQ 73.3 (September 2012): 453-74

Week 6: Frames and Borders

• Díaz, Junot. The Brief Wondrous Life of Oscar Wao (New York: Riverhead Books, 2008). • Kaplan, Amy. “‘Left Alone with America’: The Absence of Empire in the Study of American Culture,” in Cultures of United States Imperialism (Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1994). • Bauer, Ralph. “Hemispheric Studies.” PMLA 124.1 (January 2009): 234-50. • McGurl, Mark. The Program Era: Postwar Fiction and the Rise of Creative Writing (Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 2009). o “Introduction: Halls of Mirror” o “Miniature America; or, The Program in Transplanetary Perspective” • Walkowitz, Rebecca. Born Translated: The Contemporary Novel in an Age of World Literature (New York: Columbia UP, 2017). o “Introduction: Theory of World Literature Now”

Week 7: Reports on Secondary Texts

Week 8: Reports on Primary Texts

Format of Reports

Select three primary and three secondary texts from the following list. You will be asked to submit your selections in rank order at the end of Week 2. We will assign you one primary and one secondary text from your list of preferences. Please choose materials that you will not be working with in other courses. In Week 7 you will present a ten-minute summary and analysis of the secondary text. In Week 8 you will present a ten-minute account of why, how, and in what context you would teach the primary text.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 A-Courses Page 47 of 246

Secondary

• Arsić, Branka. Bird Relics: Grief and Vitalism in Thoreau (Harvard UP, 2015). • Berlant, Lauren. Cruel Optimism (Duke 2011) • Brickhouse, Anna. The Unsettlement of America: Translation, Interpretation, and the Story of Don Luis De Velasco, 1560-1945 (Oxford: Oxford UP, 2015). • Grief, Mark. The Age of the Crisis of Man: Thought and Fiction in America, 1933-1973 (Princeton, 2015). • Konstantinou, Lee. Cool Characters: Irony and American Fiction (Harvard, 2016) • LaFleur, Greta. The Natural History of Sexuality: Race, Environmentalism, and the Human Sciences in British Colonial North America (Johns Hopkins, 2018) • Lawrence, Jeffrey. Anxieties of Experience: The Literatures of the Americas from Whitman to Bolaño (Oxford UP, 2018). • Lowe, Lisa. The Intimacies of Four Continents (Duke, 2015) • Moi, Toril. Revolution of the Ordinary: Literary Studies after Wittgenstein, Austin, and Cavell (Chicago, 2017) • Moten, Fred. consent not to be a single being (Duke 2018): either vol. 2, Stolen Life, or vol. 3, The Universal Machine • Ngai, Sianne. Our Aesthetic Categories: Zany, Cute, Interesting (Harvard UP, 2012) • North, Joseph. Literary Criticism: A Concise Political History (Harvard UP, 2017) • Rusert, Britt. Fugitive Science: Empiricism and Freedom in Early African American Culture (NYU, 2017) Schuller, Kyla. The Biopolitics of Feeling: Race, Sex, and Science in the Nineteenth Century (Duke, 2018)

Primary

• Beatty, Paul. The Sellout (2015) • Egan, Jennifer. A Visit from the Goon Squad (2010) • Greer, Andrew Sean. Less (2017) • Gyasi, Yaa. Homegoing (2017) • Lahiri, Jhumpa. The Lowland (2013) • Lerner, Ben. 10:04 (2014) • Nelson, Maggie. The Argonauts (2015) • Ngozi Adichie, Chimamanda. Americanah (2013) • Nguyen, Viet Thanh. The Sympathizer (2015) • Rankine, Claudia. Citizen (2014) • Robinson, Marilynne. Home (2008) • Saunders, George. Lincoln in the Bardo (2017) • Ward, Jesmyn. Salvage the Bones (2011) • Whitehead, Colson. The Underground Railroad (2016) • Zink, Nell. Mislaid (2015)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 48 of 246

B-COURSES Overview

Students will usually take the B-Course classes in Michaelmas and Hilary that cover the MSt. period- strand on which they are registered, but (subject to the strand and course convenors’ permission) they may choose to join another course if it is in the best interests of their research. Class times and locations are given in the Lecture List.

Further research skills courses that are relevant for B-Course work are run by the Bodleian Library, the English Faculty Library and Oxford University Computer Services throughout the year. Masterclasses on manuscripts and rare books are run by the Bodleian Centre for the Study of the Book on Monday afternoons in Michaelmas.

Strand Michaelmas Term Hilary Term

650-1550 Palaeography, Codicology and Transcription Palaeography and and First Year (Prof Daniel Wakelin) Transcription (Prof Daniel Wakelin) MPhil

Textual Criticism (various)

Material Texts 1550-1700 Transcription (Dr Philip 1550-1700 Early Modern Textual Cultures (Prof Adam Smyth) West) (Prof Adam Smyth)

Material Texts 1700-1830 (Optional) 1700-1830 1700-1830 B-course (Dr Carly Watson) (Dr Carly Watson) ‘Issues In Transcription (Mr. Clive Editing’ 1830-1914 B-course Material Texts 1830-1914 Hurst) (Dr Carly 1830-1914 Dr Oliver Clarkson and Dr Will (Dr Carly Watson) Watson) Bowers

Post-1900 B-course 1900- Material Methodology (Prof Michael Whitworth, Prof present (Dr Judith Priestman) Peter McDonald –St Hugh’s and others) Material Texts Post-1900 (Dr Chris Fletcher & Dr Michelle American English & American B Course Kelly) (Prof Merve Emre) Material Methodology (Dr Michelle Kelly) World World Literatures B Course Literatures (Prof Peter McDonald –St.Hugh’s and Dr Michelle Kelly)

All (optional) Practical printing workshop (Richard Lawrence) Practical printing workshop (Richard Lawrence)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 49 of 246

M.St. in English (650-1550) and the M.Phil. in English (Medieval Period) B-Course

Palaeography, Transcription, Codicology and the History of the Book

Professor Daniel Wakelin ([email protected])

This course in palaeography, transcription, codicology and the history of the book will develop the scholarly skills essential for work in the medieval period and will introduce ways of thinking about the material form and transmission of texts. It will combine essential skills with discussion of the uses made of such skills in research.

The course will be taught by thirty-six classes:

• codicology, history of the book, editing and theories of material texts: Michaelmas weeks 1-6, Mondays and Tuesdays, 10.00-11.00 • palaeography (history of script): Michaelmas weeks 1-8, and Hilary weeks 1-4, Wednesdays, 10.00.1.00 • transcription: Michaelmas weeks 1-8, and Hilary weeks 1-4, Wednesdays 12.00-1.00

There will also be one-to-one meetings to discuss coursework and informal visits to see manuscripts in the Bodleian Library.

The course will be examined by a short test (assessed simply as pass-fail) in transcription and palaeography on Monday 11 February 2019 (week 5 of Hilary term) and by an assessed coursework essay or editing project, submitted soon after the end of Hilary term (date TBC). The test will have passages in Old English (650-1100), earlier Middle English (1100-1350) and later Middle English (1350-1550); students will have to transcribe and suggest a date for any two of the three. The coursework should show expertise in any aspect of the history of the book or textual transmission. While the classes will primarily focus on sources in English, it will be permissible to focus the coursework on materials in any language from, or brought to, the medieval British Isles. There is no set book to buy; however, closer to the test many students find Jane Roberts, A Guide to Scripts Used in English Writings up to 1500 (British Library, 2005; repr. Liverpool UP, 2011), useful for practice in transcription and palaeography. Those who seek a brief introduction to manuscript studies and their uses in literary, historical and art-historical scholarship might find interesting Gale R. Owen-Crocker, ed., Working with Anglo-Saxon Manuscripts (Exeter UP, 2009), and Kathryn Kerby-Fulton, Maidie Hilmo and Linda Olson, Opening Up Middle English Manuscripts (Cornell UP, 2012).

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 50 of 246

The course assumes no prior knowledge of manuscript studies. Instead, the most useful preliminary work is to practise reading Old English and/or Middle English in the original languages and spelling. For convenience and variety of sources, it can be helpful to begin with anthologies such as Bruce Mitchell and Fred C. Robinson, ed., A Guide to Old English, 8th edn (Wiley-Blackwell, 2011), J.A. Burrow and Thorlac Turville-Petre, ed., A Book of Middle English, 3rd edn (Wiley-Blackwell, 2013) or R.D. Fulk, ed., An Introduction to Middle English (Broadview, 2012). You need familiarity with the ‘look’ of these older varieties of English – likely spellings, likely words, likely content – as a preliminary to transcribing manuscripts.

Students are welcome to e-mail Prof. Daniel Wakelin ([email protected]) for further suggestions to suit their previous experience.

M.St. in English (1550-1700) B-Course Professor Adam Smyth

Material Texts (Michaelmas Term)

Some of the most exciting work in early modern studies in recent years has involved the study and interpretation of the material text. The B-Course explores bibliography, book history and textual criticism for the study of literature. The first term in general examines broader approaches and theories, while the second (Hilary) term zooms in to work through a series of case studies.

Weekly readings (below) are offered as general or theoretical introductions and as jumping-off points for your own explorations: the list is neither prescriptive nor exhaustive and will often be supplemented by further reading lists provided during the course.

Readings marked with an asterisk are particularly recommended. Articles in periodicals are generally available online through SOLO, as are an increasing number of books.

As preparation for the course, please read at least one of the following:

• John Barnard, D.F. McKenzie and Maureen Bell (eds.), The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, vol. 5: 1557-1695, (Cambridge University Press, 2002) • Mark Bland, A Guide to Early Printed Books and Manuscripts (Wiley-Blackwell, 2010) • Heidi Brayman, Jesse M. Lander and Zachary Lesser (eds), The Book in History, The Book as History: New Intersections of the Material Text (Yale University Press: New Haven and London, 2016) • Elizabeth Eisenstein, The Printing Revolution in Early Modern Europe (Cambridge University Press, 1983) – an abridged version of Eisenstein’s The Printing Press as an Agent of Change (2 vols., Cambridge University Press, 1979). Note that this founding narrative is generally now critiqued: see, for example, Adrian Johns, The Nature of the Book (Chicago University Press, 1998) • Leslie Howsam, Old Books and New Histories: An Orientation to Studies in Book and Print Culture (University of Toronto Press, 2006)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 51 of 246

• D. F. McKenzie, Bibliography and the Sociology of Text (Cambridge University Press, 1999) • D.F. McKenzie, Making Meaning: ‘Printers of the Mind’ and Other Essays, ed. Peter D. McDonald and Michael F. Suarez, S.J., (University of Massachusetts Press, 2002) • Adam Smyth, Material Texts in Early Modern England (Cambridge University Press, 2018)

Also: acquaint yourself with the standard process of printing a book in the hand-press era (acquiring manuscript copy; casting off; composing; printing; proofing and correcting; binding). For this you can look at Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography (Oxford University Press, 1972), or R.B. McKerrow, An Introduction to Bibliography for Literary Students (Oxford University Press, 1927; reprinted by St. Paul's Bibliographies and Oak Knoll Press, 1994). You might supplement this by looking at Joseph Moxon, Mechanick exercises on the whole art of printing (1683–4), edited by Herbert Davis and Harry Carter, 2nd ed. (Oxford University Press, 1962; reprinted Dover Publications, 1978.)

Throughout the course, keep in mind the following questions:

1. How do we read and describe materiality? What significances do we attach to particular material features? Are there material features we tend to overlook? What kinds of literacies are required to read material texts? 2. To what degree is the process of production legible in the material text – or is the labour of making concealed beneath the finished book? 3. What relationships might we propose between material and literary form? What new questions can a literary scholar ask in the light of the topics we cover on this B course? 4. What does it mean to study the history of the book in the digital age?

Weekly readings

1. What is the history of the material text?

In addition to the set reading, please survey recent editions of The Library, or Papers of the Bibliographical Society of America, and identify three strands, or tendencies, of recent published research: what kinds of questions are scholars asking today? We’ll discuss this in class.

• *D.F. McKenzie, ‘The Book as an Expressive Form,’ in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge University Press, 1999), 9-30 • *Paul Eggert, ‘Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature’, The Library, 13:1 (2012), 3-32 • *Robert Darnton, ‘What Is the History of Books?,’ in Daedalus, 111:3, (1982), 65-83 • *Robert Darnton, ‘“What Is the History of Books” Revisited,’ in Modern Intellectual History 4.3 (2007), 495-508 • Heidi Brayman, Jesse M. Lander and Zachary Lesser (eds), The Book in History, The Book as History: New Intersections of the Material Text. Essays in Honor of David Scott Kastan (Yale University Press: New Haven and London, 2016), esp. Introduction.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 52 of 246

• Allison Deutermann and András Kiséry (eds), Formal matters: Reading the materials of English Renaissance literature (Manchester University Press, 2013), ‘Introduction’, on the relationships between material and literary form. • David Pearson, Books as History (The British Library/Oak Knoll Press, 2008) • Jessica Brantley, ‘The Prehistory of the Book,’ in PMLA 124:2 (2009), 632-39

2. The material text: format, paper, type

• *Joseph A. Dane, What Is a Book? The Study of Early Printed Books (University of Notre Dame, 2012), chapters 3 (ink, paper), 5 (page format), 6 (typography) • Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography, (Oxford University Press 1972), pp. 9-39 (type), 57-77 (paper), 78-117 (format) • *D. F. McKenzie, ‘Typography and Meaning: the Case of William Congreve,’ in Making Meaning: Printers of the Mind and Other Essays (University of Massachusetts Press, 2002), 199-200 • Pauline Kewes, ‘“Give me the sociable Pocket-books”: Humphrey Moseley’s Serial Publication of Octavo Play Collections,’ in Publishing History, 38, (1995), 5-21 • Joseph A. Dane and Alexandra Gillespie, ‘The Myth of the Cheap Quarto,’ in Tudor Books and the Material Construction of Meaning, ed. John N. King (Cambridge University Press, 2010), pp. 25- 45 • Stephen Galbraith, ‘English Literary Folios 1593-1623: Studying Shifts in Format,’ in Tudor Books and the Material Construction of Meaning, ed. John N. King (Cambridge University Press, 2010), pp. 46-67 • Mark Bland, ‘The Appearance of the Text in Early Modern England,’ in TEXT, 11, (1998), 91-154 • Zachary Lesser, ‘Typographic Nostalgia: Playreading, Popularity and the Meanings of Black Letter,’ in The Book of the Play: Playwrights, Stationers, and Readers in Early Modern England, ed. Marta Straznicky (University of Massachusetts Press, 2006), pp. 99-126. Available at http://works.bepress.com/zacharylesser/4

3. Theories of editing

• *W. W. Greg, ‘Rationale of Copy-Text,’ in Studies in Bibliography 3 (1950-1), 19-36 • *Randall McLeod, ‘Un-Editing Shakespeare’, in Sub-Stance 33/34 (1982): 26-55 • *Colin Burrow, 'Conflationism', in London Review of Books, 29.12 (21 June 2007), pp. 16-18 – review and discussion on Arden 3 treatment of Hamlet. • *Claire Loffman and Harriet Phillips, A Handbook of Early Modern Editing (Routledge, 2016) – lots of short chapters exploring the range of editorial projects and theories alive today. Sample as much as you can. • Goldberg, Jonathan. “‘What? in a names that which we call a Rose’: The Desired Texts of Romeo and Juliet,’ in Crisis in Editing: Texts of the English Renaissance, ed. Randall McLeod (AMS Press, 1988), pp. 173-202

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 53 of 246

• *Random Cloud, ‘FIAT fLUX,’ in Crisis in Editing: Texts of the English Renaissance, ed. Randall McLeod (AMS, 1988), pp. 61-172 • *Leah S. Marcus, Unediting the Renaissance: Shakespeare, Marlowe, Milton (Routledge, 1996), esp. pp. 1-38 • Michael Hunter, ‘How to Edit a Seventeenth-Century Manuscript: Principles and Practice,’ in The Seventeenth Century, 10, 277-310 • Random Cloud, ‘“The Very Names of the Persons”: Editing and the Invention of Dramatick Character,’ in Staging the Renaissance: Reinterpretations of Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama, ed. by David Scott Kastan and Peter Stallybrass (Routledge, 1991), pp. 88-96 • A.E. Housman, ‘The Application of Thought to Textual Criticism,’ in The Classical Papers of A.E. Housman, 3 vols, ed. J. Diggle and F.R.D. Goodyear (Cambridge, 1972), 3: 1058-69, reprinted in his Selected Prose, ed. John Carter (1961), pp. 131-50, and Collected Poems and Selected Prose, ed. Christopher Ricks (1988), pp. 325-39 • Jerome J. McGann, The Textual Condition (Princeton University Press, 1991), esp. ‘The Socialization of the Text,’ pp. 69-83

4. Ideas of the author and the history of copyright

• *Primary Sources on Copyright (1450-1900), http://copy.law.cam.ac.uk/cam/index.php -- extremely useful selection of texts. Browse according to your interests. • *Peter Stallybrass and Roger Chartier, ‘What is a Book?,’ in The Cambridge Companion to Textual Scholarship, ed. Neil Fraistat and Julia Flanders (Cambridge Univesity Press, 2013), pp. 188-204 • *Michel Foucault, ‘What is an Author?’, in Textual Strategies: Perspectives in Post-Structuralist Criticism, ed. Josué V. Harari (Cornell University Press, 1979), pp. 141-60 • Joseph Loewenstein, The Author’s Due: Printing and the Prehistory of Copyright (Chicago University Press, 2002), chapter 1 (‘An Introduction to Bibliographical Politics’) and 8 (‘Authentic Reproductions’) • John Feather, Publishing, Piracy and Politics: An Historical Study of Copyright in Britain (London: Mansell, 1994), pp. 10-36 (‘The Origins of Copyright, 1475-1640’), pp. 37-63 (‘From Custom to Statute, 1640-1710’), pp. 64-96 (‘Defining the Law 1710-1800’) • *Joseph Loewenstein, Ben Jonson and Possessive Authorship (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002) • James Raven, The Business of Books: Booksellers and the English Book Trade, 1450-1850 (Yale University Press, 2007)

5. The history of reading and of book use

• *Anthony Grafton and Lisa Jardine, ‘How Gabriel Harvey Read His Livy,’ Past and Present, 129, (1990), 30–78. A paradigmatic article. Is it time to shift paradigms? • *William H. Sherman, Used Books: Marking Readers in Renaissance England (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2008), esp. pp 3-52

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 54 of 246

• Peter Stallybrass, ‘Books and Scrolls: Navigating the Bible,’ in Jennifer Andersen and Elizabeth Sauer (eds), Books and Readers in Early Modern England (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2002), 42- 79 • Peter Beal, ‘Notions in Garrison: The Seventeenth-Century Commonplace Book,’ in New Ways of Looking at Old Texts: Papers of the Renaissance English Text Society, 1985-1991, ed. W. Speed Hill (RETS, 1993), pp. 131-47 • Michel de Certeau, ‘Reading as Poaching,’ in The Practice of Everyday Life, tr. Steven Rendall (3rd edition, University of California Press, 2011), pp. 165-176 • Bradin Cormack and Carla Mazzio, Book Use, Book Theory 1500-1700 (University of Chicago Library, 2005) • Adam Smyth, Material Texts in Early Modern England (Cambridge University Press, 2018), esp. chapter 1, ‘Cutting texts: “prune and lop away”’ • Jennifer Richards and Fred Schurink (eds), The Textuality and Materiality of Reading in Early Modern England [Special Issue], in Huntington Library Quarterly 73.3 (2010), 345-552: several compelling articles giving a good sense on the variety of approaches to the subject. • *Roger Chartier, ‘Popular Appropriation: The Readers and their Books,’ in Forms and Meanings: Texts, Performances, and Audiences from Codex to Computer (University of Pennsylvania Press, 1995), pp. 83-98 • H. J. Jackson, Marginalia: Readers Writing in Books (Yale University Press, 2001) • Ann Blair, ‘Reading Strategies for Coping with Information Overload ca. 1550-1700,’ in Journal of the History of Ideas 64, (2003), 11-28 • Roger Chartier, ‘Laborers and Voyagers: From the Text to the Reader,’ in Diacritics 22, (1992), 49–61

6. Collecting, preserving, and transmitting the text: collections and libraries

• Roger Chartier and Lydia G Cochrane, The Order of Books: Readers, Authors, and Libraries in Europe Between the Fourteenth and Eighteenth centuries (Polity, 1994) • *Will Noel, ‘The Commons and Digital Humanities in Museums’, 2013 lecture on digital data, www.youtube.com/watch?v=XPJ_kciC15I • Andrew Pettegree, ‘Building a Library,’ in The Book in the Renaissance (Yale University Press, 2010), pp. 319-32 • Heidi Brayman Hackel, ‘Consuming Readers: Ladies, Lapdogs, and Libraries,’ in Reading Material in Early Modern England: Print, Gender, and Literacy (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005), pp. 196-255 • Gile Mandelbrote and Barry Taylor (eds), Libraries within the Library: The Origins of the British Library’s Printed Collections (London: The British Library, 2009) • Jennifer Summit, Memory’s Library: Medieval Books in Early Modern England (University of Chicago Press, 2008)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 55 of 246

• Clare Sargent, ‘The Physical Setting: The Early Modern Library (to c. 1640),’ in The Cambridge History of Libraries in Britain and Ireland, Volume 1 to 1640, eds Elisabeth Leedham-Green and Teresa Webber (Cambridge University Press, 2006), pp. 51-65 • The Cambridge History of Libraries in Britain and Ireland, vol. II: 1640–1850, edited by Giles Mandelbrote and Keith Manley, (Cambridge University Press, 2006)

Early Modern Textual Cultures: Writing, Circulating, Reading (Hilary Term)

This course continues the work begun in Michaelmas Term by focussing on particular case studies that show some of the challenges and opportunities of the broader fields introduced last term. This means most weeks this term will be based around a particular text, figure, institution, or body of work.

Your B-Course will be assessed by a written piece of work, due in 10th week of Hilary Term, on a topic expressive of the thinking and research you have conducted on the B-Course. Although there is no necessity to submit an abstract until 6th week of Hilary Term, the earlier you clarify your ideas, the more time you will have to develop them, and it is worth thinking about this during Michaelmas Term. Your course tutors will help you develop your essay topic in the early weeks of Hilary Term.

You will be expected to read about 150 pages of specified material for each class, which will form the basis of discussion in the first hour. Each student will be expected to deliver a short (7-minute) presentation, on the subject of their own B-course essay, during the course of the term; these presentations, and a Q&A session following them, will take up the second hour.

Items marked with an asterisk are particularly recommended.

Week 1: Manuscript culture

We will start by thinking about early modern manuscript culture: how were handwritten texts composed, copied, altered, circulated, read? How public were these texts? What kinds of communities and coteries consumed them? How much control did authors have over circulation? How did texts move between readers? How stable were manuscripts?

• *Robert Darnton, ‘Seven Bad Reasons Not to Study Manuscripts,’ in Harvard Library Bulletin 4:4 (Winter 1993-94), 37-42 • *Harold Love, Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (Clarendon Press, 1993), reprinted as The Culture and Commerce of Texts: Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (University of Massachussets Press, 1998), esp. pp. 3-90 • *Henry Woudhuysen, Sir Philip Sidney and the Circulation of Manuscripts (Clarendon Press, 1996), esp. pp. 1-21 • *Victoria Burke, ‘Let’s Get Physical: Bibliography, Codicology, and Seventeenth-Century Women’s Manuscripts,’ in Literature Compass 4.6 (2007), 1667-8 • *Arthur F. Marotti, Manuscript, Print, and the English Renaissance Lyric (Cornell University Press, 1995), esp. ‘Social Textuality in the Manuscript System,’ pp. 135-208 M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 56 of 246

• Peter Beal, In Praise of Scribes: Manuscripts and their Makers in Seventeenth-Century England (Clarendon, 1998) • Peter Beal, A Dictionary of English Manuscript Terminology: 1450 to 2000 (Oxford University Press, 2009) - useful and fascinating to browse • S. P. Cerasano and Steven W. May (eds), In the Prayse of Writing: Early Modern Manuscript Studies (British Library, 2012) • James Daybell and Peter Hinds (eds), Material Readings of Early Modern Culture: Texts and Social Practices, 1580-1730 (Palgrave, 2010)

Week 2: Textual transmission: print, manuscript, orality

How, and with what consequences, did texts move between different media? What relationship existed between these different forms of publication? How was the act of writing in manuscript changed by the culture of print? Is early modern literary scholarship built around print-centric assumptions? How do we respond – as readers, textual scholars, literary critics, editors – to the fact that many early modern texts exist in multiple, variant forms?

• *David McKitterick, Print, Manuscript and the Search for Order, 1450-1830 (Cambridge University Press, 2003), esp. pp. 1-21 • *Arthur F. Marotti, Manuscript, Print, and the English Renaissance Lyric (Cornell University Press, 1995), esp. chapter 9, ‘Print and the Lyric,’ pp. 209-90 • *Harold Love, Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (Clarendon Press, 1993), reprinted as The Culture and Commerce of Texts: Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (University of Massachussets Press, 1998), esp. chapter 7, ‘The ambiguous triumph of print,’ pp. 284-312 • Julia Crick and (eds), The Uses of Script and Print, 1300-1700 (Cambridge University Press, 2004) • Arthur F. Marotti and Michael D. Bristol (eds), Print, Manuscript, Performance: The Changing Relations of the Media in Early Modern England (Ohio State University Press, 2000) • Alexandra Gillespie (ed.), ‘Manuscript, Print and Early Tudor Culture,’ in Huntington Library Quarterly Special Edition 67 (2004) • Walter J. Ong, Orality and Literacy (1982, new edition Routledge, 2002) • Andrew Pettegree, ‘The Book Before Print,’ in The Book in the Renaissance (Yale University Press, 2010) • Wendy Wall, The Imprint of Gender: Authorship and Publication in the English Renaissance (Cornell, 1994)

Week 3: Collections in College Libraries: the case of Nicholas Crouch

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 57 of 246

We will base this week’s discussion around the printed and manuscript collections of Nicholas Crouch, held at Balliol College. We’ll explore particular bibliographical resources, including the College Library’s donor register, and the various lists Crouch made, including a list of books he lent, from 1653 to 1689. We will consider Crouch’s own organisation of his books in lists he made and through shelf marks he added to volumes, and we will also think about issues of conservation and cataloguing. Are collections expressive of personality? Is there a legible ideological consistency to Crouch’s manuscripts and books? How do modern curators strike a balance between preserving Crouch’s collection as it was, and organising it for readers today? How does Crouch’s collection open up new perspectives on bibliographical culture?

• *Familiarise yourself in advance with Nicholas Crouch, his library, and Balliol’s holdings, by looking at ‘Reconstructing Nicholas Crouch’ at https://balliollibrary.wordpress.com/2016/09/29/reconstructing-nicholas-crouch. • *Jeffrey Todd Knight, Bound to Read: Compilations, Collections, and the Making of Renaissance Literature (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2013) • *Paul Morgan, Oxford Libraries Outside the Bodleian: A Guide (Bodleian, 1980) • Joseph A. Dane, ‘Classification and Representation of Early Books,’ in Dane, The Myth of Print Culture, chapter 3.

Week 4: Agents of book-making: authors, stationers, publishers, printers, sellers

How clearly can we define the roles of author, stationer, publisher, printer, bookseller? What range of activities did they perform? How much did they overlap? How did these categories shift over time? How useful is biography as a variable for thinking about print culture? Is the history of print becoming the history of individual agents? Or is there an emerging emphasis on the always-collaborative nature of textual production?

• *Zachary Lesser, Renaissance Drama and the Politics of Publication: Readings in the English Book Trade (Cambridge University Press, 2004), pp. 1-52 • *Margaret Ezell, Social Authorship and the Advent of Print (Johns Hopkins University Press, 1999), pp. 1-40 • *Dip into Henry R. Plomer et al., A Dictionary of Printers and Booksellers, either 1557-1640 (Bibliographical Society, 1910), or 1641 to 1667 (Bibliographical Society, 1907) – and think about (i) networks of printers and sellers (how do individuals connect to other individuals, and with what consequences?); (ii) the degree to which biography is a helpful variable for thinking about book production. • Helen Smith, ‘The Publishing Trade in Shakespeare’s Time,’ in Andrew R. Murphy (ed.), A Concise Companion to Shakespeare and the Text (Wiley, 2007), pp. 17-34 • Marta Straznicky, Shakespeare’s Stationers: Studies in Cultural Bibliography (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2013). Read esp. the introduction, and sample other chapters. • Marcy L. North, ‘Ignoto and the Book Industry,’ in The Anonymous Renaissance: Cultures of Discretion in Tudor-Stuart England (University of Chicago Press, 2003), pp. 56-88. • Joseph Loewenstein, Ben Jonson and Possessive Authorship (Cambridge University Press, 2002)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 58 of 246

• Peter Blayney, The Bookshops in Paul's Cross Churchyard (London, 1990).

Week 5: the Stationers’ Register

Our discussion this week will focus on the Stationers’ Register, set within the context of the many kinds of documents associated with the Stationers’ Company. What kind of a resource is the Stationers’ Register? What can it tell us? What kinds of project does it enable? And what are the potentials and pitfalls of using Arber’s Transcript?

• *Edward Arber, A Transcript of the Registers of the Company of Stationers of London, 1554- 1640 AD, 4 vols (privately printed, 1875-94; rpt. Peter Smith, 1950) – essential that you spend considerable time wandering around this text. It will be the basis of our discussion. • *Peter W. M. Blayney, ‘The Publication of Playbooks,’ in A New History of Early English Drama, eds John D. Cox and David Scott Kastan (New York: Columbia University Press, 1997), pp. 389-415 • *Zachary Lesser, Renaissance Drama and the Politics of Publication: Readings in the English Book Trade (Cambridge University Press, 2004), pp. 26-51, ‘Speculation in the book trade’ • *Helen Smith, ‘Grossly Material Things’: Women and Book Production in Early Modern England (Oxford University Press, 2012), pp. 87-134, ‘“A free Stationers wife of this companye”: Women and the Stationers’ • *Cyndia Susan Clegg, ‘The Stationers’ Company of London,’ in The British Literary Book Trade, 1475-1700, eds James K. Bracken and Joel Silver, Dictionary of Literary Biography, Vol. 170 (Gale Research, 1996), pp. 275-291 – overview of the Company. • Richard McCabe, ‘Elizabethan Satire and the Bishops’ Ban of 1599,’ in Yearbook of English Studies 11 (1981), 188-93

Week 6: non-books and baffling texts

We will conclude the course with a consideration of a number of texts that resist the category of ‘book’, and that challenge the reach and methods of bibliography. How can we account for these kinds of items? What new questions does bibliography need to learn to ask? What are the blind-spots of our discipline?

• *Juliet Fleming, Cultural Graphology: Writing After Derrida (Chicago: Chicago UP, 2016). Please read all of this. • *‘The Renaissance Collage: Towards a New History of Reading’, special edition of Journal of Medieval and Early Modern Studies, ed. Juliet Fleming, William H. Sherman and Adam Smyth, 45.3 (September 2015): read as much of this as you can.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 59 of 246

M.St. in English (1700–1830) B-Course Michaelmas Term

Material Texts, 1700–1830

Dr Carly Watson ([email protected])

The B Course is compulsory for all M.St. students. It provides an introduction to bibliography, book history, and textual scholarship as they apply to the study of literature.

This course is designed to enable you to

1. use and appraise a range of approaches to studying the material form of books; 2. understand the process of making books in the hand-press era (1500–1800); 3. precisely describe the physical features of printed books; 4. analyse how the meaning of a text is shaped by its medium (print or manuscript); 5. understand the roles of authors, printers, and publishers in the production and distribution of books; 6. apply and evaluate textual critical approaches to dealing with the problems of material texts.

Course Details

The course is taught in 1.5-hour classes over six weeks. The required reading for each class is detailed below. Copies of the texts marked [supplied] will be provided during term, along with more extensive reading lists designed to enable further exploration of the topics. The most substantial readings are those for Weeks 1 and 3; it is recommended that you familiarise yourself with this material during the vacation.

Week 1 Bibliography, book history, and literary study

Scholarly work in bibliography and book history seeks to understand the meanings contained in the material form of books. What does this involve? And how can it enhance our understanding of literature?

Required reading

• Robert Darnton, ‘What is the History of Books?’, Daedalus, 111 (1982), 65– 83 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR] • Robert Darnton, ‘“What is the History of Books?” Revisited’, Modern Intellectual History, 4 (2007), 495–508 [available online via OxLIP] • Paul Eggert, ‘Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature’, The Library, 13 (2012), 3–32 [available online via OxLIP] • D. F. McKenzie, ‘The Book as an Expressive Form’, in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999), pp. 9–30 [available online via SOLO]

Week 2 Manuscript, print, and meaning

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 60 of 246

In our period, texts destined for print publication were handwritten before being reproduced in print. Can the same text have different meanings in manuscript and print? How might the transition from one medium to another have influenced how authors thought about and revised their works?

Required reading

• Walter J. Ong, ‘Writing Restructures Consciousness’ and ‘Print, Space, and Closure’, in Orality and Literacy: The Technologizing of the Word (London: Routledge, 2002), pp. 77–135 [available online via SOLO] • William Wordsworth, ‘Ode to Duty’, in Poems, in Two Volumes (London: Longman and others, 1807), I, 70–74 [available online via SOLO] • ———————— , ‘Ode to Duty’, in Poems, in Two Volumes, and Other Poems, 1800–1807, ed. by Jared Curtis (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1983), pp. 302–9 [supplied] • ———————— , ‘General directions for the Printer’, in Poems, in Two Volumes, and Other Poems, 1800–1807, ed. by Jared Curtis (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1983), p. 56 [supplied]

Compare the manuscript and printed versions of Wordsworth’s ‘Ode to Duty’ (in the editorial notes on the transcription of the manuscript text, ‘SH’ is Sara Hutchinson, ‘MW’ is Mary Wordsworth, and ‘STC’ is Samuel Taylor Coleridge). Can Wordsworth’s detailed instructions to the printer concerning the layout of Poems (1807) help us to understand the changes he made to the poem before its publication?

Week 3 Making books

At the end of the eighteenth century, printed books were made in much the same way as they had been in the sixteenth century. However, the early nineteenth century saw the advent of new printing and papermaking technologies. What effects did these new technologies have on the material form of books?

Required reading

The standard account of book production in the hand-press era is Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972; repr. New Castle, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 1995), pp. 5–170. Gaskell’s Introduction is an invaluable reference work for the study of printed books, and you might consider purchasing it (AbeBooks.co.uk often has affordable copies). If you cannot obtain a copy of Gaskell’s Introduction, please read Part I of Ronald B. McKerrow, An Introduction to Bibliography for Literary Students (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1927). The 1928 reprint of McKerrow’s Introduction is available online at .

Week 4 Describing books

Bibliographers have developed conventions for precisely describing the physical features of printed books. In this class you will learn how to write a bibliographic description and how the information recorded in such descriptions can be useful.

There is no required reading for this class. M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 61 of 246

Week 5 Authors, publishers, and copyright

Our period is often characterised as an era of profound change for authors, with copyright legislation providing new legal protections and the expansion of the book trade offering new opportunities to publish and make money from writing. But to what extent did changes in the law and the book trade really benefit authors in this period?

Required reading

• Terry Belanger, ‘Publishers and Writers in Eighteenth-Century England’, in Books and their Readers in Eighteenth-Century England, ed. by Isabel Rivers (Leicester: Leicester University Press, 1982), pp. 5-25 [supplied] • Jordan Howell, ‘Eighteenth-Century Abridgements of Robinson Crusoe’, The Library, 15 (2014), 292–343 [available online via OxLIP]

Week 6 Textual criticism and theories of editing

The materiality of texts—their existence in multiple copies, which can differ in a wide variety of ways— poses a challenge for editors. In this class you will test out some of the theories that editors have developed to deal with the problems of material texts.

Required reading

• W. W. Greg, ‘The Rationale of Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 3 (1950–1), 19–36 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR] • Jack Stillinger, ‘A Practical Theory of Versions’, in Coleridge and Textual Instability: The Multiple Versions of the Major Poems (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994), pp. 118–40 [available online via SOLO]

Hilary Term

B Course: Textual Cultures, 1700–1830

Dr Carly Watson ([email protected])

This course follows on from Michaelmas Term’s introduction to bibliography and book history by delving deeper into the print and manuscript cultures of the period.

The B Course is assessed by an extended essay (6,000–7,000 words), due in Week 10 of Hilary Term, on a topic of your choice, showcasing evidence and analytical methods drawn from bibliography, book history, and/or textual scholarship. You will be expected to give a short presentation on your topic in class; this will be an opportunity to clarify your ideas and gain feedback from your tutor and peers.

Course Outline

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 62 of 246

The course is taught in 2-hour classes over six weeks. There is no required reading; instead, you are expected to undertake research for your essay by exploring primary materials and reading relevant secondary literature. Your tutor will help you develop your topic in Weeks 1–6.

 Week 1 The book trade and publishing trends  Week 2 Cheap print and popular culture  Week 3 Manuscript, print, and authorial revision  Week 4 Manuscript culture and literary coteries  Week 5 Ornament and illustration  Week 6 Periodicals and the circulation of texts

General Reading

This list offers a selection of works relevant to the topics covered by the course. You are encouraged to refer to it throughout the course and use it as a starting-point for your own explorations.

• Janine Barchas, Graphic Design, Print Culture, and the Eighteenth-Century Novel (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003) • Jennie Batchelor and Manushag N. Powell, eds, Women’s Periodicals and Print Culture in Britain, 1690–1820s: The Long Eighteenth Century (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2018) • Lance Bertelsen, ‘Popular Entertainment and Instruction, Literary and Dramatic: Chapbooks, Advice Books, Almanacs, Ballads, Farces, Pantomimes, Prints and Shows’, in The Cambridge History of English Literature, 1660–1780, ed. by John Richetti (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005), pp. 61–86 [available online via SOLO] • Melanie Bigold, Women of Letters, Manuscript Circulation, and Print Afterlives in the Eighteenth Century (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2012) • Paddy Bullard and James McLaverty, eds, Jonathan Swift and the Eighteenth-Century Book (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013) • Simon Eliot, Some Patterns and Trends in British Publishing, 1800–1919 (London: Bibliographical Society, 1994) • J. E. Elliott, ‘The Cost of Reading in Eighteenth-Century Britain: Auction Sale Catalogues and the Cheap Literature Hypothesis’, English Literary History, 77 (2010), 353–84 • Margaret Ezell, Social Authorship and the Advent of Print (Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1999) • David Foxon, Pope and the Early Eighteenth-Century Book Trade, rev. and ed. by James McLaverty (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1991) • Dustin H. Griffin, Authorship in the Long Eighteenth Century (Newark: University of Delaware Press, 2014) • Brean S. Hammond, Professional Imaginative Writing in England, 1670–1740: ‘Hackney for Bread’ (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1997) [available online via SOLO] • Christina Ionescu, ed., Book Illustration in the Long Eighteenth Century: Reconfiguring the Visual Periphery of the Text (Newcastle: Cambridge Scholars, 2011) [available online via SOLO]

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 63 of 246

• Alvin Kernan, Printing Technology, Letters & Samuel Johnson (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1987) • Zachary Leader, Revision and Romantic Authorship (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1996) • James Raven, The Business of Books: Booksellers and the English Book Trade, 1450–1850 (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 2007) • ——————, ‘Publishing and Bookselling, 1660–1780’, in The Cambridge History of English Literature, 1660–1780, ed. by John Richetti (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005), pp. 11–36 [available online via SOLO] • Isabel Rivers, ed., Books and Their Readers in Eighteenth-Century England (Leicester: Leicester University Press, 1982) • Isabel Rivers, ed., Books and Their Readers in Eighteenth-Century England: New Essays (London: Continuum, 2001) [available online via SOLO] • Pat Rogers, Literature and Popular Culture in Eighteenth-Century England (Brighton: Harvester, 1986) • Betty A. Schellenberg, Literary Coteries and the Making of Modern Print Culture, 1740–1790 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2016) [available online via SOLO] • William St Clair, The Reading Nation in the Romantic Period (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2004) • Jack Stillinger, Coleridge and Textual Instability: The Multiple Versions of the Major Poems (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994) [available online via SOLO] • Michael F. Suarez, SJ, and Michael L. Turner, eds, The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, Volume 5: 1695–1830 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009) • Kim Wheatley, ed., Romantic Periodicals and Print Culture (London: Frank Cass, 2003)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 64 of 246

M.St. in English (1830–1914) B-Course Michaelmas Term

Material Texts, 1830–1914

Dr Carly Watson ([email protected])

The B Course is compulsory for all M.St. students. It provides an introduction to bibliography, book history, and textual scholarship as they apply to the study of literature.

This course is designed to enable you to

1. use and appraise a range of approaches to studying the material form of books; 2. understand the process of making books in the machine-press era (1800–1950); 3. precisely describe the physical features of printed books; 4. analyse how the meaning of a text is shaped by its medium (print or manuscript); 5. understand the roles of authors, printers, and publishers in the production and distribution of books; 6. apply and evaluate textual critical approaches to dealing with the problems of material texts.

Course Details

The course is taught in 1.5-hour classes over six weeks. The required reading for each class is detailed below. Copies of the texts marked [supplied] will be provided during term, along with more extensive reading lists designed to enable further exploration of the topics. The most substantial readings are those for Weeks 1 and 3; it is recommended that you familiarise yourself with this material during the vacation.

Week 1 Bibliography, book history, and literary study

Scholarly work in bibliography and book history seeks to understand the meanings contained in the material form of books. What does this involve? And how can it enhance our understanding of literature?

Required reading

• Robert Darnton, ‘What is the History of Books?’, Daedalus, 111 (1982), 65– 83 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR] • Robert Darnton, ‘“What is the History of Books?” Revisited’, Modern Intellectual History, 4 (2007), 495–508 [available online via OxLIP] • Paul Eggert, ‘Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature’, The Library, 13 (2012), 3–32 [available online via OxLIP] • D. F. McKenzie, ‘The Book as an Expressive Form’, in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999), pp. 9–30 [available online via SOLO]

Week 2 Manuscript, print, and meaning

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 65 of 246

In our period, most texts destined for print publication were handwritten before being reproduced in print. How can the medium of print shape the meaning of literary texts?

Required reading

• Walter J. Ong, ‘Writing Restructures Consciousness’ and ‘Print, Space, and Closure’, in Orality and Literacy: The Technologizing of the Word (London: Routledge, 2002), pp. 77–135 [available online via SOLO] • Dante Gabriel Rossetti, ‘The Portrait’, in Poems (London: F. S. Ellis, 1870), pp. 127–32 [available online at ; third edition available online via SOLO] • ——————————, ‘The Portrait’, in the Second Trial Book, a set of proofs for Poems printed in November 1869 (Princeton University Library) [supplied] • ——————————, letters to John Heaton (27 January 1870), Algernon Swinburne (21 February 1870), William Rossetti (23 February 1870), and Frederick Startridge Ellis (17 March, c. 18 March, c. 20 March 1870), in The Correspondence of Dante Gabriel Rossetti, Volume IV: 1868–1870, ed. by William E. Fredeman (Cambridge: D. S. Brewer, 2004) [supplied]

Compare the unpublished version of ‘The Portrait’ in the Second Trial Book with the published version in Poems. What textual differences are there between the two versions? What differences are there in typography and layout, and how might these differences influence our reading of the poem?

Week 3 Making books

At the end of the eighteenth century, printed books were made in much the same way as they had been in the sixteenth century. However, the nineteenth century saw the mechanisation of book production and the advent of new technologies for reproducing texts and images. What effects did these developments have on the material form of books?

Required reading

Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972; repr. New Castle, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 1995), pp. 189–296. Gaskell’s Introduction is an invaluable reference work for the study of printed books, and you might consider purchasing it (AbeBooks.co.uk often has affordable copies).

Week 4 Describing books

Bibliographers have developed conventions for precisely describing the physical features of printed books. In this class you will learn how to write a bibliographic description and how the information recorded in such descriptions can be useful.

There is no required reading for this class.

Week 5 Authors, publishers, and copyright

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 66 of 246

The expansion of the book trade in the nineteenth century created new opportunities for men and women to make a living from writing, while changes in copyright law extended authors’ rights as owners of their works. How did these developments influence the output of authors and perceptions of authorship itself?

Required reading

• Edmund Gosse, ‘Literature as a Trade’, St. James’s Gazette, 16 October 1890, pp. 17–18 [supplied] • Patrick Leary and Andrew Nash, ‘Authorship’, in The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, Volume VI: 1830–1914, ed. by David McKitterick (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009), pp. 172–213 [available online via SOLO] • Charlotte (J. H.) Riddell, ‘Literature as a Profession’, Illustrated Review, n. s., 2 (July 1874), 6–7 [supplied] • (You might also look at Riddell’s entry in the Oxford Dictionary of National Biography for an overview of her life and career.) • William Wordsworth, ‘The Law of Copyright’, in Prose Works, ed. by W. J. B. Owen and Jane Worthington Smyser, 3 vols (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1974), III, pp. 309–14 [available online via SOLO]

Week 6 Textual criticism and theories of editing

The materiality of texts—their existence in multiple copies, which can differ in a wide variety of ways— poses a challenge for editors. In this class you will test out some of the theories that editors have developed to deal with the problems of material texts.

Required reading

• W. W. Greg, ‘The Rationale of Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 3 (1950–1), 19–36 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR] • Jack Stillinger, ‘A Practical Theory of Versions’, in Coleridge and Textual Instability: The Multiple Versions of the Major Poems (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994), pp. 118–40 [available online via SOLO]

Bibliography, Theories of Text, History of the Book, Manuscript Studies: 1830-1914

Course convenors: Dr Will Bowers & Dr Oliver Clarkson

The strand-specific portion of the B-course will pick up where the methodological introduction left off. It will focus on aspects of book history, manuscript studies and editing, pertinent to the period, such as the prominence of serial and periodical publication, expanding reading and literacy, and the challenges faced by writers and publishers in the production and circulation of literary texts, as well as the difficulties and opportunities these issues present to the literary scholar and the textual critic.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 67 of 246

The course will include an introduction to working with manuscript sources and archival resources in Oxford and beyond. In Hilary term you will write an essay investigating any one of the topics covered across the course. This is likely to involve either the preparation of an edition or a consideration of a topic relating to book history or manuscript studies, usually based on empirical or archival research. The course convenors will assist you in developing your topic.

We will meet three times in Michaelmas term (in Week 7 and 8) and continue in Weeks 1–5 in Hilary Term. There will be six classes, led by different specialist tutors, with the final two meetings reserved for student presentations on work in progress (of about ten minutes’ duration).

1. Nineteenth-Century Books, Manuscripts, and Editing. 2. Illustrations. 3. From Manuscript to Print. 4. Victorian Periodicals. 5. Serialisation. 6. Celebrity. 7 & 8. Student Presentations.

Further reading

Books and book history • Brake, Laurel and Codell, Julie, Encounters in the Victorian Press: Editors, Authors, Readers (2005) • Brake, Laurel, Print in Transition, 1850–1910: Studies in Media and Book History (2001) • Brake, Laurel, and Demoor, Marysa (eds.), The Lure of Illustration in the Nineteenth Century: Picture and Press (2009) • McKitterick, David, The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, Volume 6: 1830–1914 (2014) • Price, Leah, How to Do Things With Books in Victorian Britain (2012) • Price, Leah, The Anthology and the Rise of the Novel: From Richardson to George Eliot (2002)

Victorian publishing: publishers, periodicals and serials • Cantor, G. N and Shuttleworth, Sally, Science Serialized: Representation of the Sciences in Nineteenth-Century Periodicals (2004) • Dooley, Allan C., Author and Printer in Victorian England (1992) • Finkelstein, David, The House of Blackwood: Author-Publisher Relations in the Victorian Era (2002) • Finkelstein, David, Print Culture and the Blackwood Tradition, 1805–1930 (2006) • Hughes, Linda K. and Lund, Michael, The Victorian Serial (1991) • Hughes, Linda K. and Lund, Michael, Victorian Publishing and Elizabeth Gaskell’s Work (1999) • Jordan, John and Patten, Robert, Literature in the Marketplace: Nineteenth-Century British Publishing and Reading Practices (1995) • King, Andrew, Easley, Alexis and Morton, John (eds.), The Routledge Handbook to Nineteenth- Century British Periodicals and Newspapers, 2 vols. (2016–17) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 68 of 246

• Patten, Robert, Charles Dickens and his Publishers (1978) • Salmon, Richard, The Formation of the Victorian Literary Profession (2015) • Shillingsburg, Peter, Pegasus in Harness: Victorian Publishing and W.M. Thackeray (1992) • Sutherland, John, Victorian Novelists and Publishers (1976)

Readers and reading practices • Buckland, Adelene and Palmer, Beth, A Return to the Common Reader: Print Culture and the Novel, 1850–1900 (2011) • Flint, Kate, The Woman Reader 1837–1914 (1993) • Raven, James, Small, Helen and Tadmor, Naomi, The Practice and Representation of Reading in England (1996) • Wicke, Jennifer, Advertising Fictions: Literature, Advertisement, and Social Reading (1988)

Manuscripts and revisions • Bushell, Sally, Text as Process: Creative Composition in Wordsworth, Tennyson and Dickinson (2009) • Fordham, Finn, I do I undo I redo: The Textual Genesis of Modernist Selves (2010) • Horne, Philip, Henry James and Revision (1990) • Kennedy, Judith (ed.), Victorian Authors and their Works: Revision, Motivations and Modes (1991) • Ricks, Christopher, ‘Tennyson’s Methods of Composition’ (1966) • Stillinger, Jack, Multiple Authorship and the Myth of Solitary Genius (1991) • Sullivan, Hannah, The Work of Revision (2013)

You will also find it useful to refer to period- and author-specific articles in the key journals: The Library, Studies in Bibliography and TEXT (subsequently Textual Cultures; Word and Image).

M.St. in English (1900-present day) B-Course

The B Course for the MSt 1900-present has three different threads: (i) Material Texts Post-1900 (Michaelmas weeks 1-6); (ii) Material Methodology (Michaelmas weeks 1-8); and (iii) History of the Book 1900-present (Michaelmas weeks 7-8 and Hilary weeks 1-6)

(i) Material Texts Post-1900

The B Course begins in Michaelmas Term with Material Texts Post-1900, providing an introduction to bibliography (the physical and technical details of book-making) and book history as they apply to the study of literature. It includes both the study of books as singular physical objects and as texts that may exist in multiple physical states: as manuscript, print, and digital forms. Weekly 1.5 or 2 hour classes during Michaelmas Term will be held in the Weston Library and will each week draw on material from the Bodleian

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 69 of 246

Collections. The course will consist of three lectures by Dr Carly Watson introducing the principles of bibliography and textual scholarship, and three sessions designed to introduce potential approaches to research through the handling and discussion of items from the Bodleian’s Special Collections. Some of the questions that will arise over the course of the six weeks include: How do we read and describe materiality? What significances do we attach to particular material features? Are there material features we tend to overlook? To what degree is the process of production legible in the material text? What relationships might we propose between material and literary form? What does it mean to study the history of the book in the digital age?

Material Texts Post-1900 is taught to students from three different MSt strands in Michaelmas Term, weeks 1-6: English Literature 1900-present, English and American Literature, and World Literature in English.

The full group will meet in weeks 1, 2, and 6. You will meet as two smaller groups in weeks 3, 4, and 5 to enable you to work closely with material from the Bodleian collections. For these small group sessions, no preparation is required but students should be prepared to contribute to discussion and share any ideas they may have about their potential areas of research interest. These sessions will be held in the Weston Library Visiting Scholars Centre on Level 2. You must leave your bags in the lockers at the Parks Road entrance to the library before gaining access to the Visiting Scholars Centre. You will also meet in small groups at the Weston in week 7 for a detailed guide to finding Bodleian resources.

Students from the 1900-present strand are also welcome to take part in the Handpress Printing workshops that run in Michaelmas and Hilary Terms, and in the Issues in Editing course that runs in Hilary Term.

Questions about the B Course in Michaelmas Term should be directed to Dr Michelle Kelly: [email protected]

If you have questions about particular lectures or workshops, contact Dr Chris Fletcher: [email protected] or Carly Watson: [email protected]

Material Texts: weekly lectures or workshops

Week 1. Bibliography, Book History, and Literary Study

Wednesday 10-11.30am, Lecture Theatre, Weston Library

Scholarly work in bibliography and book history seeks to decode the meanings contained in the material form of books. What does this involve? And how can it enhance our understanding of literature?

Required reading

• Robert Darnton, ‘What is the History of Books?’, Daedalus, 111 (1982), 65– 83 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR]

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 70 of 246

• Paul Eggert, ‘Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature’, The Library, 13 (2012), 3–32 [available online via OxLIP] • D. F. McKenzie, ‘The Book as an Expressive Form’ and ‘The Dialectics of Bibliography Now’, in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge University Press, 1999), pp. 9–30, 55–76 [available online via SOLO] • Further reading • Craig S. Abbott and William Proctor Williams, An Introduction to Bibliographical and Textual Studies (Modern Language Association, 1985; 4th edn, 2009) • David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery, eds, The Book History Reader (Routledge, 2002) • Leslie Howsam, Old Books and New Histories: An Orientation to Studies in Book and Print Culture (University of Toronto Press, 2006) • Michelle Levy and Tom Mole, The Broadview Introduction to Book History (Broadview, 2017) • Michael F. Suarez, SJ, and H. R. Woudhuysen, eds, The Book: A Global History (Oxford University Press, 2013) • G. Thomas Tanselle, Bibliographical Analysis: A Historical Introduction (Cambridge University Press, 2009)

Week 2. The Material Text

Monday 10-11.30am, Lecture Theatre, Weston Library

From the fifteenth to the eighteenth centuries, printing technology changed very little; the past two centuries have seen the mechanisation of book production and the digital revolution. How have technological developments changed the form of printed texts? And how can we describe and interpret the physical forms of printed books?

Required reading

Warren Chappell and Robert Bringhurst, A Short History of the Printed Word, 2nd edn (Hartley & Marks, 1999), pp. 191–300 [available online at https://archive.org/details/robert-bringhurst-warren-chappell- a-short-history-of-the-printed-word]

Further reading

• Fredson Bowers, Principles of Bibliographical Description (Princeton University Press, 1949; repr. St. Paul’s Bibliographies, 1994) • Johanna Drucker, The Visible Word: Experimental Typography and Modern Art, 1909–1923 (University of Chicago Press, 1994) • Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography (Clarendon Press, 1972; repr. Oak Knoll Press, 1995), especially pp. 189–296 • Paul C. Gutjahr and Megan L. Benton, eds, Illuminating Letters: Typography and Literary Interpretation (University of Massachusetts Press, 2001)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 71 of 246

• G. Thomas Tanselle, ‘Book Jackets, Blurbs, and Bibliographers’, The Library, 26 (1971), 91–134 [available online via OxLIP]

Week 3. Dead or Alive?

Friday 10am-12pm, Weston Bahari Room

Drawing upon unique and distinctive items from the Bodleian’s collections this introductory hands-on session considers books across centuries which draw attention to their own material qualities, from personal medieval productions, to artists’ books which celebrate supreme technical virtuosity, to avant- garde productions programmed to self-destruct. As such, it considers the boundaries of the book and raises questions of value, collecting, curation, and the future of the book in the context of the digital age.

Week 4. Off the shelf: Approaches to Research

Wednesday 10am-12pm, Weston Visiting Scholars Centre

Gathering together a range of diverse materials, this hands on session illustrates the different approaches that might be taken when developing research topics on Material Texts, including technical consideration of features, social and historical analysis, the editorial value of unpublished texts, original sources for life writing and the elasticity of bibliographic genre.

Week 5. The Book Unbound

Friday 10am-12pm, Weston Bahari Room

An introduction to sources for research in the Bodleian’s collections of modern manuscripts, archives, printed ephemera and ‘born-digital’ material. Accessing and negotiating complex archives can be challenging but is one of the most fruitful areas for new research. Digital material provides a rich but often highly unstable source for contemporary literary and historical studies – examples from the Bodleian’s Web Archive will be considered.

Week 6. Textual Criticism and Editing

Wednesday 10-11.30am, Lecture Theatre, Weston Library

The materiality of texts—their existence in multiple copies, which can differ in a wide variety of ways— poses a challenge for editors. This session will introduce some of the theories that editors have developed to deal with the problems of material texts.

Required reading

• W. W. Greg, ‘The Rationale of Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 3 (1950–1), 19–36 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR]

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 72 of 246

• Jack Stillinger, ‘A Practical Theory of Versions’, in Coleridge and Textual Instability: The Multiple Versions of the Major Poems (Oxford University Press, 1994), pp. 118–40 [available online via SOLO]

Further reading

• Fredson Bowers, ‘Greg’s “Rationale of Copy-Text” Revisited’, Studies in Bibliography, 31 (1978), 90–161 • Julia Briggs, ‘Between the Texts: Virginia Woolf’s Acts of Revision’, TEXT, 12 (1999), 143–65 • Philip Cohen, ed., Devils and Angels: Textual Editing and Literary Theory (University of Virginia Press, 1991) • Neil Fraistat and Julia Flanders, eds, The Cambridge Companion to Textual Scholarship (Cambridge University Press, 2013) [available online via SOLO] • D. C. Greetham, Textual Scholarship: An Introduction (Garland, 1992) [available online via SOLO] • Erick Kelemen, Textual Editing and Criticism: An Introduction (Norton, 2009) • Brenda R. Silver, ‘Textual Criticism as Feminist Practice: Or, Who’s Afraid of Virginia Woolf Part II’, in Representing Modernist Texts: Editing as Interpretation, ed. by George Bornstein (University of Michigan Press, 1991), pp. 193–222; repr. in The Broadview Reader in Book History, ed. by Michelle Levy and Tom Mole (Broadview, 2014) • G. Thomas Tanselle, ‘Editing without a Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 47 (1994), 1–23

Week 7. Finding Bodleian Resources

Wednesday 10am-12pm, Weston Library

A session devoted to using online catalogues and other resources for searching and accessing Bodleian collections.

Week 8 What does a B Course essay look like?

Time and Venue TBC

This is a workshop run by B Course convenors to discuss the kind of research and research questions that you might take up for your B Course essays. Former MSt students offer accounts of how they arrived at their B Course essay topic, and the archival and theoretical materials that they used. There will be time for questions about the B Course essay and you will also have an opportunity to read B Course essays written by students in previous years.

(ii) Material Methodology

Michaelmas Term weeks 1-8

Friday 12-1pm, Horton Room, Weston Library M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 73 of 246

The purpose of this part of the M.St. course is to familiarize postgraduates with some of the techniques and methodologies involved in researching primary sources, principally manuscripts and archives. Students are taught basic document analysis (how to spot a forgery; date paper &c), but the main emphasis of the course is on transcribing and editing manuscripts, where transcription is understood to be a tool for analysing an author’s compositional technique. A transcription test is set in Week 8, which students are required to pass, as set out in the current Exam Regulations.

Dr Judith Priestman [email protected]

(iii) History of the Book 1900-present day

It is envisaged that all classes will be timetabled for Weds 10-12, but this is to be confirmed, as will be the locations of each class.

MT 2018

• Week 7. The Institution of Literature (1). Peter McDonald. • Week 8. Reading Paratexts. Michael Whitworth

HT 2019

• Week 1. Publishers’ Archives and Contracts. Michael Whitworth. • Week 2. Periodicals as Research Materials. Michael Whitworth • Week 3. Ulysses and the Problem of the Text. Jeri Johnson • Week 4. The Institution of Literature (2). Peter McDonald. • Weeks 5 and 6. Student presentations: Michael Whitworth and / or the Professor of Bibliography.

M.St. in World Literatures in English B-Course

The B-course for the MSt in World Literature strand introduces students to the methodologies and theories of bibliography, manuscript studies, textual scholarship, and book history framed within the broad concerns and methodologies of world literature book history and the emergence and institutionalisation of the categories of world and postcolonial literature within global and local literary spaces and the publishing industry. The course begins in Michaelmas with a general introduction to theories and methodologies of material textual scholarship (i. Material Texts 1900-present) alongside an introduction to manuscript study and archive use in world literature (ii. Material Methodology), before moving on to specific discussion of the institutions of world literature in late Michaelmas and Hilary (iii. World Book History), culminating in student presentations and feedback on the B course essay project in week 3-6 of Hilary.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 74 of 246

Please note that in addition to your A, B, and C Courses and Dissertation, you are expected to attend the Oxford Postcolonial Writing and Theory Seminar. Any conflicts with attending the Postcolonial Seminar should be cleared in advance with course convenors. In preparation for the world literature subject specific aspect of the B course, students are asked to familiarise themselves with the suggested reading listed below, ideally before the start of term and at least before week 7 of Michaelmas.

(i) Material Texts Post-1900

The B Course begins in Michaelmas Term with Material Texts Post-1900, providing an introduction to bibliography (the physical and technical details of book-making) and book history as they apply to the study of literature. It includes both the study of books as singular physical objects and as texts that may exist in multiple physical states: as manuscript, print, and digital forms. Weekly 1.5 or 2 hour classes during Michaelmas Term will be held in the Weston Library and will each week draw on material from the Bodleian Collections. The course will consist of three lectures by Dr Carly Watson introducing the principles of bibliography and textual scholarship, and three sessions designed to introduce potential approaches to research through the handling and discussion of items from the Bodleian’s Special Collections. Some of the questions that will arise over the course of the six weeks include: How do we read and describe materiality? What significances do we attach to particular material features? Are there material features we tend to overlook? To what degree is the process of production legible in the material text? What relationships might we propose between material and literary form? What does it mean to study the history of the book in the digital age?

Material Texts Post-1900 is taught to students from three different MSt strands in Michaelmas Term, weeks 1-6: English Literature 1900-present, English and American Literature, and World Literature in English.

The full group will meet in weeks 1, 2, and 6. You will meet as two smaller groups in weeks 3, 4, and 5 to enable you to work closely with material from the Bodleian collections. For these small group sessions, no preparation is required but students should be prepared to contribute to discussion and share any ideas they may have about their potential areas of research interest. These sessions will be held in the Weston Library Visiting Scholars Centre on Level 2. You must leave your bags in the lockers at the Parks Road entrance to the library before gaining access to the Visiting Scholars Centre. You will also meet in small groups at the Weston in week 7 for a detailed guide to finding Bodleian resources.

Students from the World Literature strand are also welcome to take part in the Handpress Printing workshops that run in Michaelmas and Hilary Terms, and in the Issues in Editing course that runs in Hilary Term.

Questions about the B Course in Michaelmas Term should be directed to Dr Michelle Kelly: [email protected]

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 75 of 246

If you have questions about particular lectures or workshops, contact Dr Chris Fletcher: [email protected] or Carly Watson: [email protected]

Material Texts: weekly lectures or workshops

Week 1. Bibliography, Book History, and Literary Study

Wednesday 10-11.30am, Lecture Theatre, Weston Library

Scholarly work in bibliography and book history seeks to decode the meanings contained in the material form of books. What does this involve? And how can it enhance our understanding of literature?

Required reading

• Robert Darnton, ‘What is the History of Books?’, Daedalus, 111 (1982), 65– 83 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR] • Paul Eggert, ‘Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature’, The Library, 13 (2012), 3–32 [available online via OxLIP] • D. F. McKenzie, ‘The Book as an Expressive Form’ and ‘The Dialectics of Bibliography Now’, in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge University Press, 1999), pp. 9–30, 55–76 [available online via SOLO] Further reading

• Craig S. Abbott and William Proctor Williams, An Introduction to Bibliographical and Textual Studies (Modern Language Association, 1985; 4th edn, 2009) • David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery, eds, The Book History Reader (Routledge, 2002) • Leslie Howsam, Old Books and New Histories: An Orientation to Studies in Book and Print Culture (University of Toronto Press, 2006) • Michelle Levy and Tom Mole, The Broadview Introduction to Book History (Broadview, 2017) • Michael F. Suarez, SJ, and H. R. Woudhuysen, eds, The Book: A Global History (Oxford University Press, 2013) • G. Thomas Tanselle, Bibliographical Analysis: A Historical Introduction (Cambridge University Press, 2009)

Week 2. The Material Text

Monday 10-11.30am, Lecture Theatre, Weston Library

From the fifteenth to the eighteenth centuries, printing technology changed very little; the past two centuries have seen the mechanisation of book production and the digital revolution. How have technological developments changed the form of printed texts? And how can we describe and interpret the physical forms of printed books?

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 76 of 246

Required reading

Warren Chappell and Robert Bringhurst, A Short History of the Printed Word, 2nd edn (Hartley & Marks, 1999), pp. 191–300 [available online at https://archive.org/details/robert-bringhurst-warren-chappell- a-short-history-of-the-printed-word]

Further reading

• Fredson Bowers, Principles of Bibliographical Description (Princeton University Press, 1949; repr. St. Paul’s Bibliographies, 1994) • Johanna Drucker, The Visible Word: Experimental Typography and Modern Art, 1909–1923 (University of Chicago Press, 1994) • Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography (Clarendon Press, 1972; repr. Oak Knoll Press, 1995), especially pp. 189–296 • Paul C. Gutjahr and Megan L. Benton, eds, Illuminating Letters: Typography and Literary Interpretation (University of Massachusetts Press, 2001) • G. Thomas Tanselle, ‘Book Jackets, Blurbs, and Bibliographers’, The Library, 26 (1971), 91–134 [available online via OxLIP]

Week 3. Dead or Alive?

Thursday 10am-12pm, Weston Visiting Scholars Centre

Drawing upon unique and distinctive items from the Bodleian’s collections this introductory hands-on session considers books across centuries which draw attention to their own material qualities, from personal medieval productions, to artists’ books which celebrate supreme technical virtuosity, to avant- garde productions programmed to self-destruct. As such, it considers the boundaries of the book and raises questions of value, collecting, curation, and the future of the book in the context of the digital age.

Week 4. Off the shelf: approaches to research

Thursday 10am-12pm, Weston Visiting Scholars Centre

Gathering together a range of diverse materials, this hands on session illustrates the different approaches that might be taken when developing research topics on Material Texts, including technical consideration of features, social and historical analysis, the editorial value of unpublished texts, original sources for life writing and the elasticity of bibliographic genre.

Week 5. The Book Unbound

Thursday 10am-12pm, Weston Visiting Scholars Centre

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 77 of 246

An introduction to sources for research in the Bodleian’s collections of modern manuscripts, archives, printed ephemera and ‘born-digital’ material. Accessing and negotiating complex archives can be challenging but is one of the most fruitful areas for new research. Digital material provides a rich but often highly unstable source for contemporary literary and historical studies – examples from the Bodleian’s Web Archive will be considered.

Week 6. Textual Criticism and Editing

Wednesday 10-11.30am, Lecture Theatre, Weston Library

The materiality of texts—their existence in multiple copies, which can differ in a wide variety of ways— poses a challenge for editors. This session will introduce some of the theories that editors have developed to deal with the problems of material texts.

Required reading

• W. W. Greg, ‘The Rationale of Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 3 (1950–1), 19–36 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR] • Jack Stillinger, ‘A Practical Theory of Versions’, in Coleridge and Textual Instability: The Multiple Versions of the Major Poems (Oxford University Press, 1994), pp. 118–40 [available online via SOLO]

Further reading

• Fredson Bowers, ‘Greg’s “Rationale of Copy-Text” Revisited’, Studies in Bibliography, 31 (1978), 90–161 • Julia Briggs, ‘Between the Texts: Virginia Woolf’s Acts of Revision’, TEXT, 12 (1999), 143–65 • Philip Cohen, ed., Devils and Angels: Textual Editing and Literary Theory (University of Virginia Press, 1991) • Neil Fraistat and Julia Flanders, eds, The Cambridge Companion to Textual Scholarship (Cambridge University Press, 2013) [available online via SOLO] • D. C. Greetham, Textual Scholarship: An Introduction (Garland, 1992) [available online via SOLO] • Erick Kelemen, Textual Editing and Criticism: An Introduction (Norton, 2009) • Brenda R. Silver, ‘Textual Criticism as Feminist Practice: Or, Who’s Afraid of Virginia Woolf Part II’, in Representing Modernist Texts: Editing as Interpretation, ed. by George Bornstein (University of Michigan Press, 1991), pp. 193–222; repr. in The Broadview Reader in Book History, ed. by Michelle Levy and Tom Mole (Broadview, 2014) • G. Thomas Tanselle, ‘Editing without a Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 47 (1994), 1–23

Week 7. Finding Bodleian Resources

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 78 of 246

A session devoted to using online catalogues and other resources for searching and accessing Bodleian collections.

Week 8 What does a B Course essay look like?

This is a workshop run by B Course convenors to discuss the kind of research and research questions that you might take up for your B Course essays. Former MSt students offer accounts of how they arrived at their B Course essay topic, and the archival and theoretical materials that they used. There will be time for questions about the B Course essay and you will also have an opportunity to read B Course essays written by students in previous years.

(ii) Material methodology

Michaelmas Term weeks 1-8

Dr Michelle Kelly

Wednesday 9-10, Horton Room, Weston Library

An introduction to manuscript study and archive use in world literature, with weekly classes on the transcription, editing and use of manuscript materials. The course will focus on practical transcription skills, and will conclude with a compulsory examination on these methods in week 8. But we will also consider the use of literary manuscripts and archival materials in literary scholarship, and the kinds of research questions made possible through the use of archival materials. The course is a compulsory component of the B Course for the MSt in World Literature.

• Week 1 Introduction • Week 2 Manuscript Transcription • Week 3 Manuscript Transcription • Week 4 Manuscript Transcription • Week 5 Manuscript Transcription • Week 6 Manuscript Transcription • Week 7 Mock Examination • Week 8 Transcription Examination and Roundtable on the B Course essay

Course materials will be circulated from week to week. Reading Suggestions: Archives, Editing and Textual Scholarship • Luca Crispi, Joyce’s Creative Process and The Construction of Character in Ulysses: Becoming the Blooms. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2015 • Jacques Derrida, Archive Fever: A Freudian Impression. Trans. by Eric Prenowitz. Chicago: Chicago UP, 1996

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 79 of 246

• Daniel Ferrer, ‘Production, Invention, and Reproduction: Genetic vs. Textual Criticism’, in Reimagining Textuality: Textual Studies in the Late Age of Print, edited by Elizabeth Bergmann Loizeaux and Neil Fraistat. University of Wisconsin Press, 2002 • D.C. Greetham, ‘Some Types of Scholarly Edition,’ in David Greetham, Textual Scholarship: An Introduction. Garland, 1992, pp. 383-417 • D. C. Greetham, ‘Textual Scholarship’, in Introduction to Scholarship in Modern Languages and Literatures, edited by Joseph Gibaldi. Modern Language Association of America, 1992, 103-137 • Ben Hutchinson and Shane Weller. “Archive Time”. Comparative Critical Studies 8.2-3, 2011: 133- 53 • Jerome McGann, ‘The Monks and the Giants: Textual Bibliographical Studies and the Interpretation of Literary Works’, in The Beauty of Inflections, ed. by Jerome McGann (Clarendon Press, 1988), 69-89 • Carolyn Steedman, Dust. Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2001 • Ann Laura Stoler, Along the Archival Grain: Epistemic Anxieties and Colonial Common Sense. Princeton; Oxford: Princeton UP, 2009 • J. Stephen Murphy, ‘The Death of the Editor’, Essays in Criticism, 58:4, (2008), 289-310 • Gregory Crane, ‘Give us editors! Re-inventing the edition and re- thinking the humanities’, in Online Humanities Scholarship: The Shape of Things to Come, (University of Virginia/Mellon Foundation, 2010-03), http://cnx.org/content/m34316/latest/

(iii) World Literature Book History

Michaelmas Term 2018

WEEK 7 Tuesday, 11-1, St Hugh’s College (Venue TBC)

Instituting World Literature I (Professor Peter McDonald)

WEEK 8 Monday, 11-1, OUP, Walton Street (use Great Clarendon Street entrance)

OUP Archive visit (Martin Maw)

Hilary Term 2019

WEEK 1

Tuesday, 11-1, St Hugh’s (Room TBC)

The Industry of Postcolonial/World Literature (Dr Michelle Kelly)

Friday, 2-5pm, Oxford Brookes

Oxford Brookes Booker Prize Archive

WEEK 2

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 80 of 246

Tuesday, 11-1, St Hugh’s (Room TBC)

Organisations, Charters, and Literary Internationalism (Dr Michelle Kelly and Professor Peter McDonald)

WEEK 3

Tuesday, 11-1, St Hugh’s (Room TBC)

Instituting World Literature II (Professor Peter McDonald)

WEEK 4-6

Tuesday, 11-1, St Hugh’s (Room TBC)

Student presentations

World Literature Book History: Background Reading

Book History: Key Texts

• Pierre Bourdieu, The Field of Cultural Production: Essays on Art and Literature. Edited by Randal Johnson. Cambridge: Polity, 1993. • Pascale Casanova, The World Republic of Letters. Trans. M.B. DeBevoise. Cambridge, MS: Harvard University Press, 2007. • Robert Darnton, ‘What is the History of Books?’ in The Kiss of Lamourette. London: Faber and Faber, 1990, 107-135. (also included in the Book History Reader) • David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery, The Book History Reader. London: Routledge, 2006. • ---- An Introduction to Book History. London: Routledge, 2013. • Peter D. McDonald, “Ideas of the Book and Histories of Literature: after Theory?” PMLA 121.1 (2006): 214-228. • D. F. McKenzie, Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999. • John B. Thompson, Merchants of Culture: the Publishing Business in the Twenty-First Century. Cambridge: Polity, 2012.

Examples from World Literature Book History

Book Length Studies

• Anna Auguscik, Prizing Debate: The Fourth Decade of the Booker Prize and the Contemporary Novel in the UK. Transcript Verlag, 2017. • Sarah Brouillette, Postcolonial Writers and the Global Literary Marketplace. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2011. • James Currey, Africa Writes Back : The African Writers Series & the Launch of African Literature. Oxford: James Currey, 2008.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 81 of 246

• Caroline Davis, Creating Postcolonial Literature: African Writers and British Publishers. London: Palgrave Macmillan, 2013. • Robert Fraser, Book History Through Postcolonial Eyes: Rewriting the Script. London: Routledge, 2008. • Isabel Hofmeyr, The Portable Bunyan: A Transnational History of the Pilgrim’s Progress. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2000. • ---. Ghandi’s Printing Press: Experiments in Slow Reading. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2013. • Graham Huggan, The Postcolonial Exotic: Marketing the Margins. London: Routledge, 2001. • Peter J. Kalliney, Commonwealth of Letters: British Literary Culture and the Emergence of Postcolonial Aesthetics. New York: Oxford University Press, 2013. • Gail Low, Publishing the Postcolonial. London: Routledge, 2011. • Peter McDonald, The Literature Police: Apartheid Censorship and its Cultural Consequences. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2009. • Nicole Moore, The Censor’s Library. St Lucia, Qld: University of Queensland Press, 2012. • Andrew W. Rubin, Archives of Authority: Empire, Culture and the Cold War. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2012. • Claire Squires, Marketing Literature: The Making of Contemporary Writing in Britain. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2007. • Andrew van der Vlies, South African Textual Cultures: White, Black, Read All Over. Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2007.

Edited Collections

• Bethan Benwell, James Proctor and Gemma Robinson, eds. Postcolonial Audiences: Readers, Viewers and Reception. New York and Abingdon: Routledge, 2012. • Raphael Dalleo ed., Bourdieu and Postcolonial Studies. Liverpool: Liverool University Press, 2016. • Stefan Helgesson and Pieter Vermeulen, ed., Institutions of World Literature: Writing, Translation, Markets. London: Routledge, 2016. • Andrew van der Vlies, ed. Print, Text and Book Cultures in South Africa. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 2012.

Journal Special Issue: Journal of Commonwealth Literature 48.1 (2013)

Required Reading:

David Damrosch, et. al., eds. The Longman Anthology of World Literature (6 vols., 2004-).

Please read all the prefatory material, think about the overall structure, and browse the volumes, considering the various ways in which they fashion a knowledge of ‘world literature’ and how they have changed since the first edition in 2004.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 82 of 246

Some questions to consider:

How do the prefaces, the headnotes, and the table of contents frame a knowledge of ‘world literature’ and/or some specific texts?

Who and where are its editors?

How has the anthology changed since it first appeared in 2004?

What are we to make of the fact that it appears under the Longman imprint?

How is the print edition supplemented digitally?

Are there any significant issues arising from the ways in which it uses its source materials?

How does it compare to other major anthologies targeting the same markets (e.g. Norton)?

M.St. in English and American Studies B-Course

The B Course for the MSt in English and American Literature has three different threads:

(i) Material Texts Post-1900 (Michaelmas weeks 1-6); (ii) Material Methodology (Michaelmas weeks 1-8); and (iii) the English and American Literature B Course (Michaelmas weeks 7-8 and Hilary weeks 1-6)

(i) Material Texts Post-1900

The B Course begins in Michaelmas Term with Material Texts Post-1900, providing an introduction to bibliography (the physical and technical details of book-making) and book history as they apply to the study of literature. It includes both the study of books as singular physical objects and as texts that may exist in multiple physical states: as manuscript, print, and digital forms. Weekly 1.5 or 2 hour classes during Michaelmas Term will be held in the Weston Library and will each week draw on material from the Bodleian Collections. The course will consist of three lectures by Dr Carly Watson introducing the principles of bibliography and textual scholarship, and three sessions designed to introduce potential approaches to research through the handling and discussion of items from the Bodleian’s Special Collections. Some of the questions that will arise over the course of the six weeks include: How do we read and describe materiality? What significances do we attach to particular material features? Are there material features we tend to overlook? To what degree is the process of production legible in the material text? What relationships might we propose between material and literary form? What does it mean to study the history of the book in the digital age?

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 83 of 246

Material Texts Post-1900 is taught to students from three different MSt strands in Michaelmas Term, weeks 1-6: English Literature 1900-present, English and American Literature, and World Literature in English.

The full group will meet in weeks 1, 2, and 6. You will meet as two smaller groups in weeks 3, 4, and 5 to enable you to work closely with material from the Bodleian collections. For these small group sessions, no preparation is required but students should be prepared to contribute to discussion and share any ideas they may have about their potential areas of research interest. These sessions will be held in the Weston Library Visiting Scholars Centre on Level 2. You must leave your bags in the lockers at the Parks Road entrance to the library before gaining access to the Visiting Scholars Centre. You will also meet in small groups at the Weston in week 7 for a detailed guide to finding Bodleian resources.

Students from the English and American Literature strand are also welcome to take part in the Handpress Printing workshops that run in Michaelmas and Hilary Terms, and in the Issues in Editing course that runs in Hilary Term.

Questions about the B Course in Michaelmas Term should be directed to Dr Michelle Kelly: [email protected]

If you have questions about particular lectures or workshops, contact Dr Chris Fletcher: [email protected] or Dr Carly Watson: [email protected]

Material Texts: weekly lectures or workshops

Week 1. Bibliography, Book History, and Literary Study

Wednesday 10-11.30, Lecture Theatre, Weston Library

Scholarly work in bibliography and book history seeks to decode the meanings contained in the material form of books. What does this involve? And how can it enhance our understanding of literature?

Required reading

• Robert Darnton, ‘What is the History of Books?’, Daedalus, 111 (1982), 65– 83 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR] • Paul Eggert, ‘Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature’, The Library, 13 (2012), 3–32 [available online via OxLIP] • D. F. McKenzie, ‘The Book as an Expressive Form’ and ‘The Dialectics of Bibliography Now’, in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge University Press, 1999), pp. 9–30, 55–76 [available online via SOLO] • Further reading • Craig S. Abbott and William Proctor Williams, An Introduction to Bibliographical and Textual Studies (Modern Language Association, 1985; 4th edn, 2009) • David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery, eds, The Book History Reader (Routledge, 2002)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 84 of 246

• Leslie Howsam, Old Books and New Histories: An Orientation to Studies in Book and Print Culture (University of Toronto Press, 2006) • Michelle Levy and Tom Mole, The Broadview Introduction to Book History (Broadview, 2017) • Michael F. Suarez, SJ, and H. R. Woudhuysen, eds, The Book: A Global History (Oxford University Press, 2013) • G. Thomas Tanselle, Bibliographical Analysis: A Historical Introduction (Cambridge University Press, 2009)

Week 2. The Material Text

Monday 10-11.30, Lecture Theatre, Weston Library

From the fifteenth to the eighteenth centuries, printing technology changed very little; the past two centuries have seen the mechanisation of book production and the digital revolution. How have technological developments changed the form of printed texts? And how can we describe and interpret the physical forms of printed books?

Required reading

Warren Chappell and Robert Bringhurst, A Short History of the Printed Word, 2nd edn (Hartley & Marks, 1999), pp. 191–300 [available online at https://archive.org/details/robert-bringhurst-warren-chappell- a-short-history-of-the-printed-word]

Further reading

• Fredson Bowers, Principles of Bibliographical Description (Princeton University Press, 1949; repr. St. Paul’s Bibliographies, 1994) • Johanna Drucker, The Visible Word: Experimental Typography and Modern Art, 1909–1923 (University of Chicago Press, 1994) • Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography (Clarendon Press, 1972; repr. Oak Knoll Press, 1995), especially pp. 189–296 • Paul C. Gutjahr and Megan L. Benton, eds, Illuminating Letters: Typography and Literary Interpretation (University of Massachusetts Press, 2001) • G. Thomas Tanselle, ‘Book Jackets, Blurbs, and Bibliographers’, The Library, 26 (1971), 91–134 [available online via OxLIP]

Week 3. Dead or Alive?

Thursday 10am-12pm, Weston Visiting Scholars Centre

Drawing upon unique and distinctive items from the Bodleian’s collections this introductory hands-on session considers books across centuries which draw attention to their own material qualities, from personal medieval productions, to artists’ books which celebrate supreme technical virtuosity, to avant-

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 85 of 246

garde productions programmed to self-destruct. As such, it considers the boundaries of the book and raises questions of value, collecting, curation, and the future of the book in the context of the digital age.

Week 4. Off the shelf: Approaches to Research

Thursday 10am-12pm, Weston Visiting Scholars Centre

Gathering together a range of diverse materials, this hands on session illustrates the different approaches that might be taken when developing research topics on Material Texts, including technical consideration of features, social and historical analysis, the editorial value of unpublished texts, original sources for life writing and the elasticity of bibliographic genre.

Week 5. The Book Unbound

Thursday 10am-12pm, Weston Visiting Scholars Centre

An introduction to sources for research in the Bodleian’s collections of modern manuscripts, archives, printed ephemera and ‘born-digital’ material. Accessing and negotiating complex archives can be challenging but is one of the most fruitful areas for new research. Digital material provides a rich but often highly unstable source for contemporary literary and historical studies – examples from the Bodleian’s Web Archive will be considered.

Week 6. Textual Criticism and Editing

Wednesday 10-11.30am, Lecture Theatre, Weston Library

The materiality of texts—their existence in multiple copies, which can differ in a wide variety of ways— poses a challenge for editors. This session will introduce some of the theories that editors have developed to deal with the problems of material texts.

Required reading

• W. W. Greg, ‘The Rationale of Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 3 (1950–1), 19–36 [available online via OxLIP and JSTOR] • Jack Stillinger, ‘A Practical Theory of Versions’, in Coleridge and Textual Instability: The Multiple Versions of the Major Poems (Oxford University Press, 1994), pp. 118–40 [available online via SOLO]

Further reading

• Fredson Bowers, ‘Greg’s “Rationale of Copy-Text” Revisited’, Studies in Bibliography, 31 (1978), 90–161 • Julia Briggs, ‘Between the Texts: Virginia Woolf’s Acts of Revision’, TEXT, 12 (1999), 143–65

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 86 of 246

• Philip Cohen, ed., Devils and Angels: Textual Editing and Literary Theory (University of Virginia Press, 1991) • Neil Fraistat and Julia Flanders, eds, The Cambridge Companion to Textual Scholarship (Cambridge University Press, 2013) [available online via SOLO] • D. C. Greetham, Textual Scholarship: An Introduction (Garland, 1992) [available online via SOLO] • Erick Kelemen, Textual Editing and Criticism: An Introduction (Norton, 2009) • Brenda R. Silver, ‘Textual Criticism as Feminist Practice: Or, Who’s Afraid of Virginia Woolf Part II’, in Representing Modernist Texts: Editing as Interpretation, ed. by George Bornstein (University of Michigan Press, 1991), pp. 193–222; repr. in The Broadview Reader in Book History, ed. by Michelle Levy and Tom Mole (Broadview, 2014) • G. Thomas Tanselle, ‘Editing without a Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 47 (1994), 1–23

Week 7. Finding Bodleian Resources

Thursday 10am-12pm, Weston Library

A session devoted to using online catalogues and other resources for searching and accessing Bodleian collections.

Week 8 What does a B Course essay look like?

Time and venue TBC

This is a workshop run by B Course convenors to discuss the kind of research and research questions that you might take up for your B Course essays. Former MSt students offer accounts of how they arrived at their B Course essay topic, and the archival and theoretical materials that they used. There will be time for questions about the B Course essay and you will also have an opportunity to read B Course essays written by students in previous years.

(ii) Material methodology

Michaelmas Term weeks 1-8

Dr Michelle Kelly

Wednesday 9-10, Horton Room, Weston Library

An introduction to manuscript study and archive use in world literature, with weekly classes on the transcription, editing and use of manuscript materials. The course will focus on practical transcription skills, and will conclude with a compulsory examination on these methods in week 8. But we will also consider the use of literary manuscripts and archival materials in literary scholarship, and the kinds of research questions made possible through the use of archival materials. The course is a compulsory component of the B Course for the MSt in World Literature.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 87 of 246

• Week 1 Introduction • Week 2 Manuscript Transcription • Week 3 Manuscript Transcription • Week 4 Manuscript Transcription • Week 5 Manuscript Transcription • Week 6 Manuscript Transcription • Week 7 Mock Examination • Week 8 Transcription Examination and Roundtable on the B Course essay

Course materials will be circulated from week to week. Reading Suggestions: Archives, Editing and Textual Scholarship • Luca Crispi, Joyce’s Creative Process and The Construction of Character in Ulysses: Becoming the Blooms. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2015. • Jacques Derrida, Archive Fever: A Freudian Impression. Trans. by Eric Prenowitz. Chicago: Chicago UP, 1996. • Daniel Ferrer, ‘Production, Invention, and Reproduction: Genetic vs. Textual Criticism’, in Reimagining Textuality: Textual Studies in the Late Age of Print, edited by Elizabeth Bergmann Loizeaux and Neil Fraistat. University of Wisconsin Press, 2002. • D.C. Greetham, ‘Some Types of Scholarly Edition,’ in David Greetham, Textual Scholarship: An Introduction. Garland, 1992, pp. 383-417. • D. C. Greetham, ‘Textual Scholarship’, in Introduction to Scholarship in Modern Languages and Literatures, edited by Joseph Gibaldi. Modern Language Association of America, 1992, 103-137. • Ben Hutchinson and Shane Weller. “Archive Time”. Comparative Critical Studies 8.2-3, 2011: 133- 53. • Jerome McGann, ‘The Monks and the Giants: Textual Bibliographical Studies and the Interpretation of Literary Works’, in The Beauty of Inflections, ed. by Jerome McGann (Clarendon Press, 1988), 69-89. • Carolyn Steedman, Dust. Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2001. • Ann Laura Stoler, Along the Archival Grain: Epistemic Anxieties and Colonial Common Sense. Princeton; Oxford: Princeton UP, 2009. • J. Stephen Murphy, ‘The Death of the Editor’, Essays in Criticism, 58:4, (2008), 289-310. • Gregory Crane, ‘Give us editors! Re-inventing the edition and re- thinking the humanities’, in Online Humanities Scholarship: The Shape of Things to Come, (University of Virginia/Mellon Foundation, 2010-03), http://cnx.org/content/m34316/latest/

(iii) M.St. in English and American Studies: Hilary Term B Course

Hilary Term Weeks 1-6

Professor Merve Emre

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 88 of 246

[email protected]

As students and teachers of literature, nothing seems more natural to us than the act of reading—and yet reading is anything but natural. Its performance relies on specific material and cultural parameters: the physical spaces in which one reads; the size, shape, and organization of the textual objects to which one attends; the temporal, perceptual, and somatic habits one cultivates through scenes of literary instruction; the communities (like our classroom) in which one identifies as and embodies a specific type of reader (“a student or teacher of literature”). This course treats reading as a densely mediated activity. In this course, the study of reading sits at the intersection of book history and literary historicism, studies of print culture, and media theory.

In the first half of the class (Weeks 1-3), we will cover major contemporary debates in the study of reading and material texts. Each week, one person will present on the assigned texts and one person will respond to the presentation. (The presenter must email the respondent his/her presentation 72 hours in advance.) The presentations should both summarize the readings and make an argument about them; the response should engage with this argument in a critical and generous way. The presenter is welcome to bring in additional materials—novels, poems, plays, manifestos—so long as everyone in the class receives an emailed copy of these materials 72 hours in advance. After the presentations, we will discuss the readings as a group.

In the second half of the class (Weeks 4-6), you will each circulate a detailed outline of your B course paper: 5-10 pages with an abstract at the top detailing the argument. Include any documents you think we should have in hand as we read your outline and send us everything 72 hours in advance of the class meeting. On the day of your presentation, you will over a brief overview of your project and its aims. We will then discuss your submission as a group.

Required Texts

All readings can be downloaded as PDFs

Week One

• Walter Benn Michaels, “The Blank Page,” in The Shape of the Signifier (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2004) • Virginia Jackson, “Beforehand,” “A Theory of Lyric Reading,” from Dickinson’s Misery (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2005) • Stanley Fish, “Literature in the Reader” from Is There a Text in this Class? The Authority of Interpretive Communities (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1980) • Wolfgang Iser, “Interaction Between Text and Reader” from Prospecting: From Reader Response to Literary Anthropology (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Press, 1989)

Week Two

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 B-Courses Page 89 of 246

• Rachel Sagner Buurma and Laura Heffernan, “The Common Reader and the Archival Classroom: Disciplinary History for the Twenty-First Century,” New Literary History 43.1 (Winter 2012) • Michael Warner, “Uncritical Reading,” from Polemic: Critical/Uncritical (New York: Routledge 2002) • Janice Radway, “A Certain Book Club Culture,” from A Feeling for Books: The Book-of-the-Month Club, Literary Taste, and Middle-Class Desire (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1997) • Roger Chartier, “Language, Books, and Reading from the Printed Word to the Digital Text,” Critical Inquiry 31.1 (Autumn 2004)

Week Three

• Friedrich Kittler, “Typewriter,” from Gramophone, Film, Typewriter (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2010) • John Guillory, “Genesis of the Media Concept,” Critical Inquiry 36.2 (Winter 2010) • Mark Goble, “All Communications are Love,” Beautiful Circuits (New York: Columbia University Press, 2010) • Lisa Gitelman, “A Short History of ______,” from Paper Knowledge (Durham: Duke University Press, 2014 • Franco Moretti and Dominique Pestre, Bankspeak: The Language of World Bank Reports (Stanford: Stanford Literary Lab, 2015)

Week Four

• Workshop

Week Five

• Workshop

Week Six

• Workshop

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Optional Modules and B-Courses Page 90 of 246

OPTIONAL MODULES and B-COURSES

Practical printing workshop for postgraduate students Michaelmas Term 2018 Six sessions, Wednesdays 1.30-4.30, in the Bodleian printing workshop, Schola Musicae, Old Bodleian Library

These optional classes are open to all M.St. students, from any period.

Sessions are structured to provide practical experience of processes going into the making of a printed book in the hand-press period, and include type-setting by hand, imposing the forme (the structure of the book), printing text and images, proofreading, and sewing a pamphlet. The making of type and other printing surfaces, and the history of printing up to 1830, are covered in short lectures and examination of materials in the workshop. The aim of the module is, to quote R.B. McKerrow, to enable students to see a text ‘not only from the point of view of the reader interested in it as literature, but also from the points of view of those who composed, corrected, printed, folded, and bound it.’

Issues in Editing Hilary Term Dr Carly Watson ([email protected])

This optional course is open to all M.St. students working on literature post-1550 who are interested in writing about editorial issues for the B Course essay. This could mean proposing a new approach to editing a text and providing a sample of the edited text in an appendix, or it might mean analysing and evaluating the approach taken in a published edition (or editions). For further guidance on the forms the B Course essay can take, see Appendix 2 of the M.St. Handbook.

The course is focused on the theory and practice of modern scholarly editing (as distinct from editing as a creative practice or a professional practice in publishing). It is designed to help you develop an understanding of the theoretical and practical issues involved in editing texts from any period.

There is no need to register for the course in advance, and no preparation is required.

Course Outline

The course is taught in 1.5-hour classes over six weeks. Classes in Weeks 1–5 will explore various aspects of scholarly editing, from the different types of scholarly edition to the decisions involved in constructing and annotating a text. In Week 6 you will have the opportunity to discuss your plans for the essay in a short one-on-one consultation.

 Week 1 Types of edition

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Optional Modules and B-Courses Page 91 of 246

 Week 2 Copy-text and variants  Week 3 Plural versions  Week 4 Annotation  Week 5 Editing in the digital age  Week 6 Writing the essay

General Reading

For an extensive and carefully structured bibliography of the literature of scholarly editing, see G. Thomas Tanselle’s syllabus for his Introduction to Scholarly Editing course, online at . The list below offers a selection of works in this area as a starting-point for your own explorations.

• Stephen Barney, ed., Annotation and its Texts (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1991) • George Bornstein and Ralph G. Williams, eds, Palimpsest: Editorial Theory in the Humanities (Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1993) • Fredson Bowers, ‘Greg’s “Rationale of Copy-Text” Revisited’, Studies in Bibliography, 31 (1978), 90–161 • Julia Briggs, ‘Between the Texts: Virginia Woolf’s Acts of Revision’, TEXT, 12 (1999), 143–65 • Sally Bushell, Text as Process: Creative Composition in Wordsworth, Tennyson, and Dickinson (Charlottesville: University of Virginia Press, 2009) • Philip Cohen, ed., Devils and Angels: Textual Editing and Literary Theory (Charlottesville: University of Virginia Press, 1991) • Gregory Crane, ‘Give Us Editors! Re-inventing the Edition and Re-thinking the Humanities’, in The Shape of Things to Come, ed. by Jerome J. McGann (Houston, TX: Rice University Press, 2010), pp. 81–97; online at . • Marilyn Deegan and Kathryn Sutherland, eds, Text Editing, Print, and the Digital World (Farnham: Ashgate, 2009) [available online via SOLO] • Neil Fraistat and Julia Flanders, eds, The Cambridge Companion to Textual Scholarship (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013) [available online via SOLO] • H. W. Gabler, ‘The Text as Process and the Problem of Intentionality’, TEXT, 3 (1987), 107–16 • D. C. Greetham, ed., Scholarly Editing: A Guide to Research (New York: Modern Language Association, 1995) • ———————— , Textual Scholarship: An Introduction (New York: Garland, 1992) [available online via SOLO] • W. W. Greg, ‘The Rationale of Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 3 (1950–1), 19–36 • Ian Jack, ‘Novels and those “Necessary Evils”: Annotating the Brontës’, Essays in Criticism, 32 (1982), 321–37 • Harold Love, ‘Editing Scribally Published Texts’, in Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1993), pp. 313–56 [available online via SOLO] • Leah S. Marcus, Unediting the Renaissance: Shakespeare, Marlowe, Milton (London: Routledge, 1996) [available online via SOLO] M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Optional Modules and B-Courses Page 92 of 246

• Jerome J. McGann, The Textual Condition (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1991) • J. Stephen Murphy, ‘The Death of the Editor’, Essays in Criticism, 58 (2008), 289–310 • Peter L. Shillingsburg, Scholarly Editing in the Computer Age: Theory and Practice (Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1986) • Martha Nell Smith, ‘Electronic Scholarly Editing’, in A Companion to Digital Humanities, ed. by Susan Schreibman, Ray Siemens, and John Unsworth (Oxford: Blackwell, 2004), pp. 306–22 [available online via SOLO] • Jack Stillinger, Coleridge and Textual Instability: The Multiple Versions of the Major Poems (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994) [available online via SOLO] • ——————— , Multiple Authority and the Myth of Solitary Genius (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1991) [available online via SOLO] • G. Thomas Tanselle, ‘The Editing of Historical Documents’, Studies in Bibliography, 31 (1978), 1– 56 • —————————— , ‘Editing without a Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 47 (1994), 1–23 • Dirk Van Hulle, Textual Awareness: A Genetic Study of Late Manuscripts by Joyce, Proust, and Mann (Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 2004) [available online via SOLO]

Selected Editions and Text Archives

The following resources offer models of editorial practice that may be useful to you as you work on your own project.

Print editions

• David Bevington, Martin Butler, and Ian Donaldson, gen. eds, The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Ben Jonson, 7 vols (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2012); accompanied by an online edition with additional archival and contextual material, available via SOLO. • Fredson Bowers, ed., The Works of Stephen Crane, 10 vols (Charlottesville: University of Virginia Press, 1969–75) • Thomas Hardy, Tess of the D’Urbervilles, ed. by Simon Gatrell and Juliet Grindle (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1983) • Claude Rawson et al., gen. eds, The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Jonathan Swift (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2008–); accompanied by the Jonathan Swift Archive . • Gary Taylor et al., gen. eds, The New Oxford Shakespeare: The Complete Works (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016) [available online via SOLO] • Janet Todd, gen. ed., The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Jane Austen, 9 vols (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005–9)

Digital editions

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Optional Modules and B-Courses Page 93 of 246

• Morris Eaves, Robert N. Essick, and Joseph Viscomi, eds, The William Blake Archive • Ed Folsom and Kenneth M. Price, eds, The Walt Whitman Archive • • New Modernist Editing: an edition of Virginia Woolf’s ‘Ode Written Partly in Prose on Seeing the Name of Cutbush Above a Butcher’s Shop in Pentonville’ • < https://nme-digital-ode.glasgow.ac.uk/#> • Kathryn Sutherland, ed., Jane Austen’s Fiction Manuscripts • • Marta Werner, Julie Enszer, and Jessica Beard, gen. eds, Dickinson Electronic Archives

Latin for beginners (Medievalists and Early Modernists): optional course

The English Faculty will offer an introductory Latin course for graduate students of medieval and early modern English literature. This will be in the format of a weekly 90-minute Latin grammar class taught in Michaelmas and Hilary Terms (October-March) by Dr Cressida Ryan, Faculty of Theology. Class size is limited to 18 and students will need to enrol formally. Students interested in taking Dr Ryan’s classes for the duration of the course are asked to submit an application in the form of a letter emailed to the Director of Graduate Studies ([email protected]) by 25th July briefly outlining how learning Latin would be of benefit to them in their research. Students will be informed at their M.St. strand induction (or for PGR students, by the DGS), as to whether they have a place in the class, along with details of timetabling, location, etc. early in Michaelmas Term.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 94 of 246

C-COURSES

Michaelmas Term C-Courses

Devotional Texts and Material Culture c. 1200-1500 Dr Annie Sutherland (Somerville) and Dr Jim Harris (Ashmolean)

This C course is intended to function as an innovative exploration of the devotional culture of the Middle Ages, co-taught throughout by Drs Sutherland and Harris. The considerable and varied literature of the period 1200-1500 will be its primary focus. As the proposal indicates, we will cover a range of texts, from the 13th century Ancrene Wisse to the 15th century Mirror of the Blessed Life of Christ (given the length of many of the proposed texts, in certain weeks we will recommend that students read selected extracts rather than works in their entirety). However, by combining literary work with the handling of relevant physical objects, we hope to encourage students towards a meaningful appreciation of the materiality of medieval devotional practice. We aim to equip students to read both texts and objects, and to recognise the affinities and disparities between textual and material literacies. All seminars will take place in the Ashmolean’s teaching rooms, so as to facilitate access to the objects and images under consideration.

Week 1 Travelling and Staying Put This week, we explore texts and objects associated with personal devotional practice. The materials selected encourage students to think about the itinerant devotion of the pilgrim alongside the stationary devotion of the enclosed religious.

Primary Texts

• ANCRENE WISSE [Millett, B. (ed.), Ancrene Wisse: A Corrected Edition of the Text in Cambridge, Corpus Christi College, MS 402, with variants from other manuscripts 2 volumes, EETS os 325 & 326 (2005, 2006)] • PIERS PLOWMAN [Schmidt, A.V.C. (ed.), The Vision of Piers Plowman: B Text (1995)] • Margery Kempe’s BOOK [Windeatt, B. (ed.), The Book of Margery Kempe (2000)] • MANDEVILLE’S TRAVELS [Kohanski, T. and Benson, C.D. (eds.), Mandeville’s Travels (2007)]

Ashmolean Objects

• AN1997.3 Pilgrim badge of John Schorne • AN1997.12 Pilgrim badge of John Schorne • AN1927.6410 Holy water ampulla • Woodcut of St Anthony Abbot with votive offerings • Israel van Meckenem, Mass of St Gregory (Indulgenced prints with and without the indulgence)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 95 of 246

Week 2 Women and Men This week, we explore the role played by gender in medieval devotional culture. We will consider men as makers of objects and as authors of texts intended for women, as well as considering women as patrons and authors. The texts and objects selected will also enable us to think about the gendered relationship between Christ and his mother, between Christ and the devotee, and between the devotee and Mary.

Primary Texts • Richard Rolle’s ENGLISH EPISTLES [Ogilvie-Thomson, S.J. (ed.), Richard Rolle: Prose and Verse EETS os 293 (1988)] • Julian of Norwich’s REVELATIONS [Windeatt, B. (ed.), Julian of Norwich: Revelations of Divine Love (2016)] • Margery Kempe (ed. Windeatt, as above)

Ashmolean Objects • WA2013.1.8 Virgin and Child reliquary, parcel gilt silver, enamel, rock crystal • WA1908.220 Lamentation over the Dead Christ, enamel on copper, c.1480 • AN2008.10 Ivory triptych panel of the Crucifixion and the Virgin and Child Enthroned

Week 3 Saints and Narrative This week, we explore the pervasive role played by hagiography in the devotional culture of the period. Considering relevant texts and objects alongside each other, we will encourage students to think about the ways in which literary and material depictions of saintly lives and deaths complement (and sometimes contradict) each other.

Primary Texts • The saints’ lives of THE KATHERINE GROUP [Huber, E.R. and Robertson, E. (eds.), The Katherine Group (MS Bodley 34) (2016)] • Selected lives from THE SOUTH ENGLISH LEGENDARY [D’Evelyn, C. and Mill, A.J. (eds.), The South English Legendary 3 volumes, EETS os 235, 236, 244 (1956-9)] • Selected lives from THE GILTE LEGENDE [Hamer, R.F.S. and Russell, V. (eds.), Gilte Legende 3 volumes, EETS os 327, 328, 339 (2006-2012)]

Ashmolean Objects • AN1836 p.146.488, Alabaster relief of the Martyrdom of St Bartholomew, c.1400-1450 • Alabaster relief of the Martyrdom of St Erasmus • WA1933.22, St Sebastian, oil on panel, Southern Germany c.1450

Week 4 Bodies and Wounds This week, we consider the iconography of Christ’s body in (and as) text and object. The literary and material witnesses selected will encourage students to reflect on the ways in which each contributes to the meditative experience of the user. The rich symbolism of Christ’s wounds will be a particular focus of M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 96 of 246

attention.

Primary Texts • The prayers of the WOOING GROUP [Thompson, W.M. (ed.), þe Wohunge of ure Lauerd EETS os 241 (1958)] • Passion Lyrics and Charters of Christ Gray, D. (ed.), English Medieval Religious Lyrics (rev. ed. 1992)] • Richard Rolle’s Passion Meditations (ed. Ogilvie-Thomson, as above) • Selected chapters from Julian of Norwich (ed. Windeatt, as above) and Margery Kempe (ed. Windeatt, as above)

Ashmolean Objects • Woodcut of the Wounded Sacred Heart with the Arma Christi • AN1927.6371 Pilgrim token mould with the head of John the Baptist • Woodcuts of St Bridget of Sweden Adoring the Man of Sorrows

Week 5 Orders and Institutions This week, we consider the role played by monastic and fraternal orders in the circulation of devotional texts and objects. The selected texts, with Franciscan and Carthusian affiliations respectively, will be viewed alongside objects which illuminate the part played by the Franciscans and Dominicans, among others.

Primary Texts • Pseudo-Bonaventuran Passion Meditations [Bartlett, A.C. and Bestul, T.H. (eds.), Cultures of Piety (1999)] • Nicholas Love’s MIRROR OF THE BLESSED LIFE OF CHRIST [Sargent, M.G. (ed.), The Mirror of the Blessed Life of Jesus Christ: a reading text (2004)]

Ashmolean Objects • AN2009.69, The seal of the Carmelite Prior of Oxford • WA1949.104, Limoges pyx, copper alloy, gilding, enamel • Crucifixion woodcuts in Franciscan and Dominican traditions

Week 6 Recap and Presentations This week, we will ask all students to prepare brief presentations on their chosen texts / objects. In a collaborative session, we will encourage student feedback and reflection on individual presentations.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 97 of 246

Chaucer before the Tales Professor Vincent Gillespie [email protected]

An exploration of the works Chaucer wrote as he explored and refined his sense of poetic identity. We will look in detail at The Book of the Duchess and The House of Fame, his translation work on Boethius and the Roman de la Rose, and his paired works of Troilus and Criseyde and the Legend of Good Women. We can refine the course to suit the specific interests of people taking it, but The House of Fame will be key to our examination of Chaucer's sense of authorship and his growing understanding of the nature of the Poetic.

I am happy to answer questions about the course. Please use the e-mail above.

Reading Old English poetry: narrative, genre and style Dr Daniel Thomas

The study of Old English poetry stands at an important crossroads, as the re-examination and re- negotiation of long-standing paradigms and critical positions calls into question much of what we thought we knew about how poetry worked in the Anglo-Saxon period. This course will address these issues by focusing on the texts themselves, and particularly upon what an examination of narrative technique, genre, and poetic style can tell us about the composition and reception of Old English poems. The course will draw upon theoretic approaches to, particularly, narrative and genre, and will consider Old English poetry in relation to its known sources and analogues (in both prose and verse, Latin and Old English).

 Week 1: ‘In the beginning’: traditional poetics and the problem of genre

 Week 2: Epic poetry and the heroic mode (Beowulf, Andreas, Exodus, Daniel, The Fight at Finnsburh, Waldere)

 Week 3: Hagiographical narrative (Juliana, Elene, Guthlac A/B, Andreas, The Fates of the Apostles, Judith)

 Week 4: Subjectivity and selfhood: confessional narrative (The Dream of the Rood, Christ I, Vainglory, The Wanderer, The Seafarer, The Wife’s Lament, Judgement Day II, A Prayer)

 Week 5: Homiletic poetics (Christ II, Christ III, The Phoenix, The Dream of the Rood, Homiletic Fragment I, Homiletic Fragment II, Judgement Day I)

 Week 6: Canonic harmony and collective poetics (Christ I-III, Guthlac A/B, Daniel/Azarias, Andreas/Fates of the Apostles, The Dream of the Rood, Resignation A/B, Christ and Satan) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 98 of 246

The primary texts listed for each week are indicative rather than definitive. Texts will be studied in Old English, so some prior study of the language is required. If you need to refresh your knowledge of Old English, you might want to look at an introductory guide such as Mark Atherton’s Complete Old English (London: Hodder Education, 2010) or Peter Baker’s Introduction to Old English (Chichester: Wiley- Blackwell, 2012). For a more detailed (but still user-friendly) look at how the language works, see Jeremy J. Smith’s Old English: A Linguistic Introduction (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009). There are numerous excellent introductions to contemporary narrative and/or genre theory. Particularly recommend are: Kent Puckett, Narrative Theory: a critical introduction (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2016) and David Duff, Modern Genre Theory (Harlow: Longman, 2000).

The Old English poetic corpus is small, so it is possible to know it in some detail. You should try to familiarize yourself with as much of it as possible before the course begins, particularly the longer narrative poems. Parallel text editions such as those produced for the ‘Dumbarton Oaks Medieval Library’ will be particularly useful for this:

• The Beowulf Manuscript, ed. and trans. R. D. Fulk (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2010) • Old Testament Narratives, ed. and trans. Daniel Anlezark (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2011) • The Old English Poems of Cynewulf, ed. and trans. Robert E. Bjork (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2013) • Old English Poems of Christ and His Saints, ed. and trans. Mary Clayton (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2013) • Old English Shorter Poems Vol. I Religious and Didactic, ed. and trans. Christopher A. Jones (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2012) • Old English Shorter Poems Vol. II Wisdom and Lyric, ed. and trans. Robert E. Bjork (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2014)

Initial secondary reading (useful to look at some of this in advance if you can):

• Bartlett, Adeline Courtney: The Larger Rhetorical Patterns in Anglo-Saxon Poetry (New York: Columbia University Press, 1935) • Brodeur, Arthur: The Art of Beowulf (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1959) • Battles, Paul: ‘Towards a Theory of Old English Poetic Genres: Epic, Elegy, Wisdom Poetry, and the “Traditional Opening”’, Studies in Philology 111 (2014), 1‒33 • Bredehoft, Thomas A.: Authors, Audiences, and Old English Verse (Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2009), • Drout, Michael C.: Tradition and Influence in Anglo-Saxon Literature: an Evolutionary, Cognitivist Approach (New York: Macmillan, 2013) • Foley, John Miles: ‘Texts That Speak to Reader Who Hear: Old English Poetry and the Languages of Oral Tradition’, in Speaking Two Languages: Traditional Disciplines and Contemporary Theory in Medieval Studies, ed. Allen J. Frantzen (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1991), 141– 56

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 99 of 246

• Greenfield, Stanley: The Interpretation of Old English Poetry (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1972) • Howe, Nicholas: ‘What We Talk About When We Talk About Style’, in Anglo-Saxon Styles, eds. Catherine E. Karkov and George Hardin Brown (New York: State University of New York Press, 2003), 169‒78 • Maring, Heather: Signs that Sing: Hybrid Poetics in Old English Verse (Gainesville: University of Florida Pres, 2018). • Momma, Haruko: ‘Old English Poetic Form: Genre, Style, Prosody’, in The Cambridge History of Early Medieval English Literature, ed. Clare Lees (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2012), 278‒308 • O’Brien O’Keeffe, Katherine: Visible Song: Transitional Literacy in Old English Verse (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990) • Orchard, Andy: ‘Both Style and Substance: The Case for Cynewulf’, in Anglo-Saxon Styles, eds. Catherine E. Karkov and George Hardin Brown (New York: State University of New York Press, 2003), 271‒305 • ‒‒‒: ‘Old English and Anglo-Latin: The Odd Couple’, in A Companion to British Literature: Volume I: Medieval Literature 700‒1450, eds. Robert DeMaria, Jr., Heesok Chang, and Samantha Zacher (Chichester: Wiley-Blackwell, 2014), 273‒92 • Orton, Peter: The Transmission of Old English Poetry (Turnhout: Brepols, 2000). • Robinson, Fred C.: Beowulf and the Appositive Style (Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1985) • Shippey, T. A.: Old English Verse (London: Hutchinson, 1972) • Thornbury, Emily: Becoming a Poet in Anglo-Saxon England (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2014)

The New Theatre History: Dramatists, Actors, Repertories, Documents Dr Bart Van Es

Some of the most exciting current work on Shakespeare and other early modern dramatists falls under the heading of ‘theatre history’. Through a re-examination of evidence, long-established orthodoxies in the story of British drama are being challenged. The compositional dates and authorial attributions of specific plays are no longer fixed in the way they were once thought to be. Arden of Faversham, Edward III, and The History of Cardenio, for example, are all included in the 2016 Oxford Complete Works of Shakespeare, while Macbeth and Measure for Measure are featured, as ‘genetic texts’, in Thomas Middleton: the Collected Works. Previously monolithic entities such as ‘the playtext’ or ‘dramatic character’ are now claimed by many scholars to be much less fixed as categories. At the same time, while old certainties are being challenged, new subjects for study have emerged into the discipline. There are now monographs that chart the histories of individual acting companies such as The Queen’s or The Admiral’s Men, for example. Topics including ‘co-authorship’, ‘textual revision’, and ‘theatrical rehearsal’ are being studied at length for the first time.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 100 of 246

This is a vibrant time for theatre history, but the conclusions of the new movement are by no means beyond dispute. Given the uncertain terrain, it is therefore imperative that graduate students become aware of current debates and the evidence they draw upon. In the first place, theatre history is a rich area for original research projects. Second, because theatre history is challenging long-established beliefs, knowledge of the subject is now important in other sub-disciplines, such as book history, the study of politics, the study of literary patronage, and ‘authorship studies’.

This course will familiarize you with the research methodologies and documents that underlie the new history. We will look at repertory study, co-authorship, and company identity and at categories of document such as the ‘actor’s part’, the ‘backstage plot’, and the so-called ‘foul papers,’ or rough copy, produced by dramatists. Each week discussion will focus on an individual play as well as on a class of documents. Dramatists touched on will include Shakespeare, Marlowe, Jonson, and Fletcher alongside lesser-known figures like Munday, Daborne, and Broome. By the end of the course, students should be in a position to understand and critique the assumptions made by modern editors (including those of the Oxford Shakespeare). They should also be equipped to produce fresh research.

General Background Reading

• Gerard Eades Bentley, The Profession of Dramatist in Shakespeare’s Time (Princeton UP, 1986) • Gerard Eades Bentley, The Profession of Player in Shakespeare’s Time (Princeton UP, 1986) • John Jones, Shakespeare at Work (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1995) • Orgel Stephen, ‘What is a Text?’ Research Opportunities in Renaissance Drama, 24 (1981), 3-6 • Stephen Orgel, ‘Acting Scripts, Performing Texts’, in Crisis in Editing ed. Randall McLeod (New York: AMS Press, 1994), 251-94 • Tiffany Stern, Making Shakespeare (London: Routledge, 2004) • Tiffany Stern, Documents of Performance in Early Modern England (Cambridge: CUP, 2009) • Gary Taylor, ‘Revising Shakespeare’, TEXT, 3 (1997), 285-304 • Bart van Es, Shakespeare in Company (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013) • Andrew Gurr, The Shakespearean Stage, 1574-1642, 4th edition (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009)

Week 1: Change at one Playhouse: Dr Faustus at the Rose

Philip Henslowe, who was financially responsible for the Admiral’s Men at the Rose theatre, and whose son-in-law Edward Alleyn was his theatre’s lead actor, has left telling contextual documents about early modern theatre. Using a play for which Henslowe paid for writing, props and revisions, Christopher Marlowe’s Dr Faustus, we will consider what contextual documents can reveal about plays. Questions raised in the class include: 1) What do financial lists reveal about the theatrical process, and what do they hide? 2) What do Henslowe’s diary entries tell us about collaboration and can you trace the result in the two versions of Dr Faustus? 3) How does knowing more about Edward Alleyn affect our reading of Faustus (in one or other form)? 4) How can prop and costume lists help us analyze Dr Faustus? 5) How does the date of publication of the A and B texts of Dr Faustus modify our knowledge of the play’s

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 101 of 246

relationship to Henslowe? 6) What does Dr Faustus tells us about Marlowe’s agency and identity as an author?

Primary Texts

Faustus: Facsimile • 1604 http://eebo.chadwyck.com/search/full_rec?SOURCE=pgimages.cfg&ACTION=ByID&ID=V20862

• 1616 http://eebo.chadwyck.com/search/full_rec?SOURCE=pgimages.cfg&ACTION=ByID &ID=V21791

Faustus Editions

• Christopher Marlowe, Doctor Faustus A- and B-texts (1604, 1616): Christopher Marlowe and his Collaborator and Revisers ed. David Bevington and Eric Rasmussen (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1993) • W. W. Greg, Marlowe’s Doctor Faustus 1604-1616. Parallel texts (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1950)

Henslowe Facsimile

Henslowe-Alleyn Digitisation Project: http://www.henslowe-alleyn.org.uk/index.html

Henslowe Editions

• R. A. Foakes, ed., Henslowe’s Diary, 2nd edition (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002) • W. W. Greg, ed., Henslowe Papers: being Documents Supplementary to Henslowe's Diary (London: A. H. Bullen, 1907)

Secondary Reading:

• S. P. Cerasano, ‘Henslowe’s “Curious” Diary’, Medieval and Renaissance Drama in England, 17, (2005), 72-85 • S. P. Cerasano, ‘Philip Henslowe, Simon Forman, and the Theatrical Community of the 1590s’, Shakespeare Quarterly, 44 (1993), 145-158 • Natasha Korda, ‘Household Property/Stage Property: Henslowe as Pawnbroker’, Theatre Journal, 48 (1996), 185-195 • Fredson Bowers, ‘Marlowe's "Doctor Faustus": The 1602 Additions’, Studies in Bibliography, 26 (1973), 1-18 • Eric Rasmussen, ‘Rehabilitating the A-Text of Marlowe's "Doctor Faustus"’, Studies in Bibliography, 46, (1993), 221-238

Presentations

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 102 of 246

Presentation 1: Give an account of the two texts of Faustus (A and B) and theories about their relationship to each other, etc. Use the introduction to Christopher Marlowe, Doctor Faustus, A- and B- Texts (1604, 1616), ed. David Bevington and Eric Rasmussen, Revels (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1993) as a source.

Presentation 2: Give an account of Henslowe’s ‘diary’: how it’s structured, what kind of information it contains, what we can learn from it, etc. Use S. P. Cerasano, ‘Henslowe's ‘Curious’ Diary’, Medieval and Renaissance Drama in England 17, (2005), 72-85 and R. A. Foakes, ed., Henslowe’s Diary, 2nd edition (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002) as sources.

Week 2: Change: The Malcontent at St Paul’s and the Globe; Orlando Furioso in ‘Part’ and Printed Play

This week we’ll compare printed texts of John Marston’s The Malcontent. It was published three times in 1604, once in earlier form and twice in revised form including additions and a new induction by John Webster. Feel free to read the play in a modern edited edition – but be sure to look at both versions of the text on EEBO. We’ll be thinking, this week about the extent to which a play should be thought of as a unified entity. Some scholars, notably Tiffany Stern, have argued that early modern plays should instead be thought of as assemblages of discrete objects, including actor’s parts, backstage plots, songs, and prologues. For this reason we’ll also look at the one surviving manuscript ‘part’ from the early modern professional theatre: the part of Orlando. I will give out handouts that set the manuscript part alongside the printed text of that play. Questions for discussion in the class might include: 1) What do the two versions of The Malcontent, and the information from Orlando Furioso, tell us about revision? 2) What do the two version of The Malcontent tell us about collaboration? 3) How do actor’s parts relate conceptually to whole plays? 4) How might variant texts complicate our dating of plays? 5) What impact did performance venue have on the shape of a play? 6) How did political censorship work?

Primary Texts

Facsimiles on EEBO http://eebo.chadwyck.com/search/full_rec?SOURCE=pgthumbs.cfg&ACTION=ByID&ID=99847541&FIL E=../session/1367442916_12017&SEARCHSCREEN=CITATIONS&SEARCHCONFIG=var_spell.cfg&DISPL AY=AUTHOR http://eebo.chadwyck.com/search/full_rec?SOURCE=pgimages.cfg&ACTION=ByID&ID=99847546&FILE =../session/1367442916_12017&SEARCHSCREEN=CITATIONS&VID=12583&PAGENO=3&ZOOM=&VI EWPORT=&SEARCHCONFIG=var_spell.cfg&DISPLAY=AUTHOR&HIGHLIGHT_KEYWORD=

Editions

• John Marston, The Malcontent, ed. George K. Hunter, Revels (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1999)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 103 of 246

• John Marston, The Malcontent, ed. W. David Kay for New Mermaids (London: A and C Black, 1998)

Secondary Reading

• Charles Cathcart, ‘John Marston, "The Malcontent", and the King's Men’, Review of English Studies, 57 (2006), 43-63 • Kevin A. Quarmby, ‘The Malcontent: a Play in Two Forms’, in The Disguised Ruler in Shakespeare and his Contemporaries (Surrey: Ashgate, 2012) • Kiernan Ryan, ‘The Malcontent: hunting the letter’ in The Drama of John Marston: Critical Re- Visions ed. T. F. Wharton, T. F. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000) • Tiffany Stern, ‘Introduction’, ‘The approved ‘book’ and ‘actors’ parts’ in Documents of Performance (Cambridge: CUP, 2009) • Akihiro Yamada, Q1-3 of The Malcontent, 1604, and the Compositors (Tokyo: Kinokuniya, 1980)

Presentations

Presentation 1: give an overview of the likely textual history of The Malcontent based on the textual introduction in John Marston, The Malcontent, ed. by George K. Hunter, Revels (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1999)

Presentation 2: present the counter-case to the consensus on The Malcontent based on Charles Cathcart, ‘The Malcontent and the King’s Men’, Review of English Studies 57 (2006), 43-63

Week 3: Co-Authorship and Attribution: The Book of Sir Thomas More and Two Noble Kinsmen

Work this week will focus on a play manuscript, The Book of Sir Thomas More, which directly features the hands of several playwrights – perhaps including Shakespeare – as well as theatrical personnel and scribes. We will consider the play in facsimile and will ask what editors have made of it. Alongside, Sir Thomas More we will look at another, later, example of co-authorship in Shakespeare and Fletcher’s Two Noble Kinsmen, which was excluded from the 1623 First Folio of Shakespeare’s plays and was published independently as a quarto in 1634. Questions we will consider include the following: 1) What does Sir Thomas More reveal about theatrical revision? 2) What do the contrasting examples of Sir Thomas More and Two Noble Kinsmen tell us about the varieties of co-authorship for the early modern stage? 3) How certain can we be about authorial attribution? 4) What are the responsibilities of a modern editor when presenting a co-authored play? 5) What part does commerce play in co-authorship, both in the early modern theatre and in the present-day publishing world?

Primary Texts

Facsimiles

• The Book of Sir Thomas Moore ed. John S. Farmer, Tudor Facsimile Texts, folio Series (1910; repr. New York, 1970) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 104 of 246

• The Book of Sir Thomas More, ed. W. W. Greg for the Malone Society (Oxford, 1911) repr with supplement by Harold Jenkins (1961)

Editions

• Anthony Munday and others, Sir Thomas More, ed. by Vittorio Gabrieli and Giorgio Melchiori, Revels Plays (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1988) • Sir Thomas More, ed. John Jowett for Arden Shakespeare (London: Methuen, 2011) • Sir Thomas More, ed. Gerard B. Wegemer and Stephen W. Smith in A Thomas More soure Book (Washington, DC, 2004), 66-156

Secondary Reading

• Michael A. Anderegg, ‘The Book of Sir Thomas More and its Sources’, Moreana, 14 (1977), 57-62 • Grace Ioppolo, Dramatists and Their Manuscripts in the Age of Shakespeare, Jonson, Middleton and Heywood: Authorship, Authority, and the Playhouse (London: Routledge, 2006), pp. 55-60 • John Jones, ‘The One Manuscript: Sir Thomas More’ in Shakespeare at Work (Oxford: OUP, 1995) • John Jowett, ‘Addressing Adaptation: Measure for Measure and Sir Thomas More’ in Textual Performances ed. Lukas Erne and M. J. Kidnie (2004) • Scott McMillin, The Elizabethan Theatre and the Book of Sir Thomas More (Ithaca and London: Cornell UP, 1997) • Eric Rasmussen, ‘Setting down what the Clown Spoke: Improvisation, Hand B and the Book of Sir Thomas More’, The Library, 6th series, 13 (1991), 126-36 • Jeffrey Masten, Textual Intercourse: Collaboration, Authorship, and Sexualities in Renaissance Drama (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997)

Presentations

Presentation 1: describe the text of Sir Thomas More as presented by Vittorio Gabrieli and Georgio Melchiori, Revels Plays (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1988) with special attention to its claims on dating

Presentation 2: describe the text of Sir Thomas More as presented by John Jowett, Arden Shakespeare (London: Cengage, 2011)

Presentation 3: Give an introduction to the 1623 Quarto text of The Two Noble Kinsmen, jointly attributed to Fletcher and Shakespeare. On theories of the division of labour use Lois Potter, ed., The Two Noble Kinsmen, Arden3 (London: Cengage, 1997), pp. 16-34.

Week 4: Repertory: Poetaster and the Poet’s War

The question of whether acting companies and playhouses had distinctive repertories has been a hot issue in theatre studies in recent years. On the one hand, scholars such as Scott McMillin and Sally-Beth MacLean (in The Queen’s Men and their Plays) have argued that particular troupes can be identified with a M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 105 of 246

defined style of dramaturgy (in the Queen’s Men’s case with ‘medley’ composition). On the other hand, theatre historians have also questioned the notion that certain companies were distinct in being more elite than others, with Henslowe’s practice in particular being ‘rescued’ from an earlier image of penny-pinching populism. Roslyn Knutson’s The Repertory of Shakespeare’s Company is an example of this kind of work. The Poet’s War (a literary quarrel involving Jonson, Marston, Dekker, and multiple playhouses that played out in the early years of the seventeenth century) is a good case study through which to explore debates about repertory. Jonson’s Poetaster, which played a part in that quarrel, is especially enlightening because it represents the world of Elizabethan playhouse rivalry (through the thin veil of a an ancient Roman setting). Questions this week include 1) were the children’s companies distinct in their repertory? 2) how easy is it to establish the repertory of an adult troupe? 3) how did the repertory of the Chamberlain’s Men change in response to competition? 4) can we distinguish between the audiences of particular playhouses? 5) how helpful are descriptive terms such as ‘elite’, ‘popular’, and ‘satirical’ when it comes to repertories and plays?

Secondary Reading

• Scott McMillin and Sally-Beth MacLean, The Queen’s Men and their Plays (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998) • Roslyn Knutson, The Repertory of Shakespeare’s Company, 1594-1613 (Fayetteville: University of Arkansas Press, 1991) • Roslyn Knutson, ‘What if there wasn’t a ‘Blackfriars Repertory’?’, in Paul Menzer, ed., Inside Shakespeare: Essays on the Blackfriars Stage (Selinsgrove, PA: Susquehanna University Press, 2006), 54-60. • Bart van Es, ‘Shakespeare versus Blackfriars: Satiric Comedy, Domestic Tragedy, and the Boy actor in Othello’, in Childhood, Education, and the Stage in Early Modern England, ed. Richard Preiss and Deanne Williams (CUP, 2017) • Andrew Gurr, Playgoing in Shakespeare’s London, 2nd edition (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996) • James P. Bednarz, Shakespeare and the Poets’ War (New York: Columbia University Press, 2001)

Presentation 1: Present the case against the existence of a serious War of the Theatres based especially on the work of Roslyn Lander Knutson. Concentrate on ‘Histrio-Mastix and Company Commerce’, in Knutson’s Playing Companies and Commerce in Shakespeare’s Time (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001), pp. 75-102.

Presentation 2: Present the case for the existence of a serious War of the Theatres based on the work of James P. Bednarz. Concentrate on Bednarz’s attempt to refute Knutson’s attack on him in Bednarz ‘Writing and Revenge: John Marston’s Histriomastix’, Comparative Drama 36 (2002), 21-51.

Week 5: Actors: Hamlet and the Profession of Player

Alongside repertory, the distinctive identity of individual actors has also become more important in early modern theatre history. Stars such as Robert Armin, Will Kemp, Richard Burbage, Edward Alleyn, and Richard Tarlton can all be shown to have had a significant influence on the plays in which they appeared

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 106 of 246

and it is possible to establish quite substantial biographies for them. Beyond this, the relationship between actors and dramatists is also an important issue in book history and the history of authorship. The question of whether an ‘actorly’ oral theatrical tradition stood in contradistinction to an emergent author function in drama is very much up for debate. Hamlet, in its three early texts (Q1, Q2, and F), has been central to discussion of these questions. It was a vehicle for the Chamberlain’s lead actor Richard Burbage (whose later roles sometimes referred back explicitly to the Prince of Denmark). It was also, many have agued, a play that was made possible by Will Kemp’s departure from the company. In numerous works of ‘authorship studies’ the play-making prince is understood as a proxy for the author himself and as an expression of his new level of textual control. Hamlet, with its travelling players and with its hero’s ‘antic disposition’, gives access to a broad span of early modern acting styles. Questions for discussion include the following: 1) Did the power of actors stand in opposition to the power of playwrights? 2) Can we speak of developments in acting style during this period? 3) In what ways can knowledge of the original cast change our interpretation of specific plays? 4) Is Shakespeare’s position as actor-dramatist unique?

Secondary Reading

• David Wiles, Shakespeare’s Clown: Actor and Text in the Elizabethan Playhouse (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1987) • Richard Preiss, Clowning and Authorship in Early Modern Theatre (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2014) • S. P. Cerasano, ‘Edward Alleyn, the New Model Actor, and the Rise of Celebrity in the 1590s’, Medieval and Renaissance Drama in England 18 (2005), 47-58 • ‘The Actors’ in Simon Palfrey and Tiffany Stern, Shakespeare in Parts (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007) • ‘Control over Casting’, ‘Robert Armin’, and ‘Richard Burbage’ in Bart van Es, Shakespeare in Company (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013) • ‘Bad Taste and Bad Hamlet’ in Leah S. Marcus, Unediting the Renaissance (London: Routledge, 1996) • Jeffrey Knapp, Shakespeare Only (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2009) • Patrick Cheney, Shakespeare: National Poet-Playwright (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2004)

Presentation 1: Present the case for Hamlet as an author-centred play, concentrating on ‘Chapter 2: The Author Staged,’ in Jeffrey Knapp, Shakespeare Only (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2009)

Presentation 2: Present the case for Hamlet as an actor-centred play, concentrating on ‘Chapter 11: Richard Burbage,’ in Bart van Es, Shakespeare in Company (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013)

Week 6: Shakespeare’s Texts and the New of Theatre History

In this final class we’ll be looking at the nature and status of the surviving texts of Shakespeare’s plays and the way they are presented in current editions and scholarship. We will evaluate the New Bibliography

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 107 of 246

pursued by W. W. Greg and others in the first half of the twentieth century and at the reaction against it, for example in Wells and Taylor’s Oxford Complete Works of 1986. In addition, we will discuss two current trends in scholarship. The first of these trends is a new emphasis on attribution, where scholars claim, on the one hand, to have discovered the presence of other writers in canonical plays such as Henry VI Part I, Titus Andronicus, Pericles, and Macbeth and, on the other, to have discovered proof that Shakespeare wrote parts of non-canonical plays such as Edward III, Arden of Faversham, The Spanish Tragedy, and Double Falsehood. This trend is strongly in evidence in the 2016 New Oxford Shakespeare, edited by Gary Taylor, John Jowett, Terri Bourus and Gabriel Egan and it has been contested by Tiffany Stern. The second trend is the emergence of a concept of Shakespeare as a ‘Literary Dramatist’ (i.e. as someone interested in promoting his own position as a poet-playwright through print). That position is most obviously tied to Lukas Erne, but others such as Patrick Cheney and Jeffrey Knapp have also made much of this idea.

Questions this week will reflect back on the term in totality. How does knowledge of the documents of theatre history help us to evaluate these positions? In what ways should the documents of theatre history influence editing practice today? What are the standards of ‘proof’ and ‘reasonable doubt’ in theatre history? How far and how positively has the discipline evolved since the days of Greg?

Primary Text

The First Folio of Shakespeare’s Works (1623), ideally in the Norton edition edited by Hinman. Obviously you do not need to read the work in its entirety, but it would be good to look carefully at the presentation of the plays and also at the introductory material, both the introduction to Norton edition and the prefatory material to the 1623 text itself.

Secondary Reading

• W. W. Greg, ‘The Rationale of Copy Text’, Studies in Bibliography 3 (1951-2), 19-36. Sums up the key methods of the New Bibliography. • Lukas Erne, Shakespeare and the Book Trade (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013) • David Carnegie and Gary Taylor, eds, The Quest for Cardenio: Shakespeare, Fletcher, and the Lost Play (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2012) • John Jowett, ‘Varieties of Collaboration in Shakespeare’s Problem Plays and Late Plays’, in A Companion to Shakespeare’s Works, ed. by Richard Dutton and Jean E. Howard (Malden, MA: Blackwell, 2006), 106-128 • Gary Taylor and John Jowett, Shakespeare Reshaped: 1606-1623 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1993) • Hugh Craig and Arthur F. Kinney, eds, Shakespeare, Computers, and the Mystery of Authorship (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009) • Brian Vickers, Shakespeare, Co-Author: A Historical Study of Five Collaborative Plays (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002) • Jeffrey Masten, Textual Intercourse: Collaboration, Authorship, and Sexualities in Renaissance Drama (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 108 of 246

Presentations:

Presentation 1: Give an analysis of the influence of Gary Taylor and the Oxford edition of the Complete Works (1986). Sources might include Andrew Murphy, ‘The Oxford Shakespeare Re-viewed (Again)’, Text 16 (2006), 157-71, and Thomas Middleton, Collected Works, ed. Gary Taylor and John Lavagnino (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 2007), which includes Macbeth.

Presentation 2: Present the case for scepticism about stylometrics as used by Taylor and others. Concentrate on Tiffany Stern, ‘Some Forgery of Some Modern Author?’ Theobold’s Shakespeare and Cardenio’s Double Falsehood,’ Shakespeare Quarterly 62 (2011), 555-93.

Presentation 3: Provide a summary of the case made by Lukas Erne, Shakespeare as Literary Dramatist (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 109 of 246

Milton and the Philosophers Dr Noël Sugimura, St John’s College

Michaelmas Term, 2018

This M.St. option is designed for graduate students interested in reading and reflecting on the intersection of philosophy and literature in Milton’s poetry, particularly in his magnificent epic poem, Paradise Lost. Although the title of this option is ‘Milton and Philosophy’, the term ‘philosophy’ is used heuristically: we will explore what it means for a poem to be ‘philosophical’, and how different modes of philosophic discourse are present in, or emergent from, Milton’s poetry. In this context, the term, ‘philosophy’, will be opened up to include a range of ‘philosophies’ or philosophical commitments (ontological, epistemological, etc), many of which may seem at odds with one another. A previous knowledge of Milton is recommended, though no previous knowledge of philosophy is necessary. The course presumes that you will have read Milton’s Paradise Lost in its entirety over the long vacation, including also his Masque (aka Comus), Paradise Regained, and Samson Agonistes. One substantial aim of this M.St option is to integrate close readings of the poetry with an understanding of Milton’s own historical, political, philosophical, and theological engagements. The result is that primary readings are drawn from Milton’s oeuvre as well as major philosophical works (classical as well as early modern). Secondary literature includes seminal studies by historians, philosophers, and literary critics, all of which are meant to present you with a variety of critical approaches to Milton. I ask that you assess what purchase each of these theories has on Milton’s poetry, including its limitations (if any). Participation in class discussion is mandatory and will revolve around the ‘focus questions’ for each week (given at the end of the reading list under the week in question) or from our in-class presentations (to be assigned). Please note that the primary reading and recommendations for supplementary reading are given under the week in which those texts will be discussed in class.

Course Outline and Reading List

Recommended Texts

For the primary readings in Milton, I would ask that you bring the physical book to class. Recommended editions for Milton’s Comus, Paradise Lost, Paradise Regained, and Samson Agonistes are either The Complete Poems, ed. John Leonard (Penguin, 1999) OR Paradise Lost, ed. Alastair Fowler (2nd edition; Routledge, 2006) and The Complete Shorter Poems (2nd edition; Routledge, 2006).

Milton’s prose works are available in the Complete Prose Works of John Milton, gen. ed. D. M. Wolfe (New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1953-). Please note that these volumes are gradually being superseded by the more recent Oxford editions (volumes 2 and 7 will be of particular interest to you in this course).

For readings in Aristotle, I recommend The Works of Aristotle, tr. W. D. Ross (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1905-52). As with the other classical texts on this list, the Loeb editions will suffice as well.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 110 of 246

For readings in Augustine, a good edition is the City of God, ed. G. R. Evans (Penguin, 2004) or, alternatively, the Loeb edition.

Weekly Assignments

Week 1: Comus: Philosophy, Rhetoric, and Poetry

Primary Reading

Milton, Comus: A Masque Presented at Ludlow Castle. Please also read:

• Aristotle, Rhetoric, I. 3 [forms of rhetoric] and I. 9 – I.15 • Cicero, De Oratore book 1 (on rhetoric and pathos). • Plato, Gorgias – in its entirety. • Warren Chernaik, Milton and the Burden of Freedom (Cambridge UP, 2017), chapter 3, pp.61-85. • Amélie Oksenberg Rorty, ‘Structuring Rhetoric’, in Essays on Aristotle’s Rhetoric, ed. Amélie Oksenberg Rorty (Berkeley/London, 1993), pp. 1-33 – a good introduction to rhetoric and Aristotle’s view of it and his legacy.

Suggested Reading:

• W. W. Fortenbaugh, Aristotle on Emotion (1975; London, 2002). • Bryan Garsten, Saving Persuasion: A Defense of Rhetoric and Judgment (Cambridge, MA, 2006) pp.1-23 (intro) and ch.1 (on Hobbes). • Victoria Kahn, Machiavellian Rhetoric: from the Counter-Reformation to Milton (Princeton, 1994) pp.185-208 (ch. 7 is on Comus; ch. 8 on PL). • Barbara Keifer Lewalski, Paradise Lost and the Rhetoric of Literary Forms (Princeton, 1985) – especially good for looking forward to PL. • --. ‘Milton’s Comus and the Politics of Masquing’, in The Politics of the Stuart Court Masque, ed. David Bevington and Peter Holbrook (Cambridge, 1998) pp.296-320 – see the entire collection for more on the tradition, structure, and politics of the masque as a genre. • Long, ‘Cicero’s Plato and Aristotle’, in From Epicurus to Epictetus: Studies in Hellenistic and Roman Philosophy (Oxford, 2006) – available also online through Oxford Scholarship Online. • William Pallister, Between Worlds: The Rhetorical Universe of Paradise Lost (Toronto, 2008), especially chapters 1 and 4. • Quintilian, Institutio Oratoria [Institutes of Oratory] – again, the Loeb edition is very good or the text on Perseus (online). It’s worth reading books 1, 2, and 8-10. • Eckart Schütrumpf, ‘ No-logical Means of Persuasion in Aristotle’ Rhetoric and Cicero’s De oratore, in Peripatetic Rhetoric after Aristotle, ed. William W Fortenbaugh and David C. Mirhady (New Brunswick, NJ/London, 1994) pp.95-110.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 111 of 246

• Robert Wardy, The Birth of Rhetoric: Gorgias, Plato, and their Successors (Routledge, 1996).

*We will return to discuss rhetoric in week 5 in the context of Paradise Regained, so it’s worth reading ahead in some of these texts!

Focus question for class: ‘What impressed me most deeply about Plato in that book [the Gorgias] was, that it was when making fun of orators that he himself seemed to me to be the consummate orator.’ (Cicero, De oratore I.xi.47 [Loeb, 1942], pp.35-37.). To what extent can the same assessment be made about Milton’s treatment of Comus in the genre of the masque?

Week 2 Theodicy and Aetiology in Paradise Lost

Primary Reading

As you will have read all of Paradise Lost over the long vacation, please reread books 1-3 and book 9 for our class in this week (week 2). Please also read:

• Aristotle, Metaphysics V.2 and Physics II.3 (on the four causes). • Augustine, City of God book xi, chapters 14-15; book xii, chapters 1, 3, and 7; book xiv, chapters 3, 11-19. • Warren Chernaik, ‘Introduction’, Milton and the Burden of Freedom (Cambridge UP, 2017), pp.1- 20 -- read this as one introduction to Milton’s religious politics and his prose works alongside the poetry. • Dennis Danielson, “The Fall and Milton’s Theodicy’, in The Cambridge Companion to Milton (Cambridge UP, 1999) – also available online (online publication May 2006). • Harold Skulsky, Milton and the Death of Man, pp. 13-55 (God's Attorney: Narrative as Argument’).

Suggested Reading:

• John Carey, ‘Milton’s Satan’, in Cambridge Companion to Milton, ed. Dennis Danielson (Cambridge, 1999) pp.160-74; available also through the Cambridge Companions Online. • Dennis Danielson, Milton’s Good God: A Study in Literary Theodicy (Cambridge UP, 1982). • William Empson, Milton’s God (Chatto & Windus, 1961). • Neil Forsyth, ‘The English Church’, in Milton in Context, ed. Stephen Dobranski (Cambridge UP, 2015) pp.292-304. • C. S. Lewis, Preface to Paradise Lost (Oxford, 1942). • Robert Pasnau, Metaphysical Themes, 1274–1671 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 2011) – especially helpful for an understanding of Aristotle’s four ‘causes’ and their history.

NB: A handy introduction to Aristotelian causation is also available in the online Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy: https://plato.stanford.edu/entries/aristotle-causality/

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 112 of 246

Class Discussions on the ‘origins’ of the Fall: one part of the class will present on and engage in a critique of John S. Tanner, “’Say First What Cause’,” PMLA 103.1 (1988): 1-45 (available through JSTOR), while the other half of the class will examine and assess William Poole’s account in chapter 1: “Causality of Wickedness,” in Idea of the Fall [available also by PDF for distribution via email]. The merits/demerits of each approach along with your own critical contributions with regard to how you understand Milton’s account of the Fall will focus our class discussion.

Week 3 Ontology and Narrative: Chaos and Creation

Primary Reading

PL, books 5-7; re-read PL 2.890-967, and PL 3.705-35. Please also read:

• Aristotle Rhetoric, III, ch. 11. • Lucretius, De Rerum Natura (DRN), i.1-858, 921-1117; ii.1-181, 541-99, 1023-1175; iii.1-71, 98-109; iv.722-823. • Augustine, City of God, bk xi, ch. 17, 18, 22, 23; bk xii, ch. 4 and bk xiii, ch. 24 (creation of humankind). • Stephen Fallon, Milton among the Philosophers, chapter 3 (‘Material Life: Milton’s Animist Materialism’), pp.79-110. • David Bentley Hart, The Hidden and the Manifest in Theology and Metaphysics (Grand Rapids, MI: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co, 2017), chapter 11 (‘Matter, Monism, and Narrative: Essays on the Metaphysics of Paradise Lost’).** • William Kolbrener, Milton’s Warring Angels, pp.89-98 (on ‘monism and dualism’); optional reading on pp.98-105. • Christopher Lüthy and William Newman, ‘“Matter” and “Form”: By Way of a Preface’, Early Science and Medicine 2.3 (1997): 215-226. • John Rogers, The Matter of Revolution, chapter 1 (‘The Power of Matter’ and ‘The Vitalist Movement’, pp.8-16 and chapter 4 (‘Chaos, Creation, and the Political Science of PL’), pp.103- 30. • Regina Schwartz, Remembering and Repeating (Chicago/London, 1988), ‘Preface, Intro, and Ch. 1’, xi-39. • Ann Thomson, ‘Mechanistic Materialism vs Vitalistic Materialism’ in Mécanisme et vitalisme, ed. Mariana Saad, La lettre de la Maison française d’Oxford 14 (Oxford: Maison française d’Oxford, 2001) pp.22–36.

**Our focus question for this week will take for its starting point this essay, so please read it with care.

Suggested Reading

• Noel Malcolm, Aspects of Hobbes (Oxford, 2004) – especially ch. 5 (and discussion of Hobbes and metaphysics). M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 113 of 246

• John Milton, Of Christian Doctrine, in The Complete Works of John Milton, Vol. 8: De Doctrina Christiana, ed. John K. Hale and J. Donald Cullington (Oxford, 2012); also available online (published 2013) at: http://www.oxfordscholarlyeditions.com/view/10.1093/actrade/9780199651900.book.1/actr ade-9780199651900-book-1. See especially the chapters on God, Creation, etc. • Phillip J. Donnelly, Milton’s Scriptural Reasoning: Narrative and Protestant Toleration (Cambridge UP, 2009), especially pp.1-72. • Robert Pasnau, Metaphysical Themes, 1274–1671 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 2011) – especially helpful for discussions of form and matter in the early modern period. • Lynn S. Joy, ‘Scientific Explanation: Formal Causes to Laws of Nature’, in The Cambridge History of Science: Vol. 3, Early Modern Science, ed. Katharine Park and Lorraine Daston (Cambridge, 2003) pp. 70-105.

Focus Question: To what extent do you agree with D. Bentley Hart’s reading of Milton’s metaphysic in Paradise Lost? Explain. Ground your discussion in close readings of the poetry as well as your understanding of the poetry’s philosophical and/or theological commitments.

Week 4 Milton’s Metaphysics of Desire: The Nature of the Passions and Experience in Paradise Lost

Primary Reading

Reread with care PL, books 1, 2, 4, 8-10 and Milton, Doctrine of Discipline and Divorce, especially book 1 (read with care chapters ii and ch. xiii). Please also read:

• Augustine, City of God, bk xi, ch. 26-28 (on love and knowledge) and bk xiv, chapters 10, 23-24, 26-27 (on the passions in a prelapsarian and postlapsarian world); and a short excerpt from On Music 6, 2.3 – 13.38 in Greek and Roman Aesthetics, tr. and ed. Oleg V. Bychkov and Anne Sheppard (Cambridge, 2010), pp.206-18 [also available for distribution via email]. • Lucretius, DRN iv. 473-521, 1049-1208. • Plotinus, excerpts from the Enneads I.6.1-9, 5.8.1-2, 6.7.22.24-26, 6.731-33, in Greek and Roman Aesthetics, tr. and ed. Oleg V. Bychkov and Anne Sheppard (Cambridge, 2010), pp.185- 200 [also available for distribution via email]. • Peter Dear, ‘The Meanings of Experience’, in The Cambridge History of Science: Vol. 3, Early Modern Science, ed. Katharine Park and Lorraine Daston (Cambridge UP, 2003) pp.106-31. • Maggie Kilgour, Milton and the Metamorphosis of Ovid (Oxford UP, 2012) pp.229-72. • Michael Schoenfeldt, ‘“Commotion Strange”: Passion in Paradise Lost’, in Reading the Early Modern Passions: Essays in the Cultural History of Emotion, ed. Gail Kern Paster, Katherine Rowe, and Mary Floyd-Wilson (Philadelphia, PA: Univ of PA Press, 2004) pp.43-68. • Harold Skulsky, Chapter 3 (‘The Creator Defended’), in Milton and the Death of Man, pp. 114- 171.

Suggested Reading M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 114 of 246

• Aristotle, Rhetoric book I, chapters 1-2 (on rhetoric and character); Rhetoric book II, chapters 2- 4, 5, and 7-11 and Aristotle’s Poetics, chapters 9, 13-14 – these will help you to reflect on how the relationships between the passions/pathos and ethos in relation to moral philosophy and rhetoric. • Descartes, Les Passions de L’Âme (1649), or Passions of the Soul [especially article 70 on ‘wonder’]. A good translation of this text is available in The Philosophical Writings [of Descartes], ed. J. Cottingham, R. Steinhoff, D. Murdoch, and A. Kenny, 3 voles (Cambridge, 1985-1991). • Plato, Phaedrus and the Symposium (on Eros). • Katharine Park and Lorraine Daston, ‘Introduction: The Age of the New’, in The Cambridge History of Science: Vol. 3, Early Modern Science, ed. Katharine Park and Lorraine Daston (Cambridge, 2003) pp.1-17 – good introduction to the ‘new science’.

Focus Question: Aristotle begins his Metaphysics (I.2.982b) by observing, ‘For it is owing to their wonder that men both now begin and at first began to philosophize; they wondered originally at the obvious difficulties, then advanced, little by little, and stated difficulties about the greater matters’ (tr. W. D. Ross). To what extent is Aristotle’s claim--which has its origins in Plato (Theaetetus 155d)—equally applicable to Milton’s descriptions of wonder/admiration in Paradise Lost? What does one wonder at, and what other passions (if any) can it arouse?

Week 5 Satanic or Christian Liberty? Reading the Political Theology of Paradise Lost

Primary Reading

PL, books 1-2, 10-12 and all of Paradise Regained (books 1-4) and Milton, Doctrine and Discipline of Divorce book 2, ch. 3. Please also read:

• Augustine, City of God, bk. xiii, ch. 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14-15, 16; bk xiv, chapters 1-9, 11, 15-19, 21 (and reread) 24 and 26; and bk. xxii, ch. 30; and also Augustine, ‘On Free Choice of the Will’ 2.11.31-16.43, in Greek and Roman Aesthetics, tr. and ed. Oleg V. Bychkov and Anne Sheppard (Cambridge, 2010) pp.227-30. • Lucretius, DRN, ii. 251-443. • Warren Chernaik, Milton and the Burden of Freedom (Cambridge UP, 2017) chapter 3 (‘“Providence Thir Guide”: Providence in Milton’), pp.39-60; chapter 6 (‘Monarchy and Servitude: The Politics of Paradise Lost’), pp.124-42; and chapter 7 (‘God’s Just Yoke: Power and Justice in Paradise Lost’) pp.143-71. • Filippo Falcone, Milton’s Inward Liberty (James Clarke & Co Ltd, 2014), chapter 4 (‘Satan’s inward prison’) and chapter 5 (‘Christian liberty in Adam and Eve’). • Benjamin Meyers, chapter 1 (‘The Theology of Freedom: A Short History’), in Milton’s Theology of Freedom (/Boston: De Gruyter, 2006) pp.15-52 and chapter 2 (‘The Satanic Theology of Freedom’) pp.53-71. [Also available on ProQuest ebrary].

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 115 of 246

Suggested Reading

• Juliet Cummins, “New Heavens, New Earth,” Milton and the Ends of Time (ch. 10) – on eschatology. • Stephen Fallon, Milton’s Peculiar Grace: Self-Representation and Authority (Ithaca, NY: Cornell UP, 2007) especially chapters 5, 7-9. • Phillip Donnelly, Scriptural Reading, chapter 9 (‘Paradise Regained as rule of charity), pp.188-200. • William Empson, Milton’s God, chapters 2 (‘Satan’) and 3 (‘Heaven’). • Stanley Fish, ‘Things and Actions Indifferent: The Temptation of Paradise Regained,’ Milton Studies (1983): 163-85, reprinted in How Milton Works (Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 2001), pp.349- 90. • Northrop Frye, “The Typology of Paradise Regained,” Modern Philology 53.4 (1956): 227-38. • Barbara Lewalski, Milton’s Brief Epic: The Genre, Meaning, and Art of Paradise Regained (Providence, RI: Brown UP, 1966) – a classic study of PR. • Peter Mack, History of Renaissance Rhetoric, 1380-1620 (Oxford, 2011) – gives you the broad sweep for background reading with admirable detail. • David Norbrook, Writing the English Republic: Poetry, Rhetoric, and Politics, 1627-1660 (Cambridge UP, 1999). • William Poole, Milton and the Fall, chapter 4 (‘The Heterodox Fall’), pp.58-83. • David Armitage, Armand Himy, and (eds), Milton and Republicanism (Cambridge UP, 1995; 1998) – a seminal collection of essays on this topic. • William Walker, ‘Milton’s Dualistic Theory of Religious Toleration in “A Treatise of Civil Power”, “Of Christian Doctrine” and “Paradise Lost”’, Modern Philology 99.2 (2001): 201–230.

Focus Question: In your own reading, what type(s) of liberty does Milton’s epic champion? Explain with reference to at least two arguments drawn from the secondary literature.

Week 6 From Paradise Regained to Samson Agonistes: Wrath Returned

Primary Reading

Milton, Samson Agonistes. Please also read:

• Warren Chernaik, Burden of Freedom, chapter 8, pp.181-205. • Phillip Donnelly, Scriptural Reasoning, chapter 10 (‘Samson Agonistes as personal drama’), pp.201- 27. • Stephen Fallon, Milton’s Peculiar Grace, chapter 9 (‘“I as All Others”: Paradise Regained and Samson Agonistes’), pp.237-64. • Noam Reisner, Milton and the Ineffable, chapter 5 (‘Paradise Regained and Samson Agonistes: the ineffable self’), pp.234-81.

Suggested Reading M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 116 of 246

Please see the bibliography handed out in class.

Class Presentation: Please choose one aspect of the reading for this week--or, alternatively, from a text listed on the bibliography--and show how your own reading of Samson Agonistes makes an intervention in the field (i.e. by expanding on the critical work with which it is engaged; by disagreeing with it; etc).

Shakespeare, History, and Politics Professor Paulina Kewes Jesus College MSt C-course MT2018

Weds of weeks 1-6, 5pm, TE Lawrence Rm, Jesus

The purpose of this course is to explore the politics of Shakespeare’s histories, Roman plays and tragedies written during the Elizabethan fin de siècle. These works were the product of a climate of uncertainty, political and economic crisis, religious dissension, and international and domestic discord. By summoning the history of medieval England and Denmark and of ancient Rome, Shakespeare engaged, however obliquely, with the pressing issues of the day: the unresolved succession and the concomitant fears of civil war, resistance, usurpation, and royal despotism.

The topical appeal of the plays did not stop them from being hailed by later generations as timeless literary masterpieces. In terms of their political philosophy, they have been variously read as defences of divine-right kingship and as endorsements of republicanism, as exhortations to obedience and as apologies for resistance, as assertions of the royal prerogative and as affirmations of the liberty of the subject. They have also been viewed as complex meditations on the nature of power and personal freedom that cannot be reduced to simple statements of political principle. We shall assess the validity of these contradictory approaches by discussing in detail Shakespeare’s treatment of rulers and the ruled in a variety of historical and geographical settings and socio-political spheres: the state, the nation, and the family. We shall not, however, study Shakespeare in isolation: rather, our aim will be to locate his writings in the context that produced them. This is why we shall read them alongside a range of works by his contemporaries: other playwrights and poets, divines, pamphleteers, polemicists, historians, and political figures.

The course will address the following questions: Where does Shakespeare locate the source of political authority in the state? What is the relationship between politics and religion? How does the rise of tyranny, whether political, parental, or marital, shape the application of abstract ideals to present action? Does Shakespeare’s attitude to the acquisition and exercise of political power change by the time he comes to write Hamlet(s)? How far does textual variation reveal the political significance of his plays? In what ways does he modify his use of language and dramatic means of expression to deal with a variety of political issues? What are the points of contact between the works of Shakespeare and the more explicitly polemical writings of his contemporaries? M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 117 of 246

1. David and Batsheba, Titus Andronicus and the Principles of Succession

Supplementary reading: Peter Wentworth, Pithie Exhortation (c. 1587-93); Robert Southwell, S.J., An humble supplication to her Maiestie (c. 1592); Robert Persons, S.J., Newes from Spayne and Holland (1593)

Secondary reading

• Collinson, Patrick, ‘The Religious Factor’, in Jean-Christophe Mayer (ed.), The Struggle for the Succession in Late Elizabethan England: Politics, Polemics and Cultural Representations (Montpellier: Astraea Collection, 2004), pp. 243-73. • Chernaik, Warren, The Myth of Rome in Shakespeare and his Contemporaries (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2011). • Doran, Susan, ‘Elizabeth: An Old Testament King’, in Tudor Queenship: The Reigns of Mary and Elizabeth, ed. Anna Whitelock and Alice Hunt (Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2010), pp. 95-110. • ----- and Paulina Kewes (eds), Doubtful and Dangerous: The Question of Succession in Late Elizabethan England (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2014). • Hadfield, Andrew, Shakespeare and Republicanism (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005). • Hammond, Paul, ‘Shakespeare as Collaborator: The Case of Titus Andronicus’, in Collaboration and Interdisciplinarity in the Republic of Letters: Essays in honour of Richard G. Maber, ed. Paul Scott (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2010), pp. 195-210. • Hunter, G. K., ‘A Roman Thought: Renaissance Attitudes to History Exemplified in Shakespeare and Jonson’, in An English Miscellany Presented to W. S. Mackie, ed. Brian S. Lee (Cape Town, 1977), 93-118. • Hutson, Lorna, The Invention of Suspicion: Law and Mimesis in Shakespeare and Renaissance Drama (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007). • Jackson, Macdonald P., ‘Stage Directions and Speech Headings in Act I of Titus Andronicus Q (1594): Shakespeare or Peele?’, Studies in Bibliography 49 (1996), 134–48. • ----- Defining Shakespeare: ‘Pericles’ as a Test Case (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2003), 195–203. • James, Heather, Shakespeare’s Troy: Drama, Politics, and the Translation of Empire (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997). • Kewes, Paulina, '"I ask your voices and your suffrages": The Bogus Rome of Peele and Shakespeare’s Titus Andronicus’, The Review of Politics, 78 (2016), 551-70. • ----- ‘The Puritan, the Jesuit, and the Jacobean Succession’, in Susan Doran and Paulina Kewes (eds), Doubtful and Dangerous: The Question of Succession in Late Elizabethan England (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2014), pp. 47-70. • ----- ‘Romans in the Mirror’, in Mirror for Magistrates in Context: Literature, History and Politics before the Age of Shakespeare, ed. Harriet Archer and Andrew Hadfield (Cambridge University Press, 2016), 126-46. M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 118 of 246

• Lake, Peter, ‘Tragedy and Religion: Religion and Revenge in Titus Andronicus and Hamlet’, in The Oxford Handbook of Shakespearean Tragedy, ed. Michael Neill and David Schalkwyk (OUP, 2016). • ----- How Shakespeare Put Politics on the Stage: Power and Succession in the History Plays (Yale UP, 2016). • ------Bad Queen Bess?: Libels, Secret Histories, and the Politics of Publicity in the Reign of Queen Elizabeth I (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016). • Manley, Lawrence and Sally-Beth MacLean, Lord Strange’s Men and Their Plays (New Haven, CT and London: Yale University Press, 2014). • Nelson, Eric, ‘Shakespeare and the Best State of a Commonwealth’, in David Armitage, Conal Condren and Andrew Fitzmaurice (eds), Shakespeare and Early Modern Political Thought (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009). • Worden, Blair, ‘Republicanism, Regicide and Republic: The English Experience’, in Republicanism: A Shared European Heritage, vol. I: Republicanism and Constitutionalism in Early Modern Europe, ed. Martin van Gelderen and Quentin Skinner (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002), pp. 307-27. • Vickers, Brian, Shakespeare, Co-author: A Historical Study of Five Collaborative Plays (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002), 169–80.

2. The Troublesome Raigne of King John, King John and the Rhetoric of Anti-Popery

Supplementary reading: accounts of King John in Foxe’s Actes and Monuments (1583) and Holinshed’s Chronicles (1587); William Allen, Admonition to the Nobility and People of England and Ireland (1588) & A Declaration of the Sentence and Deposition of Elizabeth, the Vsurper and Pretensed Quene of Englande.

NB Please use George Peele, The Troublesome Reign of John, King of England (c. 1589-90), ed. Charles Forker (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2011).

Secondary reading:

• Axton, The Queen’s Two Bodies: Drama and the Elizabethan Succession (London: Royal Historical Society, 1977). • Freeman, Thomas S. ‘John Bale’s Book of Martyrs?: The Account of King John in Acts and Monuments’, Reformation, 3 (1998), 175-223. • ----- and Susannah Brietz Monta, ‘Holinshed and Foxe’, in in The Oxford Handbook of Holinshed's Chronicles, ed. Paulina Kewes, Ian W. Archer, and Felicity Heal (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013), pp. 217-33. • Highley, Christopher, Catholics Writing the Nation in Early Modern Britain and Ireland (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008). • Hillman, Richard, Shakespeare, Marlowe and the Politics of France (Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2002). • Holmes, Peter, Resistance and Compromise: The Political Thought of the Elizabethan Catholics (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1982).

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 119 of 246

• Kewes, Paulina, 'History Plays and the Royal Succession', in The Oxford Handbook of Holinshed's Chronicles, ed. Paulina Kewes, Ian W. Archer, and Felicity Heal (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013), pp. 493-509. • Lake, Peter, How Shakespeare Put Politics on the Stage: Power and Succession in the History Plays (Yale UP, 2016). • ----- ‘Anti-Popery: The Structure of a Prejudice’, in Conflict in Early Stuart England: Studies in Religion and Politics 1603-1642, ed. Richard Cust and Ann Hughes (Harlow: Longman, 1989), pp. 72-106. • ----- ‘The Politics of “Popularity” and the Public Sphere: The “Monarchical Republic” of Elizabeth I Defends Itself’, in Peter Lake and Steven Pincus (eds), The Public Sphere in Early Modern England (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2007), pp. 59-94. • ----- Bad Queen Bess?: Libels, Secret Histories, and the Politics of Publicity in the Reign of Queen Elizabeth I (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016). • Lane, Robert, ‘The Sequence of Posterity: King John and the Problem of Succession’, Studies in Philology, 92 (1995), 460-81. • Mayer, Jean-Christophe, Shakespeare’s Hybrid Faith: History, Religion, and the Stage (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006). • Womersley, David, Divinity and State (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2010). • Vickers, Brian, ‘The Troublesome Raigne, George Peele, and the Date of King John’, in Words That Count: Essays on Early Modern Authorship in Honor of MacDonald P. Jackson, ed. Brian Boyd (Newark: University of Delaware Press, 2004), pp. 78-116.

3. Richard II and Persons’s Conference about the Next Succession to the Crowne of Ingland (1595): Resistance and Election

Supplementary reading: account of Richard II’s fall and Henry IV’s rise in Holinshed, Chronicles (1587); John Hayward, The First Part of the Life and Raigne of King Henrie IIII (1599): speeches by the Archbishop of Canterbury and the Bishop of Carlisle)

Secondary reading:

• Clegg, Cyndia, '"By the Choise and Inuitation of al the Realme": Richard II and Elizabethan Press Censorship', Shakespeare Quarterly, 48 (1997), 432-48. • ----- Shakespeare’s Reading Audiences (CUP, 2017): ‘Reading Politics : History, Richard II, and the Public Sphere’. • Doran, Susan, and Paulina Kewes (eds), Doubtful and Dangerous: The Question of Succession in Late Elizabethan England (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2014). • Gajda, Alexandra, ‘Political Culture in the 1590s: The ‘Second Reign’ of Elizabeth’, History Compass, 8/1 (2010), 88-100. • ----- The Earl of Essex and Late Elizabethan Political Culture (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2012).

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 120 of 246

• Hadfield, Andrew, Shakespeare and Republicanism (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005). • Hammer, Paul, ‘Shakespeare’s Richard II, the Play of 7 February 1601, and the Essex Rising’, Shakespeare Quarterly, 59 (2008), 1-35. • Houliston, Victor, ‘The Hare and the Drum: Robert Persons’s Writings on the English Succession, 1593-1596’, Renaissance Studies, 14 (2000), 233-48 • ----- Catholic Resistance in Elizabethan England: Robert Persons’s Jesuit Polemic, 1580-1610 (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2007). • Kewes, Paulina, ‘Narrative Historiography and the Rules of Succession’, The Holinshed Project website, http://www.cems.ox.ac.uk/holinshed/paper1.pdf. • ----- 'Marlowe, History, and Politics', in Christopher Marlowe in Context, ed. Emily Bartels and Emma Smith (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013), pp. 138-54. • Kingdon, Robert M., ‘Calvinism and Resistance Theory, 1550-1580’, in The Cambridge History of Political Thought, 1450-1700, ed. J. H. Burns and Mark Goldie (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991), pp. 193-218. • Lake, Peter, How Shakespeare Put Politics on the Stage: Power and Succession in the History Plays (Yale UP, 2016). • ----- Bad Queen Bess?: Libels, Secret Histories, and the Politics of Publicity in the Reign of Queen Elizabeth I (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016). • ----- 'The King, (the Queen) and the Jesuit: James Stuart's True Law of Free Monarchies in Context/s', TRHS, 6th series, 14 (2004), 243-60. • Levy, F. J., 'Hayward, Daniel and the Beginnings of Politic Historiography', Huntington Library Quarterly, 50 (1987), 1-34. • Mayer, Jean-Christophe, Shakespeare’s Hybrid Faith: History, Religion, and the Stage (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006). • Salmon, J. H. M, ‘Catholic Resistance Theory, Ultramontanism, and the Royalist Response, 1580- 1620’, in J. H. Burns and Mark Goldie, eds, The Cambridge History of Political Thought, 1450- 1700 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991), pp. 219-53. • Smith, Emma, ‘Richard II’s Yorkist Editors’, Shakespeare Survey, 63 (2010): Shakespeare’s English Histories and their Afterlives, ed. Peter Holland. • Worden, Blair, ‘Which Play was Performed at the Globe Theatre on 7 February 1601?’, London Review of Books, 25: 13 (2003), pp. 22-4.

4. Julius Caesar, Sejanus and the Fall of the (Monarchical) Republic

Supplementary reading: Thomas Lodge, The Wounds of Civil War; Henry Savile, The Ende of Nero and the beginning of Galba; Sir Thomas Smith, De republica Anglorum (extracts).

Secondary sources:

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 121 of 246

• Buckley, Emma, ‘Drama in the Margins – Academic Text and Political Context in Matthew Gwinne’s Nero: Nova Tragædia (1603) and Ben Jonson’s Sejanus (1603/5)’, Renaissance Studies, 30 (2016), 602-22. • Burgess, Glenn, Rowland Wymer, and Jason Lawrence (eds), The Accession of James I: Historical and Cultural Consequences (Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2006), pp. 113-39. • Chernaik, Warren, The Myth of Rome in Shakespeare and his Contemporaries (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2011). • Collinson, Patrick, ‘The Monarchical Republic of Queen Elizabeth I’, in Elizabethan Essays (London: Hambledon Press, 1994), pp. 31-56, repr. in John Guy (ed.), The Tudor Monarchy (London: Arnold, 1997), pp. 110-34. • Doran, Susan and Paulina Kewes, ‘The Earlier Elizabethan Succession Question Revisited’, in Susan Doran and Paulina Kewes (eds), Doubtful and Dangerous: The Question of Succession in Late Elizabethan England (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2014), pp. 20-44. • Gajda, Alexandra, ‘Political Culture in the 1590s: The ‘Second Reign’ of Elizabeth’, History Compass, 8/1 (2010), 88-100. • ----- The Earl of Essex and Late Elizabethan Political Culture (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2012). • Hadfield, Andrew, Shakespeare and Republicanism (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005). • Hopkins, Lisa, The Cultural Uses of the Caesars on the English Renaissance Stage (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2008). • Kewes, Paulina, 'Henry Savile's Tacitus and the Politics of Roman History in Late Elizabethan England', Huntington Library Quarterly, 74: 4 (2011), 515-51. • ----- '"A fit memoriall for the times to come...": Admonition and Topical Application in Mary Sidney's Antonius and Samuel Daniel's Cleopatra', Review of English Studies, 63 (2012), 243-64. • ----- 'Julius Caesar in Jacobean England', The Seventeenth Century, 17 (2002), 155-86. • ----- ‘Roman History, Essex, and Late Elizabethan Political Culture’, in The Oxford Handbook of the Age of Shakespeare, ed. R. Malcolm Smuts (Oxford University Press, 2016), 250-68. • ----- ‘Romans in the Mirror’, in Mirror for Magistrates in Context: Literature, History and Politics before the Age of Shakespeare, ed. Harriet Archer and Andrew Hadfield (Cambridge University Press, 2016), 126-46. • Lake, Peter, How Shakespeare Put Politics on the Stage: Power and Succession in the History Plays (Yale UP, 2016). • ----- ‘Shakespeare's Julius Caesar and the Search for a Usable (Christian?) Past’, in Shakespeare and Early Modern Religion, ed. David Loewenstein and Michael Witmore (CUP, 2015). • ----- ‘From Leicester his Commonwealth to Sejanus his fall: Ben Jonson and the Politics of Roman (Catholic) Virtue’, in Ethan H. Shagan (ed.), Catholics and the ‘Protestant nation’: Religious Politics and Identity in Early Modern England (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2005). • ----- ‘“The Monarchical Republic of Elizabeth I” Revisited (by its Victims) as a Conspiracy’, in Barry Coward and Julian Swann (eds), Conspiracies and Conspiracy Theory in Early Modern Europe: From the Waldensians to the French Revolution (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2004), pp. 87-111.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 122 of 246

• ----- ‘“The Monarchical Republic of Queen Elizabeth I” (and the Fall of Archbishop Grindal) Revisited’, in John F. McDiarmid (ed.), The Monarchical Republic of Early Modern England: Essays in Response to Patrick Collinson (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2007), pp. 129-48. • ---- ‘The Politics of “Popularity” and the Public Sphere: The “Monarchical Republic” of Elizabeth I Defends Itself’, in Peter Lake and Steven Pincus (eds), The Public Sphere in Early Modern England (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2007), pp. 59-94. • ----- ‘Ben Jonson and the Politics of “Conversion”: Catiline and the Relocation of Roman (Catholic) Virtue’, The Ben Jonson Journal, 19.2 (2012), 163-89. • McDiarmid, John F. (ed.), The Monarchical Republic of Early Modern England: Essays in Response to Patrick Collinson (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2007). • Miola, Robert, 'Julius Caesar and the Tyrannicide Debate', Renaissance Quarterly, 39 (1985), 271- 89. • Shapiro, James, 1599: A Year in the Life of William Shakespeare (London: Faber and Faber, 2005). • Sanders, Julie (ed.), Ben Jonson in Context (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2010). • Worden, Blair, 'Ben Jonson among the Historians', in Kevin Sharpe and Peter Lake (eds), Culture and Politics in Early Stuart England (Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1994), pp. 67-89. • ----- 'Ben Jonson and the Monarchy', in Robin Headlam Wells, Glenn Burgess, and Rowland Wymer (eds), Neo-Historicism: Studies in Renaissance Literature, History and Politics (Cambridge: D. S. Brewer, 2000), pp. 71-90.

5. Hamlet(s) and the Jacobean Succession

Supplementary reading: Daniel Rogers, ‘A discourse touching ye present estate and gouuernement of the kingdomes of Denmarke and Norwegen, with a description of the said realmes, and Dominions appertayninge vnto them. written in September, Anno 1588’, in Diplomatic Intelligence on the Holy Roman Empire and Denmark during the Reigns of Elizabeth I and James VI, ed. David Gehring, Royal Historical Society, Camden Fifth Series, 49 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2016); Peter Wentworth, Discourse of the True Successor; Sir John Harington, Tract on the Succession (extracts); Correspondence of King James VI of Scotland with Sir Robert Cecil and Others in England (selected letters).

NB It’s important to consider the question of succession in relation to the dating and textual differences between Q1, Q2, and F1. See Introduction to Hamlet, ed. Ann Thompson and Neil Taylor (London: Arden Shakespeare, 2006), pp. 74 passim; Terri Bourus, Young Shakespeare’s Young Hamlet; Richard Dutton, Hamlet and Succession’; Kewes, ‘Hamlet and the Jacobean Succession’, Stuarts on Line: https://vimeo.com/160789348.

For a modern edition which allows easy comparison of the three versions, see The Three-text Hamlet: Parallel Texts of the First and Second Quartos and First Folio, ed. Bernice W. Kliman and Paul Bertram; introd. Eric Rasmussen, 2nd rev. & expanded edn. (New York: AMS Press, 2003).

Secondary sources: M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 123 of 246

• Bourus, Terri, Young Shakespeare’s Young Hamlet: Print, Piracy, and Performance (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2014). • Doran, Susan, ‘Loving and Affectionate Cousins? The Relationship between Elizabeth I and James VI of Scotland 1586-1603’, in Tudor England and its Neighbours, ed. Susan Doran and Glenn Richardson (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2005), pp. 203-34. • ----- ‘James VI and the English Succession’, in Ralph Houlbrooke (ed.), James VI and I: Ideas, Authority and Government (Ashgate, 2006). • ----- and Paulina Kewes (eds), Doubtful and Dangerous: The Question of Succession in Late Elizabethan England (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2014). • de Grazia, Margreta,‘Hamlet’ without Hamlet (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007). • Dutton, Richard, ‘Hamlet and Succession’, in Doubtful and Dangerous: The Question of Succession in Late Elizabethan England, ed. Susan Doran and Paulina Kewes (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2014), pp. 173-91. • ----- Shakespeare, Court Dramatist (OUP, 2016). • de Grazia, Margreta,‘Hamlet’ without Hamlet (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007). • Fitzmaurice, Andrew, ‘The Corruption of Hamlet’, in David Armitage, Conal Condren and Andrew Fitzmaurice (eds), Shakespeare and Early Modern Political Thought (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009). • Greenblatt, Stephen, Hamlet in Purgatory (Princeton, 2001). • Hadfield, Andrew, ‘The Power and Rights of the Crown in Hamlet and King Lear: “The King-the King’s to Blame”’, Review of English Studies, 54 (2003), 566-86. • Hirrel, Michael J., ‘Duration of Performance and Lengths of Plays: How Shall We Beguile the Lazy Time?’, Shakespeare Quarterly, 61 (2010), 159-82: shows that Q2 could have been technically performed in toto. • ----- ‘When Did Gabriel Harvey Write His Famous Note?’, Huntington Library Quarterly, 75 (2012), 291-99. • Jolly, Margrethe, ‘Hamlet and the French Connection: The Relationship of Q1 and Q2 Hamlet and the evidence of Belleforest’s Histoires Tragiques’, Parergon, 29 (2013), 83-105: shows that Q1 is closer to Belleforest than Q2 and F1. • Kiséry, András, Hamlet's Moment: Drama and Political Knowledge in Early Modern England (OUP, 2016). • Knutson, Roslyn Lander, Playing Companies and Commerce in Shakespeare’s Time (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001). • Kurland, Stuart M., ‘Hamlet and the Stuart Succession?’, SEL 34 (1994), 279-300. • Lake, Peter, ‘Tragedy and Religion: Religion and Revenge in Titus Andronicus and Hamlet’, in The Oxford Handbook of Shakespearean Tragedy, ed. Michael Neill and David Schalkwyk (OUP, 2016). • ----- How Shakespeare Put Politics on the Stage: Power and Succession in the History Plays (Yale UP, 2016). • ----- Bad Queen Bess?: Libels, Secret Histories, and the Politics of Publicity in the Reign of Queen Elizabeth I (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016).

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 124 of 246

• Lesser, Zachary, ‘Hamlet’ After Q1: An Uncanny History of the Shakespearean Text (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2014): a pretentious study exploring the impact of the discovery of Q1 in C19. • ----- and Peter Stallybrass, ‘The First Literary Hamlet and the Commonplacing of Professional Plays’, Shakespeare Quarterly, 59 (2008), 371-420. • Loewenstein, David and Michael Witmore (eds), Shakespeare and Early Modern Religion (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2015): the chapters by Felicity Heal and Peter Marshall give an excellent a/c of the confessional context. • Long, Zackariah C., ‘The Spanish Tragedy and Hamlet: Infernal Memory in English Renaissance Revenge Tragedy’, ELR 44 (2014). • Mallin, Eric, Inscribing the Time: Shakespeare and the End of Elizabethan England (Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1995). • McCullough, Peter, ‘Christmas at Elsinore’, Essays in Criticism, 58 (2008), 311-32. • Petersen, Lene B., Shakespeare's Errant Texts: Textual Form and Linguistic Style in Shakespearean 'Bad' Quartos and Co-authored Plays (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2010). • Scott Kastan, David, A Will to Believe: Shakespeare and Religion (Oxford, 2014). • Shapiro, James, 1599: A Year in the Life of William Shakespeare (London: Faber and Faber, 2005). • Skinner, Quentin, Forensic Shakespeare, Clarendon Lectures in English (Oxford, 2014). • Smith, Emma, ‘Ghost Writing: Hamlet and the Ur-Hamlet’ in The Renaissance Text ed. Andrew Murphy (Manchester University Press, 2000). • Stafford, Helen Georgia, James VI of Scotland and the Throne of England (New York and London: D. Appleton-Century Company Inc., 1940). • Stern, Tiffany, ‘Sermons, Plays and Note-Takers: Hamlet Q1 as a “Noted” Text’, Shakespeare Survey, 66: Working with Shakespeare, ed. Peter Holland (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013), pp. 1-23: unpersuasive revival of the theory of reporting by audience members. • Vickers, Brian, ‘The Authentic and Inauthentic Hamlet’, Editionen in der Kritik, 2 (2008), 15-42: an unreconstructed but pungent take on recent approaches to Hamlets. • Werstine, Paul, Early Modern Playhouse Manuscripts and the Editing of Shakespeare (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2012). • Worden, Blair, ‘Shakespeare and Politics’, Shakespeare Survey, 44 (1992), 1-15.

6. Macbeth, Conspiracy, and King-killing: A View from Scotland

Supplementary reading: Holinshed, Chronicles; The Earl of Gowries Conspiracie Against the Kings Majestie of Scotland (1600); Sir William Alexander, A Short Discourse of the Good Ends of the Higher Providence, in the late attempt against his Majesties Person (1600) and Darius (1602); Joseph Hall, The Kings Prophecie; or, Weeping Ioy (1603); The Whole Prophesie of Scotland, England, and Some-Part of France, and Denmark, Henry Garnet, A Treatise of Equivocation, ed. D. Jardine (London, 1851)

Secondary Reading:

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 125 of 246

• Alker, Sharon, and Holly Faith Nelson, ‘Macbeth, the Jacobean Scot, and the Politics of the Union’, Studies in English Literature, 47 (2007), 379-401. • Barmazel, Julie, ‘“The servant to defect”: Macbeth, Impotence, and the Body Politic’, Macbeth: New Critical Essays, ed. Nick Moschovakis (London: Routledge, 2008), pp. 118-31. • Berry, Philippa, ‘Reversing History: Time, Fortune and the Doubling of Sovereignty in Macbeth’, European Journal of English Studies, 1 (1997), 367-87. • Bindoff, S. T., ‘The Stuarts and their Style’, English Historical Review, 60 (1945), 192-216. • Edwards, Francis. The Succession, Bye and Main Plots of 1601-1603 (Dublin, 2006). • Hawkins, Michael, ‘History, Politics and Macbeth’ in Focus on Macbeth, ed. John Russell Brown (London: Routledge, 2005). • Herman, Peter C., ‘Macbeth: Absolutism, the Ancient Constitution, and the Aporia of Politics’, in The Law in Shakespeare, ed. by Constance Jordan and Karen Cunningham (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2010), pp. 208-32. • Jennings, Emily, ‘Prophetic Rhetoric in the Early Stuart Period’ (unpub. Oxford DPhil thesis, 2015). • Kernan, Alvin, Shakespeare, the King’s Playwright: Theatre in the Stuart Court, 1603-1613 (New Haven: Yale UP, 1995). • Kinney, Arthur F., Lies Like Truth: Shakespeare, ‘Macbeth’, and the Cultural Moment (Detroit: Wayne State University Press, 2001), • Kozikowski, Stanley, ‘The Gowrie Conspiracy Against James VI: A New Source for Shakespeare's Macbeth’, Shakespeare Studies, 13 (1980). • Lake, Peter, How Shakespeare Put Politics On The Stage: Power and Succession in the History Plays (New Haven: Yale UP, 2016). • Lemon, Rebecca, ‘Scaffolds of Treason in Macbeth’, Theatre Journal, 54 (2002). • Murphy, Erin, Familial Forms: Politics and Genealogy in Seventeenth-Century English Literature (Newark: Delaware UP, 2011). • Nenner, Howard, The Right to be King: The Succession to the Crown of England, 1603-1714 (Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1995). • Nicholls, Mark, ‘Treason’s reward: The Punishment of Conspirators in the Bye Plot of 1603, HJ, 38 (1995), 821-42. • Norbrook, David, ‘Macbeth and the Politics of Historiography’, in Politics of Discourse: The Literature and History of Seventeenth-Century England, ed. Kevin Sharpe and Steven N. Zwicker (Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1987), 78-116. • Paul, Henry J., The Royal Play of Macbeth: When, Why, And How It Was Written By Shakespeare (New York: Macmillan, 1950). • Shapiro, James, 1606: William Shakespeare and the year of Lear (London: Faber & Faber, 2016). • Shell, Alison, Catholicism, Controversy and the English Literary Imagination, 1558-1660 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999). • Smuts, R. Malcolm, ‘Banquo’s Progeny: Hereditary Monarchy, the Stuart Lineage and Macbeth’, in James Dutcher and Ann Lake Prescott, eds., Renaissance Historicisms: Essays in Honor of Arthur F. Kinney (University of Delaware Press, 2008), 225-46. • ----- ‘James I and the Consolidation of British Monarchy’ in The Oxford Handbook of the Age of Shakespeare, ed. Malcolm Smuts (Oxford: OUP, 2016). M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 126 of 246

• Tutino, Stefania, ‘Nothing But the Truth? Hermeneutics and Morality in the Doctrines of Equivocation and Mental Reservation in Early Modern Europe’, Renaissance Quarterly, 64 (2011), 115-55. • Ward, Ian, ‘Terrorists and Equivocators’, in Shakespeare and the Law, ed. by Paul Raffield and Gary Watt (Oxford: Hart, 2008), pp. 185-202

Parliamentary proceedings, royal proclamations & correspondence

• Elizabeth I, Queen of England, The Letters of Queen Elizabeth and King James VI of Scotland, ed. John Bruce (London: Camden Society, 1849). • ----- The Letters of Queen Elizabeth, ed. G. B. Harrison, (2nd edn., New York: Funk and Wagnalls, 1968). • James VI and I, Correspondence of King James VI. of Scotland with Sir Robert Cecil and Others in England, during the Reign of Queen Elizabeth. With an Appendix Containing Papers Illustrative of Transactions between King James and Robert, Earl of Essex, ed. John Bruce, Camden Society 78 (London, 1861). • ---- Letters of King James VI & I, ed. G. P. V. Akrigg (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984). • ----- The Political Works of James I Reprinted from the Edition of 1616, ed. Charles Howard McIlwain, Harvard Political Classics, vol.1 (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1918). • ----- Political Writings, ed. Johann P. Sommerville (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994). • ---- The secret correspondence of Sir Robert Cecil with James VI. King of Scotland (London, 1766). • Proceedings in the Parliaments of Elizabeth I, ed. T. E. Hartley, 3 vols (London: Leicester University Press, 1981-95). • Prothero, G. W., ed. Select Statutes and Other Constitutional Documents, 3th edn, (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1906). • Stuart Royal Proclamations, ed. James F. Larkin and Paul L. Hughes, 2 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1973). • Tudor Royal Proclamations, ed. Paul L. Hughes and James F. Larkin, 3 vols (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1964-69).

Secondary sources: drama, history, and politics

• Bevington, David, Tudor Drama and Politics: A Critical Approach to Topical Meaning (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1968) • Burgess, Glenn, ‘Becoming English? Becoming British? The Political Thought of James VI & I Before and After 1603’, in Jean-Christophe Mayer (ed.), The Struggle for the Succession in Late Elizabethan England: Politics, Polemics and Cultural Representations (Montpellier: Astraea Collection, 2004), pp. 143-75

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 127 of 246

• Clegg, Cyndia Susan, ‘“By the Choise and Inuitation of al the Realme”: Richard II and Elizabethan Press Censorship’, Shakespeare Quarterly, 48 (1997), 432-48 • Collinson, Patrick, ‘The Monarchical Republic of Queen Elizabeth I’, in Elizabethan Essays (London: Hambledon Press, 1994), pp. 31-56, repr. in John Guy (ed.), The Tudor Monarchy (London: Arnold, 1997), pp. 110-34 • ----- De Republica Anglorum Or, History with the Politics Put Back: Inaugural Lecture delivered 9 November 1989 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990) • ----- ‘The Elizabethan Exclusion Crisis and the Elizabethan Polity’, Proceedings of the British Academy, 84 (1993), pp. 51-92 • ----- ‘The Religious Factor’, in Jean-Christophe Mayer (ed.), The Struggle for the Succession in Late Elizabethan England: Politics, Polemics and Cultural Representations (Montpellier: Astraea Collection, 2004), pp. 243-73 • Doran, Susan, ‘Revenge her Foul and Most Unnatural Murder? The Impact of Mary Stewart’s Execution on Anglo-Scottish Relations’, History, 85 (2000), 589-612 • ---- ‘Loving and Affectionate Cousins? The Relationship between Elizabeth I and James VI of Scotland 1586-1603’, in Tudor England and its Neighbours, ed. Susan Doran and Glenn Richardson (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2005), pp. 203-34 • ----- ‘Three Late-Elizabethan Succession Tracts’, in Jean-Christophe Mayer (ed.), The Struggle for the Succession in Late Elizabethan England: Politics, Polemics and Cultural Representations (Montpellier: Astraea Collection, 2004), pp. 100-117. • ----- ‘James VI and the English Succession’, forthcoming • Dutton, Richard, ‘The Dating and Contexts of Shakespeare’s Henry V’, in Paulina Kewes (ed.), The Uses of History in Early Modern England (San Marino: The Huntington Library Press, 2006) • Hadfield, Andrew, Shakespeare and Republicanism (CUP, 2005) • Hurstfield, Joel, ‘The Succession Struggle in Late Elizabethan England’, in id., Freedom, Corruption and Government in Elizabethan England (London: Cape, 1973), pp. 104-34 • Kewes, Paulina, '"I ask your voices and your suffrages": The Bogus Rome of Peele and Shakespeare’s Titus Andronicus’, The Review of Politics, 78: 4 (2016), 551-70 • ----- 'History Plays and the Royal Succession', in The Oxford Handbook of Holinshed's Chronicles, ed. Paulina Kewes, Ian W. Archer, and Felicity Heal (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013), pp. 493-509 • -----‘The Elizabethan History Play: A True Genre?’, in A Companion to Shakespeare’s Works, vol. II: The Histories, ed. Richard Dutton and Jean E. Howard (Oxford: Blackwell, 2003), pp. 170-93 • ----- ‘Narrative Historiography and the Rules of Succession’, The Holinshed Project website, http://www.cems.ox.ac.uk/holinshed/paper1.pdf • ----- 'Marlowe, History, and Politics', in Christopher Marlowe in Context, ed. Emily Bartels and Emma Smith (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013), pp. 138-54 • Knowles, Ronald, ‘The Political Contexts of Deposition and Election in Edward II’, Medieval and Renaissance Drama in England, 14 (2001), 105-21 • Lake, Peter, ‘Tragedy and Religion: Religion and Revenge in Titus Andronicus and Hamlet’, in The Oxford Handbook of Shakespearean Tragedy, ed. Michael Neill and David Schalkwyk (OUP, 2016).

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 128 of 246

• ----- How Shakespeare Put Politics on the Stage: Power and Succession in the History Plays (Yale UP, 2016) • ----- Bad Queen Bess?: Libels, Secret Histories, and the Politics of Publicity in the Reign of Queen Elizabeth I (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016) • Mayer, Jean-Christophe (ed.), The Struggle for the Succession in Late Elizabethan England: Politics, Polemics and Cultural Representations (Montpellier: Astraea Collection, 2004), • McLaren, Anne N., Political Culture in the Reign of Elizabeth I: Queen and Commonwealth, 1558- 1585 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999) • ----- ‘The Quest for a King: Gender, Marriage, and Succession in Elizabethan England’, Journal of British Studies, xli (2002), 259-90 • Skinner, Quentin, Foundations of Modern Political Thought • Tyacke, Nicholas, ‘Puritan Politicians and King James VI and I, 1587-1604’, in Thomas Cogswell, Richard Cust, and Peter Lake (eds), Politics, Religion and Popularity in Early Stuart Britain: Essays in Honour of Conrad Russell (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002), pp. 21-44 • Nenner, Howard, The Right to be King: The Succession to the Crown of England, 1603-1714 (Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1995)

Wordsworth and Coleridge 1797-1817

The course examines several major episodes in the creative partnership of Wordsworth and Coleridge. Both poets were drawn to explore the resources that ‘conversation’ or the ‘conversational’ might offer for poetry; and their example exemplifies the point that, properly understood, ‘conversation’ need not imply anything like straight-forward agreement. This course offers an opportunity to study the ways in which works of imagination can arise from conversation – from mutual exchange and principled disagreement -- and in doing so invites students to question the validity of popular accounts of romanticism as a coherent theory or even an ‘ideology’. The relationship of Wordsworth and Coleridge produces many poems that stand independently in the greatness of their accomplishment; but those same poems can also be construed as participating within a more encompassing collaborative work. What differences might this make to our understanding of the achievements of both writers? Modern attempts to theorise romanticism mirror ambitions within the poets themselves to think with systematic purpose: Wordsworth and Coleridge both entertained serious philosophical and political pretentions, which overlapped but did not coincide; and they each set themselves (and Coleridge set Wordsworth) to cast those beliefs in verse. What happens to a philosophical belief when it turns into a piece of poetry? Finally, a conversational mode of creativity produces a body of work which is interinanimative and therefore unfixed. Very few of the major poems by either poet stood still; rather, they remained, even after publication, works in process, part of the claimed creative integrity of which lay precisely in that openness to the possibility of renewal and fluidity. How are we to conceptualise works written in such a spirit? (Are other literary works written in such a spirit? Are they all?) Taking into account both the manuscript record and the publication history of these works, how might we present them to a reader in a way which begins to capture the profusion of textual difference which is such an important part of their nature? (This may give students some ideas for their B course essay too.) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 129 of 246

Basic texts

• Coleridge’s Poetry and Prose: Authoritative Texts, Criticism, ed. Nicholas Halmi, Paul Magnuson, and Raimonda Modiano (2004). S.T. Coleridge, Poems, ed. John Beer (Everyman, 1999) • William Wordsworth, Selected Works, ed. Stephen Gill (Twenty-First Century Oxford Authors, 2010). William Wordsworth, The Prelude, ed. Jonathan Wordsworth, M.H. Abrams and Stephen Gill (1979) • William Wordsworth and Samuel Taylor Coleridge, Lyrical Ballads, 1798 and 1802, ed. Fiona Stafford (2013)

Valuable general accounts

• John Beer, ‘How Far Can We Trust Coleridge?’, The Wordsworth Circle 20 (1989), 79-85 • Kelvin Everest, Coleridge’s Secret Ministry: The Context of the Conversation Poems, 1795-1798 (1979) • Paul Magnuson, Coleridge and Wordsworth: A Lyrical Dialogue (1988) • Lucy Newlyn, Coleridge, Wordsworth, and the Language of Allusion (1986) • D. Nuttall, A Common Sky: Philosophy and the Literary Imagination (1974), 92-147 • Michael O’Neill, Romanticism and the Self-Conscious Poem (1997), 25-89 • Adam Potkay, Wordsworth’s Ethics (2012) • Christopher Ricks, ‘William Wordsworth 1’ and ‘William Wordsworth 2’, in The Force of Poetry (1984), 89-116; 117–34 • Leslie Stephen, ‘Wordsworth’s Ethics’, in Hours in a Library (3 vols.; 1876-8), iii.127-78

Recommended biographies • Stephen Gill, Wordsworth: A Life (1989) • Richard Holmes, Coleridge: Early Visions (1989)

Week One: Introduction: The Politics of the Many and the Sublimity of the One

Selections (to be provided) from: Coleridge, Poems on Various Subjects (1796) and Lectures on Revealed Religion (1795); Wordsworth, The Borderers (1796-7). William Paley, The Principles of Moral and Political Philosophy (1785); Richard Price, A Discourse on the Love of our Country (1789); Edmund Burke, Reflections on the Revolution in France (1790); William Godwin, Political Justice (1793; 1796).

• John Bugg, Five Long Winters: The Trials of British Romanticism (2013). • Mary Jacobus, Tradition and Experiment in Wordsworth’s Lyrical Ballads 1798 (1970), 83-103. • Nicholas Roe, Coleridge and Wordsworth: The Radical Years (Oxford, 1988) • Basil Willey, The Eighteenth Century Background (1940), 136-54; 168-204; 205-252; 253- 293. • Jonathan Wordsworth, The Music of Humanity (1969), 184-232. M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 130 of 246

Week Two: 1797: Accounting for Suffering

Coleridge, ‘This Lime-Tree Bower my Prison’, ‘Kubla Khan’; Wordsworth, ‘The Ruined Cottage’, ‘The Old Cumberland Beggar’.

• David Bromwich, Disowned by Memory: Wordsworth’s Poetry of the 1790s (1998) • Mary Jacobus, Tradition and Experiment in Wordsworth’s Lyrical Ballads 1798 (1970), 15-37; 159-83. • David Simpson, Wordsworth, Commodification and Social Concern: The Poetics of Modernity (2009).

Week Three: 1798, 1800: ‘One Work’: Construing and Misconstruing in the Lyrical Ballads

[Anon.], Lyrical Ballads (1798); ‘The Brothers’ and ‘Michael’ from Wordsworth, Lyrical Ballads with other poems (2 vols.; 1800). Coleridge, ‘Christabel’.

• John Beer, Coleridge the Visionary (1959) • Heather Glen, Vision and Disenchantment: Blake’s Songs and Wordsworth’s Lyrical Ballads (1983), 33-56; 224-59 • Mary Jacobus, Tradition and Experiment in Wordsworth’s Lyrical Ballads 1798 (1970), 209-61 • Gregory Leadbetter, Coleridge and the Daemonic Imagination (2011) • Zachary Leader, ‘Lyrical Ballads: The Title Revisited’, in 1800: The New Lyrical Ballads, ed. Nicola Trott and Seamus Perry (2001) • Marjorie Levinson, Wordsworth’s Great Period Poems: Four Essays (1986), 14-57 • Jerome J. McGann, ‘The Ancient Mariner: The Meaning of the Meanings’: The Beauty of Inflexions. Literary Investigations in Historical Method and Theory (1985), 135-72 • Robert Mayo, ‘The Contemporaneity of the Lyrical Ballads’, PMLA 69 (1954), 486-522 • Stephen Maxfield Parrish, ‘The Wordsworth-Coleridge Controversy’, PMLA 73 (1958), 367-374 • Michael O’Neill, ‘Lyrical Ballads and “Pre-Established Codes of Decision”’, in 1800: The New Lyrical Ballads, ed. Nicola Trott and Seamus Perry (2001)

Week Four: The Recluse Project and the Beginnings of The Prelude

Coleridge, ‘Frost at Midnight’; Wordsworth, ‘Was it for this…’ (1798), The Two-Book Prelude (1798-9).

• David Ellis, Wordsworth, Freud and the Spots of Time: Interpretation in 'The Prelude' (1985) • Simon Jarvis, Wordsworth’s Philosophic Song (2009), 1-32 • Kenneth R. Johnston, Wordsworth and The Recluse (1984) • Jonathan Wordsworth, William Wordsworth: The Borders of Vision (1982), 340-77

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 131 of 246

Week Five: The ‘Dejection’ Group: Crisis Writing

Coleridge, ‘Letter to Sara Hutchinson’, ‘Dejection: An Ode’, ‘The Blossoming of the Solitary Date Tree’. Wordsworth, ‘Resolution and Independence’, ‘Ode’, ‘The Solitary Reaper’, ‘Gipsies’, ‘To a Butterfly’, ‘To the Daisy’, ‘Elegiac Stanzas’.

• Oliver Clarkson, ‘Wordsworth’s Lyric Moments (1802), Essays in Criticism 65, 125-43 • George Dekker, Coleridge and the Literature of Sensibility (1978) • Simon Jarvis, Wordsworth’s Philosophic Song (2007), 195-213 • W.W. Robson, ‘Wordsworth’s Resolution and Independence’, in Critical Essays (1966), 124-34 • Gene W. Ruoff, Wordsworth and Coleridge: The Making of the Major Lyrics, 1802-1804 (1989) • Jonathan Wordsworth, William Wordsworth: The Borders of Vision (1982), 149-202

Week Six: Writing Lives

Wordsworth, The Prelude (1805); Coleridge, Biographia Literaria (1817), chapters 1-4, 13-22.

• M.H. Abrams, Natural Supernaturalism: Tradition and Revolution in Romantic Literature (1971), 71-140 • M.H. Abrams, The Mirror and the Lamp: Romantic Theory and the Critical Tradition (1953), 100- 24 • D.M. Fogle, ‘A Compositional History of the Biographia Literaria’, Studies in Bibliography 30 (1977), 219-34 • Stephen Gill, William Wordsworth, The Prelude (1991) • Paul Hamilton, Wordsworth (1986), 75-125 • Geoffrey Hartman, Wordsworth’s Poetry 1787-1814 (1964), 163-259 • Simon Jarvis, Wordsworth’s Philosophic Song (2007), 137-94 • Nigel Leask, The Politics of Imagination in Coleridge’s Critical Thought (1988) • Thomas McFarland, ‘The Origin and Significance of Coleridge’s Theory of Secondary Imagination’, in Originality and Imagination (1985), 90-119 • L.J. Swingle, ‘Wordsworth’s Contrarieties: A Prelude to Wordsworthian Complexity’, ELH 44 (1977), 337-354 • Susan Wolfson, Formal Charges: The Shaping of Poetry in British Romanticism (1997), 100-32 • Jonathan Wordsworth, ‘The Infinite I AM: Coleridge and the Ascent of Being’, in Coleridge’s Imagination: Essays in Memory of Pete Laver, ed. Richard Gravil, Lucy Newlyn, and Nicholas Roe (1985), 22-52

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 132 of 246

Prose Fiction of the Late Eighteenth Century MSt C-course

Dr Freya Johnston

All the novelists included in this course experimented with the formal possibilities of prose fiction, even if not all of them would have agreed that they were writing novels. Imagined reciprocities, alliances, and communities spring into life in their writing—as well as a contrasting tendency to isolation and fragmented subjectivity that has often been noted as characteristic of this period (see, for instance, John Sitter’s Literary Loneliness in Mid-Eighteenth-Century England (1982)). Mid to late eighteenth-century fiction shows a wide variety of approaches to character development and a gradual drift away from the epistolary form popularized by Samuel Richardson and spoofed by Henry Fielding into other familiar and unfamiliar modes. Adult and child audiences of fiction were equally important to writers in this period, when the educational remit as well as the entertainment value of novels came in for increasing attention (and for ridicule). Week by week we will look at eighteenth-century reviews, criticisms, and appreciations of prose fiction as well as discuss examples of how novels work in practice.

It would be very useful for students to have some familiarity with the most influential novelists of the immediately preceding period (Defoe, Swift, Fielding, Richardson). Because the course lasts only six weeks, we will sometimes focus on selections from very long works (Don Quixote, Tristram Shandy); however, it would be a good idea for those planning to attend to read those works in their entirety if they have not already done so.

Week 1.

• Charlotte Lennox, The Female Quixote (1752) • Tobias Smollett, trans., The History and Adventures of the Renowned Don Quixote (1755), vol. 1 • Samuel Johnson, Rambler no. 4 (1752)

Week 2.

• Samuel Johnson, The History of Rasselas, Prince of Abyssinia (1759) and The Fountains (1766) • Hugh Blair, Lecture XXXV: ‘Philosophical Writing—Dialogue—Epistolary Writing—Fictitious History’ (1783)

Week 3.

• Oliver Goldsmith, The Vicar of Wakefield (1766) • Laurence Sterne, The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, Gentleman (1759-67), vols. 1 and 2 (1759) • Vicesimus Knox, ‘On Novel-Reading’ (1778)

Week 4.

• Horace Walpole, The Castle of Otranto, A Gothic Story (1764) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 133 of 246

• Ann Radcliffe, A Sicilian Romance (1790) • J. and A. L. Aikin, ‘On romances’, ‘Against inconsistency in our expectations’, ‘An enquiry into those kinds of distress which excite agreeable sensations’ (1773)

Week 5.

• Tobias Smollett, The Expedition of Humphrey Clinker (1771) • Jane Austen, Lady Susan (c. 1794)

Week 6.

• Jane Austen, Volume the First, Volume the Second (1780s-90s) • [Rudolf Erich von Raspe], Baron Munchausen’s Narrative of his Marvellous Travels and Campaigns in Russia (1785/6)

Primary Reading:

• J. and A. L. Aikin, Miscellaneous Pieces, in Prose (1773) • Jane Austen, Teenage Writings [1780s and 90s], ed. Kathryn Sutherland and Freya Johnston (Oxford World’s Classics, 2017), and Lady Susan (in e.g. Minor Works, ed. R. W. Chapman, and other paperback collections) • Hugh Blair, Lectures on Rhetoric and Belles Lettres (1783) • Oliver Goldsmith, The Vicar of Wakefield [1766], ed. Arthur Friedman and Robert L. Mack (Oxford World’s Classics, 2008) • Samuel Johnson, Rasselas and other tales [1759], ed. Gwin J. Kolb, The Yale Edition of the Works of Samuel Johnson (Yale University Press, 1990) • ------, The Rambler, ed. W. J. Bate and Albrecht B. Strauss, The Yale Edition of the Works of Samuel Johnson (Yale University Press, 1969) • Vicesimus Knox, Essay 14: ‘Of Novel-Reading’, Essays Moral and Literary (1778) • Charlotte Lennox, The Female Quixote, or the Adventures of Arabella [1752], ed. Margaret Dalziel (Oxford World’s Classics, 2008) • Ann Radcliffe, A Sicilian Romance [1790], ed. Alison Milbank (Oxford World’s Classics, 2008) • [Rudolf Erich Raspe,] Baron Munchausen’s Narrative of his Marvellous Travels and Campaigns in Russia (1785 [London] and 1786 [Oxford]: text on Eighteenth-Century Collections Online); there are lots of other print editions with various titles, but please be sure to consult the 1786 one, printed in Oxford. • Tobias Smollett, The Expedition of Humphry Clinker [1771], ed. Lewis M. Knapp and Paul-Gabriel Boucé (Oxford University Press, 2009) • ------, trans., The History and Adventures of the Renowned Don Quixote [1755], ed. Martin C. Battestin and O M Brack Jr. (University of Georgia Press, 2004) • Laurence Sterne, The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, Gentleman [1759-67], ed. Joan New and Melvyn New (Penguin, 2003) or Robert Folkenflik or Christopher Ricks • Horace Walpole, The Castle of Otranto, A Gothic Story [1764], ed. Nick Groom (Oxford World’s

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 134 of 246

Classics, 2014)

Secondary Reading:

• *The Oxford History of the Novel in English, vol. 2: English and British Fiction, 1750-1820, ed. Peter Garside and Karen O’Brien (Oxford University Press, 2015) • Jerry C. Beasley, Tobias Smollett: Novelist (University of Georgia Press, 1998) • Joe Bray, Miriam Handley, and Anne C. Henry, ed., Ma(r)king the Text: The Presentation of Meaning on the Literary Page (Ashgate, 2000) • David A. Brewer, The Afterlife of Character, 1726-1835 (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2005) • Simon Dickie, ‘Novels of the 1750s’, in The Oxford Handbook of the Eighteenth-Century Novel, ed. J. A. Downie (Oxford University Press, 2016) • Joseph Drury, Novel Machines: Technology and Narrative Form in Enlightenment Britain (Oxford University Press, 2017) • Julia H. Fawcett, Spectacular Disappearance: Celebrity and Privacy, 1696-1801 (University of

Michigan Press, 2016), esp. ch. 3 • E. M Forster, Aspects of the Novel (Edward Arnold, 1927) • John Frow, Character and Person (Oxford University Press, 2014) • Catherine Gallagher, ‘The Rise of Fictionality’, in The Novel vol. I: History, Geography, and Culture, ed. Franco Moretti (Princeton University Press, 2006) • Donald Greene, ‘Jane Austen’s Monsters’, in Jane Austen: Bicentenary Essays, ed. John Halperin (Cambridge University Press, 1975) • J. David Grey, ed., Jane Austen’s Beginnings: The Juvenilia and Lady Susan (University of Rochester Press, 1988) • D. W. Harding, ‘Character and Caricature in Jane Austen’ and ‘Regulated Hatred: An Aspect of the Work of Jane Austen’, in Regulated Hatred and Other Essays on Jane Austen, ed. Monica Lawlor (Athlone, 1998) • Maureen Harkin, ‘Goldsmith on Authorship in The Vicar of Wakefield’, Eighteenth-Century Fiction, 14 (2002), 325-44 • Karen Harvey, ‘The Manuscript History of Tristram Shandy’, The Review of English Studies, 65 (2014), 281-301 • Paul Keen, Literature, Commerce, and the Spectacle of Modernity (Cambridge University Press,

2012) • Thomas Keymer, Sterne, the Moderns, and the Novel (Oxford University Press, 2002) • ------, ‘Small Particles of Fame: Subjectivity, Celebrity, Sterne’, in Sterne, Tristram, Yorick: Tercentenary Essays on Laurence Sterne, ed. Peter de Voogd, Judith Hawley, and Melvyn New

(University of Delaware Press, 2016)

• Mary Lascelles, Jane Austen and Her Art (Oxford University Press, 1939) • Michelle Levy, ‘Jane Austen’s Manuscripts and the Publicity of Print’, ELH 77 (2010), 1015-140 • Christina Lupton, Knowing Books: The Consciousness of Mediation in Eighteenth-Century Britain (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2012)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 135 of 246

• Deidre Lynch, The Economy of Character: Novels, Market Culture, and the Business of Inner Meaning (University of Chicago Press, 1998) • Elaine McGirr, Eighteenth-Century Characters: A Guide to the Literature of the Age (Palgrave Macmillan, 2007) • D. A. Miller, Jane Austen, or the Secret of Style (Princeton University Press, 2003) • Jesse Molesworth, Chance and the Eighteenth-Century Novel: Realism, Probability, Magic (Cambridge University Press, 2010) • Franco Moretti, The Way of the World: The Bildungsroman in European Culture (Verso, 1987) • Tim Parnell, ‘Sterne’s Fiction and the Mid-Century Novel: The “Vast Empire of Biographical Freebooters” and the “Crying Volume”’, in The Oxford Handbook of the Eighteenth-Century Novel, ed. J. A. Downie (Oxford University Press, 2016) • Natalie M. Phillips, Distraction: Problems of Attention in Eighteenth-Century literature (Johns Hopkins University Press, 2016), esp. ch. 3 • Claude Rawson, Satire and Sentiment: Stress Points in the Augustan Tradition (Cambridge University Press, 2000) • John Sitter, Literary Loneliness in Mid-Eighteenth-Century England (Cornell University Press, 1982) • William St Clair, The Reading Nation in the Romantic Period (Cambridge University Press, 2004) • Brian Southam, Jane Austen’s Literary Manuscripts: A Study of the Novelist’s Development through the Surviving Papers (Oxford University Press, 1964) • Kathryn Sutherland, Jane Austen’s Textual Lives: from Aeschylus to Bollywood (Oxford University Press, 2005) • Andrew Swarbrick, ed., The Art of Oliver Goldsmith (Vision, 1984) • Alexis Tadié, Sterne’s Whimsical Theatres of Language: Orality, Gesture, Literacy (Ashgate, 2003) • Blakey Vermeule, Why Do We Care About Literary Characters? (Johns Hopkins University Press, 2010) • Dror Wahrmann, The Making of the Modern Self: Culture and Identity in Eighteenth-Century England (Yale University Press, 2004) • W. K. Wimsatt, The Prose Style of Samuel Johnson (H. Milford, 1941)

Some useful resources:

• Jane Austen’s manuscripts: http://www.janeausten.ac.uk/ • UK reading experience database: http://www.open.ac.uk/Arts/reading/UK/ • Database of British fiction, 1800-1829: http://www.british-fiction.cf.ac.uk/

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 136 of 246

Reading Visual Satire Dr David Taylor

Eighteenth-century print culture was marked by new modes of visual satire, most notably the serial form of William Hogarth’s “modern moral subjects” and the arrival from Italy of caricatura, the introduction of which was to catalyze a so-called “golden age of caricature” during the reign of George III. In this course we will consider the literariness of such satirical prints. We’ll think about the textuality of their construction, their recourse to literary parody, their protocols of narrative and characterization, and their material form and circulation. Oxford is home to three outstanding archives of eighteenth-century caricatures – New College’s James Gillray collection and the Bodleian’s John Johnson and Curzon Collections – and our seminars will make significant use of these collections.

The course has two principal aims. First, it will encourage students critically to explore the vital and complex interaction of literary and visual cultures in the period. Second, it will invite students to think about how we engage with these images in our own research and writing, in particular in light of the mass digitization of the visual archive in recent years.

Students are advised to read Milton’s Paradise Lost, Fielding’s Tom Jones, and Edgeworth’s Belinda over the vacation.

Syllabus

Week 1. Graphic pamphlets?

For our first week we will look at a selection of satirical prints from across the period and read a series of essays on visual satire by critics from the eighteenth century to the present. The aim will be to consider the discursive nature of visual satire, attending not only to the different kinds of text that satirical prints include (titles, speech balloons, epigraphs, keys, etc.) but also to how far these images invite a mode of attention that we might characterize as readerly.

Core reading

• Banerji, Christiane, and Diana Donald, eds., Gillray Observed: The Earliest Accounts of his Caricatures in London Und Paris (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999), selections • Bindman, David, “Text as Design in Gillray’s Caricatures,” in Icons—Texts—Iconotexts: Essays on Ekphrasis and Intermediality, ed. Peter Wagner (New York and Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 1996), 309-323 • Knox, Vicesimus, “On the Effect of Caricaturas exhibited at the Windows of Print-Sellers,” in Winter Evenings; or, Lucubrations on Life and Letters (London: Charles Dilly, 1795) • Nicholson, Eirwin, “Soggy Prose and Verbiage: English Graphic Political Satire as a Visual/Verbal Construct,” Word & Image 20.1 (2004), 28-40 • Paulson, Ronald, Representations of Revolution (1789-1820) (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1983), ch. 6 • Thackeray, William Makepeace, An Essay on the Genius of George Cruikshank (1840)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 137 of 246

Further reading

• Mitchell, W. J. T., Picture Theory: Essays on Verbal and Visual Representation (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1994) • Stafford, Barbara Maria, Good Looking: Essays on the Virtue of Images (Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press, 1996) • Wagner, Peter, Reading Iconotexts: From Swift to the French Revolution (London: Reaktion Books, 1995)

Week 2: Hogarth, harlotry, and the shape of narrative

In this session we will compare two narratives of prostitution, the first told through a sequence of six engravings (Hogarth’s A Harlot’s Progress) and the second through the first-person narrator of Cleland’s pornographic novel, Memoirs of a Woman of Pleasure. Our aim will be to consider the structures of narrative “progress”. What, for instance, might it mean to think of Hogarth as a novelist? And what is the relationship between morality, subjectivity, and the eroticization of the pained female body in these two “texts”?

Core reading

• Hogarth, William, A Harlot’s Progress • John Cleland, Memoirs of a Woman of Pleasure, ed. Peter Sabor (Oxford World’s Classics, 2008)

Further reading

• Erwin, Timothy, Textual Vision: Augustan Design and the Invention of Eighteenth-Century British Culture (Lewisburg: Bucknell University Press, 2015), ch. 3 • Lubey, Kathleen, Excitable Imaginations: Eroticism and Reading in Britain, 1660-1760 (Lewisburg: Bucknell University Press, 2012) • Speck, W. A., “The Harlot’s Progress in Eighteenth-Century England,” British Journal of Eighteenth- Century Studies 3 (1980), 127-39

Week 3: Character and caricature

This week will explore Hogarth’s vexed distinction between character and caricature, a distinction invoked by Fielding in the preface to Joseph Andrews. Building upon the previous week’s discussions of narrativity and novelistic realism, we will focus on Tom Jones – in which Hogarth is invoked several times – to ask what it is that makes a character in the mid eighteenth century and how far novelistic conceptions of character take their cue from visual archetypes (or vice versa).

Core reading

• Hogarth, William, Characters and Caricaturas • Fielding, Henry, preface to Joseph Andrews, ed. Thomas Keymer (Oxford World’s Classics, 2008) • _____, Tom Jones, ed. Thomas Keymer and Alice Wakely (Penguin, 2005) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 138 of 246

Further reading

• E. H. Gombrich, with Ernst Kris, “The Principles of Caricature,” British Journal of Medical Psychology 17 (1938), 319-42 • Lynch, Deidre, The Economy of Character: Novels, Market Culture, and the Business of Inner Meaning (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1998) • Rauser, Amelia, Caricature Unmasked: Irony, Authenticity, and Individualism in Eighteenth-Century Prints (Newark: University of Delaware Press, 2008)

Week 4: Visual parody as criticism

In this session we’ll look at how political caricaturists appropriated and parodied Paradise Lost. We’ll ask what such prints can tell us about the textual afterlife of Milton’s poem and its political resonances in the late eighteenth century, and we’ll also think about the critical function of visual parody in calling attention to shifts in or instabilities of genre – in this case, epic.

Core reading

• Selection of caricatures from the 1780s to the 1820s that parody Milton, especially those by James Gillray and James Sayers • Milton, John, Paradise Lost • Addison, Joseph, essays on Paradise Lost in The Spectator

Further reading

• Griffin, Dustin, Regaining Paradise: Milton and the Eighteenth Century (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1986) • Hutcheon, Linda, A Theory of Parody: The Teachings of Twentieth-Century Art Forms (New York: Methuen, 1985) • Mack, Robert L., The Genius of Parody: Imitation and Originality in Seventeenth- and Eighteenth- Century English Literature (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2007)

Week 5: Caricature, harm, and the female body

This week we’ll explore both how visual satire represents women and also the extent to which it was seen to be a gendered form in ways that aligned it with, but perhaps also distinguished it, from textual satire. We’ll broach these questions through a reading of Edgeworth’s Belinda, a novel that is especially concerned with the performance of gender, that is in part satirical, and that features one woman caricaturing another at great personal (and physical) cost.

Core reading

• Caricatures by Thomas Rowlandson and others responding to the Duchess of Devonshire’s involvement in the Westminster Election of 1784 • Maria Edgeworth, Belinda, ed. Kathryn Kirkpatrick (Oxford World’s Classics, 1994)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 139 of 246

Further reading

• McCreery, Cindy, The Satirical Gaze: Prints of Women in Eighteenth-Century England (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 2004) • Rauser, Amelia F., “The Butcher-Kissing Duchess of Devonshire: Between Caricature and Allegory in 1784,” Eighteenth-Century Studies 36.1 (2002), 23-46 • Taylor, David Francis, “Edgeworth’s Belinda and the Gendering of Caricature,” Eighteenth-Century Fiction 26.4 (2014), 593-624

Week 6: Words, images, and the popular press

In this final session we’ll look at a number of satirical pamphlets that emerged from the remarkable collaboration between the caricaturist George Cruikshank and the satirist and publisher William Hone. These text-image hybrids are politically radical and were sold cheaply, circulating in great numbers. We’ll consider the verbal-visual interactions these pamphlets foster and the relationship between style, printed form, audience, and ideology on which they hinge. We’ll also ask how these works challenge what we take “the literary” and “the popular” to be.

Core reading

Hone, William, and George Cruikshank, The Queen’s Matrimonial Ladder (1820), The Political House that Jack Built (1821), The Political Showman—At Home! (1821), The Man in the Moon (1821), and A Slap at Slop (1822)

Further reading

• Dyer, Gary, British Satire and the Politics of Style, 1789-1832 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997) • Gardner, John, Poetry and Popular Protest: Peterloo, Cato Street and the Queen Caroline Controversy (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2011) • Wood, Marcus, Radical Satire and Print Culture, 1792-1822 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 2001)

General reading

• Baker, James, The Business of Satirical Prints in Late-Georgian England (London: Palgrave Macmillan, 2017) • Barthes, Roland, Image-Music-Text, trans. Stephen Heath (London: Fontana, 1997) • Bate, Jonathan, Shakespearean Constitutions: Politics, Theatre, Criticism, 1730-1830 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1989) • Bindman, David, Frédéric Ogée, and Peter Wagner, eds., Hogarth: Representing Nature’s Machines (Manchester and New York: Manchester University Press, 2001) • Bricker, Andrew Benjamin, “After the Golden Age: Libel, Caricature, and the Deverbalization of Satire,” Eighteenth-Century Studies 51.3 (2018), 305-336 • Carretta, Vincent, George III and the Satirists from Hogarth to Byron (Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1990)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 140 of 246

• Clayton, Timothy, The English Print 1688-1802 (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1997) • Donald, Diana, The Age of Caricature: Satirical Prints in the Reign of George III (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1996) • Fort, Bernadette, and Angela Rosenthal, eds., The Other Hogarth: Aesthetics of Difference (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2001) • Gatrell, Vic, City of Laughter: Sex and Satire in Eighteenth-Century London (London: Atlantic, 2006) • George, M. Dorothy, English Political Caricature: A Study of Opinion and Propaganda, 2 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1959) • Godfrey, Richard, James Gillray: The Art of Caricature (London: Tate, 2001) • Hallett, Mark, The Spectacle of Difference: Graphic Satire in the Age of Hogarth (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1999) • Haywood, Ian, Romanticism and Caricature (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013) • Hunt, Tamara L., Defining John Bull: Political Caricature and National Identity in Late Georgian England (Aldershot, Hamps.: Ashgate, 2003) • Maidment, Brian, Comedy, Caricature, and the Social Order, 1820-50 (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2013). • Mannheimer, Katherine, Print, Visuality, and Gender in Eighteenth-Century Satire (New York: Routledge, 2011) • Monteyne, Joseph, From Still Life to the Screen: Print Culture, Display, and the Materiality of the Image in Eighteenth-Century London (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 2013) • Nicholson, Eirwin, “Emblem v. Caricature: A Tenacious Conceptual Framework,” in Emblems and Art History: Nine Essays, ed. Alison Adams (Glasgow: Glasgow Emblem Studies, 1996), 141-68 • Paulson, Ronald, Popular and Polite Art in the Age of Hogarth and Fielding (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1979) • ______, Book and Painting: Shakespeare, Milton, and the Bible: Literary Texts and the Emergence of English Painting (Knoxsville: University of Tennessee Press, 1982) • ______, Hogarth’s Harlot: Sacred Parody in Enlightenment England (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2003) • Pierce, Helen, Unseemly Pictures: Graphic Satire and Politics in Early Modern England (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 2008) • Porterfield, Todd, ed., The Efflorescence of Caricature: 1759-1838 (Surrey: Ashgate, 2011) • Taylor, David Francis, The Politics of Parody: A Literary History of Caricature, 1760-1830 (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 2018) • ______, “Graphic Satire and the Enlightenment Eye,” Critical Quarterly 59.4 (2017), 34-53.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 141 of 246

Writing the City, 1820-1920 Dr Ushashi Dasgupta, Pembroke College ([email protected])

C-Course, Michaelmas Term 2018

This C-Course is about literature, geography, and modernity. London as we know it came into being during the long nineteenth century, and novelists, poets, journalists and social investigators were irresistibly drawn to this space, determined to capture the growth and dynamism of the Great Metropolis. Do we have Pierce Egan, Henry Mayhew, Arthur Conan Doyle and Alice Meynell to thank for our conception of ‘the urban’? As our classes will show, these authors created the city to a certain extent, even as they attempted to describe it and to use it as a literary setting. In order to appreciate the sheer breadth of responses London inspired, we will discuss writing from across the century, with a coda on Virginia Woolf. We will explore the role of the city in forming identities and communities, the impact of space upon psychology and behaviour, and the movements between street, home, shop and slum. Throughout, we will consider the central tension in all city writing: was the capital a place of opportunity and freedom, or was it dangerous and oppressive?

The ‘character sketch’ was a major urban genre in the period, and accordingly, each of our classes will centre around a particular London type. As we move from personality to personality, we will begin to appreciate how cities fundamentally shape people – and how people leave their mark on the world around them.

Primary Reading

Before you arrive in Oxford, please try to read as many of the core works listed below as you can; a number of them are lengthy, and reward close and careful reading. Those that are difficult to source in hard copy should be available online. For more canonical titles, you could try editions from the Penguin Classics or Oxford World’s Classics series. Further extracts will be distributed once you’re here, during an introductory 0th Week meeting.

1. The Flâneur

This class will consider the figure of the walker, stroller, or lounger.

• Pierce Egan, Life in London, or the Day and Night Scenes of Jerry Hawthorn, Esq., and His Elegant Friend, Corinthian Tom, Accompanied by Bob Logic, the Oxonian, in Their Rambles and Sprees Through the Metropolis (1821). • George Augustus Sala, Twice Round the Clock (1859).

2. The ‘Tough Subject’

Here, we’ll discuss the nature of urban poverty.

• Henry Mayhew, London Labour and the London Poor (1851). Try the recent Oxford University Press selection. • Charles Dickens, Bleak House (1852-3) and ‘Night Walks’ (1861) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 142 of 246

3. The Sinner

Stigmatised and threatening figures – the murderer, the criminal, the prostitute – will take centre stage this week.

• James Thomson, The City of Dreadful Night (1874) • Arthur Conan Doyle, The Sign of Four (1890) and Adventures of Sherlock Holmes (1892) • Extracts to be provided from Flora Tristan, Promenades dans Londres (1840) and GWM Reynolds, Mysteries of London (1844)

4. The Homemaker

This week’s discussion will address the relationship between the home and the city: who were the guardians of domestic space? Did they succeed in their attempts to keep the city at bay?

• George Gissing, The Nether World (1889) and The Paying Guest (1895). • Extracts to be provided from Thomas and Jane Welsh Carlyle’s letters (to 1866) and Octavia Hill, The Homes of the London Poor (1875) and Letters to Fellow Workers (1864-1911)

5. The Modern Woman

How did women claim London as their own at the turn of the century?

• Amy Levy, The Romance of a Shop (1888) • Alice Meynell, London Impressions (1898) • Extracts to be provided from Levy’s A London Plane-Tree and Other Verse (1889)

6. Coda: Virginia Woolf

We end with Woolf – writer and flâneuse.

• Virginia Woolf, Mrs Dalloway (1925). • Extracts to be provided from Woolf’s non-fiction

Secondary Criticism

A week-by-week breakdown of recommended critical reading will be circulated at the start of the course. You could take a look at a few of the following suggestions before you arrive:

• Peter Ackroyd, London: The Biography (2000) • Tanya Agathocleous, Urban Realism and the Cosmopolitan Imagination in the Nineteenth Century: Visible City, Invisible World (2011) • Robert Alter, Imagined Cities: Urban Experience and the Language of the Novel (2005) • Isobel Armstrong, ‘Theories of Space and the Nineteenth-Century Novel’, 19, 17 (2003), 1-21 • Rosemary Ashton, Victorian Bloomsbury (2012) • Matthew Beaumont, Nightwalking: A Nocturnal History of London (2015) • Matthew Beaumont and Gregory Dart (eds.), Restless Cities (2010)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 143 of 246

• Walter Benjamin, The Arcades Project (1927-40), especially ‘The Flâneur’, ‘Baudelaire’, ‘The Interior’, ‘Arcades’ and ‘Exhibitions’ • Michel de Certeau, The Practice of Everyday Life (1980) • Karen Chase and Michael Levenson, The Spectacle of Intimacy: A Public Life for the Victorian Family (2000) • Gregory Dart, Metropolitan Art and Literature, 1810-1840: Cockney Adventures (2012) • HJ Dyos and Michael Wolff (eds.), The Victorian City: Images and Realities (1973-6) • Lauren Elkin, Flâneuse (2016) • Nicholas Freeman, Conceiving the City: London, Literature, and Art 1870-1914 (2007) • Ann Gaylin, Eavesdropping in the Novel from Austen to Proust (2002) • Michael Irwin, Picturing: Description and Illusion in the Nineteenth-Century Novel (1979) • Simon Joyce, Capital Offenses: Geographies of Class and Crime in Victorian London (2003) • Olivia Laing, The Lonely City: Adventures in the Art of Being Alone (2016) • Henri Lefebvre, The Production of Space (1974) • Thad Logan, The Victorian Parlour (2001) • Lawrence Manley (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to the Literature of London (2011) • Sharon Marcus, Apartment Stories: City and Home in Nineteenth-Century Paris and London (1999) • Richard Maxwell, The Mysteries of Paris and London (1992) • Franco Moretti, Atlas of the European Novel (1998) • Lynda Nead, Victorian Babylon: People, Streets and Images in Nineteenth-Century London (2000) • Deborah Epstein Nord, Walking the Victorian Streets: Women, Representation, and the City (1995) • Deborah Parsons, Streetwalking the Metropolis: Women, the City, and Modernity (2000) • Lawrence Phillips (ed.), A Mighty Mass of Brick and Smoke: Victorian and Edwardian Representations of London (2007) • John Picker, Victorian Soundscapes (2003) • , London: A Social History (1994) • Alan Robinson, Imagining London, 1770-1900 (2004) • FS Schwarzbach, Dickens and the City (1979) • Mary L. Shannon, Dickens, Reynolds, and Mayhew on Wellington Street: The Print Culture of a Victorian Street (2016) • Georg Simmel, ‘The Metropolis and Mental Life’ (1903) • Anna Snaith and Michael Whitworth (eds.), Locating Woolf: The Politics of Space and Place (2007) • Jeremy Tambling (ed.), Dickens and London (2009) • William B. Thesing, The London Muse: Victorian Poetic Responses to the City (1982) • Ana Parejo Vadillo, Woman Poets and Urban Aestheticism: Passengers of Modernity (2005) • Judith Walkowitz, City of Dreadful Delight: Narratives of Sexual Danger in Late-Victorian London (1992) • Jerry Whyte, London in the Nineteenth Century: A Human Awful Wonder of God (2008). • Raymond Williams, The Country and the City (1973) • Julian Wolfreys, Writing London (1998-2007) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 144 of 246

The Utopian Imagination, 1800 – 2472 Dr Charlotte Jones ([email protected])

‘A map of the world that does not include Utopia is not worth even glancing at’, Oscar Wilde wrote famously in 1895. For once, he wasn’t being particularly controversial. The nineteenth century is what could be called a utopian moment, a period in history when material and social circumstances shifted so dramatically that anything seemed possible. Many of these utopian ideas, from votes for women to universal healthcare, began as impossible dreams and proved eventually prophetic. But what was the function of literature in political thinking at this time? What were the literary strategies used to conjure and publicise these visions?

Utopian novels are some of the most brilliant (and barmy) of all Victorian writing, providing a unique insight into the hopes, dreams, fears and obsessions of a society undergoing rapid transition. This C- course will explore the explosion in utopian writing during the nineteenth century by reading some of its most controversial and celebrated examples, from canonical works by William Morris and H.G. Wells, to books that were hugely popular in their day but have now fallen into obscurity. The course will start with a broad discussion of the history and strategies of utopian writing, before setting particular utopian texts in the context of the politics and counter-cultures of the nineteenth century: gender, colonialism, science, spiritualism, anarchism, and more.

Questions we will ask along the way include: How far is it possible for literary works to imagine a perfect world? Can such imaginings effect actual social change? Does dystopian fiction contradict utopian thought, or can dystopian writing produce utopian possibilities? (We will also visit the Bodleian Library to explore the William Morris archive.)

Primary Reading

The list below introduces the key themes, texts, and criticism for the course. The best-known authors (Morris, Bellamy, James etc) are available in OUP or Penguin editions; those that are difficult to source in hard copy should be available for free online (e.g. via archive.org), often in the first published editions.

The core works on which we will focus in class obviously only constitute a small number of possible texts relevant to this topic. Students will be able to write an essay on a subject of their choice which may go beyond the selected texts for the seminars. Please do feel free to email me at the address above if you have any questions.

Week 1: Ideologies of social dreaming

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 145 of 246

This class will focus on theories of utopia, and on some of the eccentric experimental communities actually set up during the nineteenth century (featuring free love, atheism, co-operatives, vegetarianism and, apparently, metempsychosis). We’ll ask whether utopian writings are more useful as spaces of reflection or when harnessed to political projects, and we will also address the cultural specificity of the utopian tradition, interrogating the case for its western character.

• Etienne Cabet, Travels in Icaria/The Voyage to Icaria (1840) • Charles Fourier, The Theory of the Four Movements [1808] (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996) • Robert Owen, A New View of Society and Other Writings [1816] (London: Penguin, 1991) • Fredric Jameson, ‘The Politics of Utopia’, New Left Review 25 (Jan/Feb 2004), 35-54

Week 2: Euchronias By taking us on a journey to an imagined better place, utopias risk introducing a fracture between the history of the real place and that of a society which exists outside of space and time, in a state of suspended harmony. In fact, we can even say that the concept of time, as we know it, has been banished from these utopias. What are we to make of this temporal rupture, not to mention the frequent reappearance of medieval pasts in utopian fictions of this period?

• Edward Bellamy, Looking Backward (1888) • Mary Griffith, Three Hundred Years Hence (1836) • William Morris, News from Nowhere (1890) • Walter Benjamin, ‘Theses on the Philosophy of History’ [1940], in Illuminations, trans. Harry Zone (London: Jonathan Cape, 1970), pp. 245-255

Week 3: Heterotopias; or, spiritualism and science fiction According to Foucault, utopias, however fantastic, present an ordered, coherent whole, whereas heterotopia – ‘another’, or different, place – shatters our conception of the ordinary by raising disquieting questions about the establishment of order in culture. We’ll think about heterotopia in Victorian novels which link scientific innovations – electricity, wireless communication – to occult practices such as mesmerism, telepathy, magnetism and clairvoyance. And we’ll consider, of course, the links between utopia and science fiction.

• Edward Bulwer-Lytton, The Coming Race (1871) • Byron A. Brooks, Earth Revisited (1893) • John Macnie, The Diothas; or, A Far Look Ahead (1883) • Michel Foucault, ‘Of Other Spaces: Utopias and Heterotopias [1967]’, trans. Jay Miskowiec, Diacritics, Vol. 16, No. 1 (Spring, 1986), 22-27

Week 4: Satirical utopias

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 146 of 246

Satirical utopias signal a fundamental distrust about the utopian tradition – and as the nineteenth century progresses, we see an increasing number of ambivalent, sceptical, self-reflexive works, where the utopian model is used to criticise the present rather than open new paths to the future.

• Samuel Butler, Erewhon (1872) • Mark Twain, A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur’s Court (1889) • Fredric Jameson, ‘Progress versus Utopia; Or, Can We Imagine the Future’, Science Fiction Studies, 9.2, Utopia and Anti-Utopia (1982), 147-158

Week 5: Feminist utopias ‘There is not even a utopian feminist literature in existence’, Shulamith Firestone declared in her 1970 classic The Dialectic of Sex. The statement was, of course, a polemical exaggeration. This week we’ll consider some utopic depictions of gender, as it is debated in early feminist works featuring single- gender, sexless and gender-equal societies.

• Elizabeth Burgoyne (“George”) Corbette, New Amazonia (1889) • Charlotte Perkins Gilman, Herland (1915)

We’ll also explore the political dimensions of publishing in the nineteenth century by examining the short- lived utopian-feminist periodical Shafts.

• Anne K. Mellor, ‘On feminist utopias’, Women’s Studies, 9.3 (1982), 241-262

Week 6: The dystopian turn; or, the city and cacotopia ‘Death to Utopia! Death to faith! Death to love! Death to hope! thunders the twentieth century’, wrote one Russian revolutionary in 1901. This class will place the metropolis at the centre of the psychological and physical experience of utopia, exploring how crises in urban experience – from anarchist terrorism to the Paris Commune – led to the proliferation of dystopian writing at the fin de siècle.

• Henry James, The Princess Casamassima (1886) • Richard Jeffries, After London (1885) • H.G. Wells, ‘The Time Machine’ (1895) • Karl Popper, ‘Utopia and Violence’ [1948], World Affairs, 149.1 (1986), 3-9

Secondary reading

Starred are books upon which discussion will rely heavily, so it would be good to look at these before term begins if possible.

A full list of recommended critical reading for each week will be provided at the start of the course.

• Arendt, Hannah, Between Past and Future [1961], trans. Jerome Kohn (London: Penguin, 2006) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 147 of 246

• Beaumont, Matthew, The Spectre of Utopia: Utopian and Science Fictions at the Fin de Siècle (London: Peter Lang, 2012) • *Bloch, Ernst, The Principle of Hope [1954], trans. Neville Plaice, Stephen Plaice and Paul Knight (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1995), esp. vol. 1 • –––––––, The Spirit of Utopia [1918], trans. Anthony Nassar (Redwood, CA: Stanford University Press, 2000) • Claeys, Gregory, Dystopia: A Natural History (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2017) • –––––––, Searching for Utopia: The History of an Idea (London: Thames and Hudson, 2011) • *––––––– (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Utopian Literature (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2010) • Engels, Friedrich, Socialism: Utopian and Scientific [1882] (Los Angeles, CA: Hardpress, 2013) • Freedman, Carl, ‘Science Fiction and Critical Theory’, Science Fiction Studies, 14.2 (1987), 180- 200 • Frye, Northrop, ‘Varieties of Literary Utopias’, Daedalus, 94.2 (1965), 323-347 • Goodwin, Barbara and Keith Taylor, The Politics of Utopia: A Study in Theory and Practice (London: Hutchinson, 1982) • *Jameson, Fredric, Archaeologies of the Future: The Desire Called Utopia and Other Science Fictions (London: Verso, 2005), esp. ch. 1 • Journal of Political Ideologies, special edition on “Utopia,” 12/3 (2007) • Kerslake, Patricia, Science Fiction and Empire (Liverpool: Liverpool University Press, 2010) • *Krishan, Kumar, Utopia and Anti-Utopia in Modern Times (Oxford: Blackwell, 1987) • –––––––, Utopianism (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1991) • Kinna, Ruth, ‘Politics, Ideology and Utopia: A Defence of Eutopian Worlds’, Journal of Political Ideologies, 16.3 (2011), 279-294 • Leopold, David, ‘Socialism and (the Rejection of) Utopia’, Journal of Political Ideologies, 12.3 (2007), 219-237 • *Levitas, Ruth, The Concept of Utopia (Hemel Hempstead: Philip Allan, 1990), esp. chs. 1-4 & 7 • –––––––, ‘Looking for the Blue: The Necessity of Utopia’, Journal of Political Ideologies, 12.3 (2011), 289-306 • Mannheim, Karl, Ideology and Utopia (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1954) • Manuel, Frank and Fritzie Manuel, Utopian Thought in the Western World (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1979) • Mieville, China, ‘The Limits of Utopia’, Salvage (2015) • *Moylan, Tom, Demand the Impossible: Science Fiction and the Utopian Imagination (London: Methuen, 1986) • *Moylan, Tom, Scraps of the Untainted Sky: Science Fiction, Utopia, Dystopia (2000), esp. Parts I & II • ––––––– & Raffaela Baccolini (eds.), Utopia/Method/Vision: The Use Value of Social Dreaming (London: Peter Lang, 2007) • Parrinder, Patrick, Utopian Literature and Science: From the Scientific Revolution to Brave New World and Beyond (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2015) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 148 of 246

• Ricouer, Paul, Lectures on Ideology and Utopia, ed. by George Taylor (New York: Columbia University Press, 1986) • *Roemer, Kenneth, Utopian Audiences: How Readers Locate Nowhere (Amherst, MA: University of Massachusetts Press, 2003) • Sargent, Lyman Tower, ‘Ideology and Utopia’ in Michael Freeden, Marc Stears, Lyman Tower Sargent (eds.) The Oxford Handbook of Political Ideologies (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013), ch. 24 • *–––––––, ‘The Three Faces of Utopianism Revisited’, Utopian Studies, 5.1 (1994), 1-37 • Shklar, Judith, ‘The Political Theory of Utopia: From Melancholy to Nostalgia’, Daedalus, 94.2 (1965), 367-381 • Wells, H. G., ‘Utopias’ [1939], Science Fiction Studies, 9.2 (1982), 117-121 • Williams, Raymond, ‘Utopia and Science Fiction’, Science Fiction Studies, 5.3 (1978), 203-214 • Womack, Y. L., Afrofuturism: The World of Black Sci-fi and Fantasy Culture (Chicago: Chicago Review Press, 2013)

Collections of utopias

• Carey, John (ed.), The Faber Book of Utopias (London: Faber, 2000) • Claeys, Gregory (ed.), Modern British Utopias 1700 – 1850. 8 volumes. (London: Pickering & Chatto, 1997) • ––––––– and Lyman Tower Sargent (eds.), The Utopia Reader, 2nd ed (New York: New York University Press, 2017) • Manuel, Frank E. and Fritzie P. Manuel (eds. and trans.), French Utopias (New York: Free Press, 1966)

The Body in Victorian Literature, Science and Medicine Professor Sally Shuttleworth

How was the body thought and talked about in the Victorian period? This course explores how reading literary and scientific texts alongside one another changes how we answer this question, as well as how we approach both of those genres, and encourages students to ask wider questions about the meanings attributed to the body across time. In a period when innovations in technology and changing attitudes towards knowledge were creating what we now know as medicine, the body provided particularly fertile ground for the testing out of new ideas in both literature and science. What new pressures were brought to bear upon bodies as the century progressed? How did these change the way in which bodies were experienced? Did the representation of bodies in literature respond to these changes, and did this influence science and medicine in turn? The course considers these questions with the aid of a wide range of literary and scientific texts, and offers a grounding in the scholarly fields of literature and science and literature and medicine. It is taught by Professor Sally Shuttleworth along with postdoctoral researchers from the ERC- funded humanities project ‘Diseases of Modern Life: Nineteenth Century Perspectives’.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 149 of 246

1 – The Meaning of Illness (Dr Hosanna Krienke)

Primary

• Elizabeth Gaskell, Ruth (1853) • Priscilla Maurice, Sickness: Its Trials and Blessings, 5th ed. (New York: Stanford, 1857) [selections] • Florence Nightingale, ‘Notes on Nursing For the Labouring Classes’, Collected Works of Florence Nightingale, ed. Lynn McDonald, vol. 6 (Waterloo: Wilfrid Laurier University Press, 2004) [selections]

Secondary

• Miriam Bailin, The Sickroom in Victorian Fiction: The Art of Being Ill (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994) • Maria H. Frawley, Invalidism and Identity in Nineteenth-century Britain (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2004) • Pamela K. Gilbert, The Citizen’s Body: Desire, Health and the Social in Victorian England (Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 2007) • Meegan Kennedy, Revising the Clinic: Vision and Representation in Victorian Medical Narrative and the Novel (Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 2010) • Jason Daniel Tougaw, Strange Cases: The Medical Case History and the British Novel (New York: Routledge, 2006) • Athena Vrettos, Somatic Fictions: Imagining Illness in Victorian Culture (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1995)

2 – Disability and the Body in Sensation Fiction (Dr Alison Moulds)

Primary

• Wilkie Collins, The Law and the Lady, ed. by Jenny Bourne Taylor (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008) • ─, Poor Miss Finch, ed. by Catherine Peters (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1995) • ‘Poor Miss Finch’, The Saturday Review, 33 (2 March 1872), 282-3

We will also look at extracts from Charles Bell Taylor's 'Clinical Lectures on Diseases of the Eye', a series printed in the The Lancet in the 1880s and 90s.

Secondary

• Lennard J. Davis, Bending over Backwards: Disability, Dismodernism and Other Difficult Positions (New York: New York University Press, 2002) • ─, Enforcing Normalcy: Disability, Deafness and the Body (London: Verso, 1995

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 150 of 246

• Pamela K. Gilbert, ‘Sensation Fiction and the Medical Context’, in The Cambridge Companion to Sensation Fiction, ed. by Andrew Mangham (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013), pp. 182-95 • Martha Stoddard Holmes, ‘Embodying Affliction in Nineteenth-Century Fiction’, in The Cambridge Companion to Literature and Disability, ed. by Clare Barker and Stuart Murray (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2018), pp. 62-73 • ─, Fictions of Affliction: Physical Disability in Victorian Culture (Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 2004) • Martha Stoddard Holmes and Mark Mossman, ‘Disability in Victorian Sensation Fiction’, in A Companion to Sensation Fiction, ed. by Pamela K. Gilbert (Malden: Blackwell, 2011), pp. 493-506. • Heather Tilley, Blindness and Writing: From Wordsworth to Gissing (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2018) • Tamara S. Wagner, ‘Ominous Signs or False Clues? Difference and Deformity in Wilkie Collins’s Sensation Novels’, in Demons of the Body and Mind: Essays on Disability in Gothic Literature, ed. by Ruth Bienstock Anolik (North Carolina: McFarland, 2010), pp. 47-60

3 – Decadence, Degeneration and Eugenics (Dr Sarah Green)

Primary

• M.P. Shiel, The Purple Cloud (1901) • Arthur Machen, The Great God Pan (1894) and The Three Imposters (1895) • Max Nordau, Degeneration (in German 1892, in English 1895) [selections] • Francis Galton, Inquiries into Human Faculty and its Development (1883) [selections]

Secondary

• Stefano Evangelista ‘Death Drives: Biology, Decadence, and Psychoanalysis’ in Laura Marcus et al eds., Late Victorian into Modern (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016) • William Greenslade, Degeneration, Culture, and the Novel, 1880-1940 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994) • Kirsten Macleod, Fictions of British Decadence: High Art, Popular Writing, and the Fin de Siècle (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006) • Benjamin Morgan, ‘Fin du Globe: On Decadent Planets’, Victorian Studies (June 1 2016) • Angelique Richardson, Love and Eugenics in the Late Nineteenth Century: Rational Reproduction and the New Woman (2003)

4 – Visions of Evolutionary Adaptation: Digestion, Consumption, and the Industrial Body (Dr Emilie Taylor- Brown)

Primary

• Wells, H. G. The Time Machine (1895) o The War of the Worlds (1897)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 151 of 246

o ‘Zoological Retrogression’ in H. G. Wells: Early Writings in Science and Science Fiction eds. Robert Philmus and David Y. Hughes (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1975) • Edwin Ray Lankester, Degeneration: a Chapter in Darwinism (1880) • Samuel Butler, ‘Darwin Among the Machines’ (1863) and ‘Lucubratio Ebria’ (1865) in A First Year in Canterbury Settlement with Other Earlier Essays available: http://nzetc.victoria.ac.nz/tm/scholarly/tei-ButFir.html

Secondary

• Suzy Anger, ‘Evolution and Entropy: Scientific Contexts in the Nineteenth Century’ in A Companion to British Literature. Volume IV: Victorian and Twentieth Century Literature 1837-2000 eds. Robert Demaria Jr., Heesok Chang, and Samanthan Zacher (Chichester: Wiley, 2014) • Michael Anton Budd, The Sculpture Machine: Physical Culture and Body Politics in the Age of Empire (NY: New York University Press, 1997) • Paul A. Cantor and Peter Hufnagel, ‘The Empire Of The Future: Imperialism And Modernism in H. G. Wells’ Studies in the Novel 38.1 (2006) pp.36-56 • Peter J. Capuano, ‘Introduction’, Changing Hands: Industry, Evolution, and the Reconfiguration of the Victorian Body (Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 2015) • Tamara Ketabgian, The Lives of Machines: The Industrial Imaginary in Victorian Literature and Culture (Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 2011) • Peter Kemp, ‘The Edible Predator: Wells and Food’ H. G Wells and the Culminating Ape: Biological Imperatives and Imaginative Obsessions (London: Macmillan, 1982) • Anson Rabinbach, The Human Motor: Energy, Fatigue, and the Origins of Modernity (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1992) • Anne-Julia Zwierlein, ‘From Parasitology to Parapsychology: Parasites in Nineteenth Century Science and Literature’ in Unmapped Countries: Biological Visions in Nineteenth Century Literature and Culture (London: Anthem Press, 2005)

5 – Bodily Remains and the Gothic Imagination (Dr Alison Moulds)

Primary

• Arthur Conan Doyle, ‘The Story of the Brown Hand’, The Strand Magazine, 17 (May 1899), 497- 508. o ‘Lot No. 249’, in Round the Red Lamp and Other Medical Writings (Kansas City: Valancourt, 2007), 142-174 • Richard Marsh, ‘The Adventures of Lady Wishaw’s Hand’, in Curios (Kansas City: Valancourt, 2007), 115-132 • See also the extracts in Chapter 11 ‘Psychical Research’ in The Fin de Siècle: A Reader in Cultural History c. 1880-1900, ed. by Sally Ledger and Roger Luckhurst (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000)

Secondary

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 152 of 246

• Samuel Alberti, Morbid Curiosities: Medical Museums in Nineteenth-Century Britain (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2011) • Aviva Briefel, The Racial Hand in the Victorian Imagination (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2015) • Bill Brown, ‘Thing Theory’, Critical Inquiry, 28 (Autumn 2001), 1-22. • Pat Jalland, Death in the Victorian Family (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2005). • Ernst Jentsch, ‘On the Psychology of the Uncanny’ (1906), trans. by Roy Sellars • Roger Luckhurst, The Mummy’s Curse: The True History of a Dark Fantasy (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2012) • Ruth Richardson, Death, Dissection and the Destitute, 2nd edn (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2001)

6 – Gender and Sexual Disease

• Sarah Grand, The Heavenly Twins (1893) • Henrik Ibsen, Ghosts (1881) • Algernon Charles Swinburne, ‘The Leper’, in Poems and Ballads (1866) • Christabel Pankhurst, The Great Scourge; and How to End It (London: E. Pankhurst, 1913) • Dr. Henry Smith, The Warning Voice; or, Private Medical Friend (London: Printed by the Author, 1860) • Amanda Anderson, Tainted Souls and Painted Faces: the Rhetoric of Fallenness in Victorian Culture (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1993) • William Archer, "Ghosts and Gibberings," Pall Mall Gazette (8 April 1891), in Michael Egan ed., Ibsen: The Critical Heritage (London: Routledge, 1972) • Peter Baldwin, Contagion and the State in Europe, 1830–1930 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999) [chapter on syphilis] • Sos Eltis, Acts of Desire (Oxford University Press, 2013) • Michel Foucault, The History of Sexuality: vol. 1, The Will to Knowledge, trans. Robert Hurley (London: Penguin, 1998; first published 1976), especially ‘We “Other” Victorians’ (see also ‘Introduction’ to vol. 2, The Use of Pleasure) • Lesley A. Hall, Hidden Anxieties: Male Sexuality, 1900-1940 (Cambridge: Polity Press, 1991) • Anne R. Hanley, Medicine, Knowledge, and Venereal Diseases in England, 1886 1914 (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2017) • J.D. Oriel, The Scars of Venus: a History of Venereology (London: Springer-Verlag, 1994) • Ross Shideler, Questioning the Father (Stanford University Press, 1999) • Judith Walkowitz, Prostitution and Victorian Society: Women, Class, and the State (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1980)

Further Reading

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 153 of 246

• David Arnold, Colonizing the Body: State Medicine and Epidemic Disease in Nineteenth-Century India (California: University of California Press, 1993) • Gillian Beer, Open Fields: Science in Cultural Encounter (Oxford: OUP, 1996) • Fay Bound Alberti, This Mortal Coil: the Human Body in History and Culture (Oxford: OUP, 2016) • Jenny Bourne Taylor and Sally Shuttleworth ed., Embodied Selves: An Anthology of Psychological Texts, 1830-1890 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1998) • Patrick Brantlinger, Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism, 1830-1914 (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1988) • Ivan Crozier ed., A Cultural History of the Human Body in the Modern Age (London: Bloomsbury, 2010) • Nicholas Dames, The Physiology of the Novel: Reading, Neural Science, and the Form of Victorian Fiction (Oxford University Press, USA, 2007) • Kate Flint, Victorians and the Visual Imagination (Cambridge University Press, 2000) • Michel Foucault, The Birth of the Clinic (Abingdon, Oxon: Routledge, 2003) • John Holmes and Sharon Ruston (eds) The Routledge Companion to Nineteenth-Century British Literature and Science (London: Routledge, 2017) • Roy Porter, Bodies Politic: Disease, Death and Doctors in Britain, 1650-1900 (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 2001) • Roy Porter, ‘The Patient’s View: Doing Medical History From Below’, Theory and Society, 14.2 (1985), 175-198 • Charles E. Rosenberg, ‘Introduction. Framing Disease: Illness, Society, and History’ in Framing Disease: Studies in Culture History eds. Charles E. Rosenberg and Janet Golden (New Brunswick: Rutgers UP, 1997) • Elaine Showalter, Sexual Anarchy: Gender and Culture at the Fin de Siècle (London: Virago, 1992) • Susan Sontag, Illness as Metaphor, and AIDS as its Metaphors (New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1978) • Martin Willis, Vision, Science and Literature, 1870-1920: Ocular Horizons (London: Routledge, 2011) • Jane Wood, Passion and Pathology in Victorian Fiction (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2001) • Michael Worboys, Spreading Germs: Disease Theories and Medical Practice in Britain, 1865-1900, (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 154 of 246

Fiction in Britain Since 1945: History, time and memory

Tutors: Dr Adam Guy and Professor Laura Marcus

Week 1: Historical Rupture and the Distortions of Memory

[PDFs of all primary text essays will be provided in advance]

Primary reading: • Henry Green, Back (1946) • Evelyn Waugh, Brideshead Revisited (1945) • Philip Toynbee, The Decline and Future of the English Novel, Penguin New Writing, 23 (1945)

Recommended secondary reading: • Marina MacKay Modernism and World War II (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007), chapters 4 and 5 (on Green and Waugh) • Rod Mengham, The Idiom of the Time: The Writings of Henry Green (1982; Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2010), pp. 157-80 (‘The Prosthetic Art’) • Gill Plain, Literature of the 1940s: War, Postwar and Peace (Edinburgh: Edinburgh UP, 2013), pp. 1-38

Week 2: Global History and Narratives of Development Primary Reading • Sam Selvon, A Brighter Sun (1952) • Doris Lessing, Martha Quest (1952), The Small Personal Voice (1957) • Una Marson, ‘We Want Books – But Do We Encourage Our Writers?’ (1949) in Alison Donnell and Sarah Lawson Welch (eds), The Routledge Reader in Caribbean Literature (London: Routledge, 1996), pp. 185–6

Recommended Secondary Reading • Edouard Glissant, ‘The Novel of the Americas’ in Caribbean Discourse: Selected Essays, trans. J. Michael Dash (Charlottesville: University Press of Virginia, 1989), pp. 144–50 • Peter J. Kalliney, Commonwealth of Letters: British Literary Culture and the Emergence of • Postcolonial Aesthetics (Oxford: OUP, 2013)

Week 3: Contingency and Futurity

Primary reading:

• Iris Murdoch, Under the Net (1954) and Against Dryness (1961) • Muriel Spark, The Prime of Miss Jean Brodie (1961) and The Driver’s Seat (1970) • David Lodge, ‘The Novelist at the Crossroads’ in The Novelist at the Crossroads and Other Essays M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 155 of 246

on Fiction (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1971)

Recommended secondary reading:

• Ursula Heise, Chronoschisms: Time, Narrative, and Postmodernism (Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1997), pp. 11-76 (‘Chronoschisms’) • Patricia Waugh, ‘Muriel Spark and the Metaphysics of Modernity’, in David Herman, ed., Muriel Spark: Twenty-First-Century Perspectives (Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins UP, 2010)

Week 4: Short Fictions of Exhaustion

Primary Reading

• Samuel Beckett, Texts for Nothing and Other Shorter Prose, 1950–1976 (London: Faber, 2010) • Christine Brooke-Rose, Go When You See the Green Man Walking (Singapore: Verbivoracious Press, 2014 [1970]) • Alain Robbe-Grillet, ‘From Realism to Reality’ and ‘Nature, Humanism, Tragedy’, trans. Barbara Wright, in Snapshots and Towards a New Novel (London: Calder & Boyars, 1965)

Secondary Reading

• Philip Glass, String Quartet No. 2 (‘Company’ – after Beckett). [various recordings available on YouTube] • Sianne Ngai, ‘Merely Interesting’ in Our Aesthetic Categories: Zany, Cute, Interesting (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2012), pp. 110–73. [please also familiarize yourself with the work of the visual artists discussed in this chapter]

Week 5: The Telling of Tales

Primary Reading

• W.G.Sebald, Austerlitz (2001) • Kazuo Ishiguro, The Remains of the Day (1989) • Walter Benjamin, The Storyteller (1936)

Secondary Reading/Viewing • Sigmund Freud, Screen Memories (1899) and Chapter 4 of The Psychopathology of Everyday Life (1901); Remembering, Repeating and Working Through (1914) • Gillian Rose – ‘Beginnings of the Day: Fascism and Representation’, in Mourning Becomes the Law: Philosophy and Representation (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996) • Susan Sontag, ‘A Mind in Mourning’, in Where the Stress Falls (London: Jonathan Cape, 2002) • Alain Resnais, Toute la mémoire du monde (1956) [available on YouTube] M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 156 of 246

• Grant Gee, Patience (after Sebald) [2012]

Week 6: Beginning again and again…

• Ali Smith, The Accidental (2005) • Tom McCarthy, Remainder (2006) • Zadie Smith, ‘Two Paths for the Novel’, New York Review of Books 55 (18), 20 November: pp. 89-95

Secondary Reading/Viewing

• Walter Benjamin, The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction [sometimes translated as ‘The Work of Art in the Age of its Mechanical Reproducibility’], 1936 • Charlie Kaufman (dir.), Synecdoche, New York (2008)

FURTHER READING

General Background Reading for course:

• Peter Boxall and Bryan Cheyette (eds.), The Oxford History of the Novel in English: Volume Seven: British and Irish Fiction since 1940 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016) • Steven Connor, The English Novel in History, 1950-1995 (London: Routledge: 1996) • Elizabeth Deeds Ermarth, Sequel to History: Postmodernism and the Crisis of Representational Time (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1992) • Linda Hutcheon, A Poetics of Postmodernism: History, Theory, Fiction (London: Routledge, 1988) • Andrzej Gasiorek, Post-War British Fiction: Realism and After (London: Hodder, 1995) • David James (ed.) The Legacies of Modernism: Historicising Postwar and Contemporary Fiction (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2011) • ---, Modernist Futures: Innovation and Inheritance in the Contemporary Novel (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2012) • Dominic Head, The Cambridge Introduction to Modern British Fiction, 1950-2000 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002) • Ursula Heise, Chronoschisms: Time, Narrative and Postmodernism (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997) • Richard Lane, Rod Mengham and Philip Tew (eds.), Contemporary British Fiction (Cambridge: Polity, 2002) • Zachary Leader (ed), On Modern British Fiction (Oxford: Oxford University Press 2002) • Roger Luckhurst and Peter Marks (eds), Literature and the Contemporary: Fictions and Theories of the Present (Longmans, 1999) • Rod Mengham (ed.), An Introduction to Contemporary Fiction (Cambridge: Polity, 1999) • Bran Nichol (ed.), Postmodernism and the Contemporary Novel: A Reader (Edinburgh, 2002) • Peter Middleton and Tim Woods, Literatures of Memory: History, Time and Space in Postwar

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 157 of 246

Writing (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2000) • Randall Stevenson, The Oxford English Literary History, Vol. 12, 1960-2000. The Last of England? (Oxford: Oxford University Press, • Michael Wood, Literature and the Taste of Knowledge (Cambridge, 2005)

Background reading for Week 1

• Jed Esty, A Shrinking Island: Modernism and National Culture in England (Princeton: Princeton UP, 2003) • Thomas S Davis, The Extinct Scene: Late Modernism and Everyday Life (New York: Columbia UP, 2016) • Patrick Deer, Culture in Camouflage: War, Empire, and Modern British Literature (New York: Oxford UP, 2009) • Marius Hentea, Henry Green and the Limits of Modernism (Brighton: Sussex Academic Press, 2014) • Rod Mengham and N.H. Reeve, The Fiction of the 1940s: Stories of Survival (Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2001) • Marina MacKay, Modernism and World War II (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007) • Kristine Miller, British Literature of the Blitz (Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2009), pp. 83-115 (‘Real Men in Henry Green’s War Writing’) • Adam Piette, Imagination at War: British Fiction and Poetry, 1939-1945 (Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1995) • Mark Rawlinson, British Writing of the Second World War (Oxford: Clarendon, 2000) • Nick Shepley, Henry Green: Class, Style, and the Everyday (Oxford: Oxford UP, 2016) • Victoria Stewart, Narratives of Memory: British Writing of the 1940s (Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2006) • Lyndsey Stonebridge, The Writing of Anxiety: Imagining Wartime in Mid-Century British Culture (Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2007) • D.J. Taylor, After the War: The Novel and English Society Since 1945 (London: Chatto & Windus, 1993)

Background Reading for Week 2

• Kevin Brazil, David Sergeant, and Tom Sperlinger (eds), Doris Lessing and the Forming of History (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2016) • J. Dillon Brown, Migrant Modernism: Postwar London and the West Indian Novel (Charlottesville: University of Virginia Press, 2013) • –––– Beyond Windrush: Rethinking Postwar Anglophone Caribbean Literature (Jackson, MS: University Press of Mississippi, 2015) • Mary Lou Emery, Modernism, the Visual, and Caribbean Literature (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2007) • Simon Gikandi, Writing in Limbo: Modernism and Caribbean Literature (Ithaca, NY: Cornell

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 158 of 246

University Press, 1992) • –––– (ed.), The Novel in Africa and the Caribbean since 1950 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016) • Paul Gilroy, The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double Consciousness (London: Verso, 1993) • Wilson Harris, Tradition the Writer and Society: Critical Essays (London and Port of Spain: New Beacon Press, 1967) • Journal of West Indian Literature, 20.2 (2012) [special issue on Selvon] • Malachi McIntosh, Emigration and Caribbean Literature (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2015) • David Morley and Kuan-Hsing Chen, Stuart Hall: Critical Dialogues in Cultural Studies (London: Routledge, 1996) • Alice Ridout and Susan Watkins (eds), Doris Lessing: Border Crossings (London: Continuum, 2009). • Sam Selvon, ‘A Note on Dialect’ (1971) repr. in Susheila Nasta, Critical Perspectives on Sam Selvon (Washington DC: Three Continents Press, 1988), p. 63 • Anna Snaith, Modernist Voyages: Colonial Women Writers in London, 1890–1945 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2014) • Anne Walmsley, The Caribbean Artists Movement 1966–1972: A Literary & Cultural History (London and Port of Spain: New Beacon Books, 1992)

Background Reading for Week 3

• Aidan Day, ‘Parodying Postmodernism’, English, 56 (2007): 321-337 • James Bailey, ‘Salutary Scars: The “Disorienting’ Fictions of Muriel Spark’, Contemporary Women’s Writing, 9 (2015): 34-52 • Malcolm Bradbury, The Novel Today: Contemporary Writers on Modern Fiction (Manchester: Manchester UP, 1977). (Important period piece on the perceived dominance of metafiction.) • Nick Bentley, Radical Fictions: The English Novel in the 1950s (Oxford: Lang, 2007) • A.S. Byatt, Degrees of Freedom, revised edition (London: Vintage, 1994) • Alice Ferrebe, Literature of the 1950s: Good Brave Causes (Edinburgh: Edinburgh UP, 2012) • Andrzej Gasiorek, Post-War British Fiction: Realism and After (London: Edward Arnold, 1995) • David Herman, ed., Muriel Spark: Twenty-First-Century Perspectives (Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins UP, 2010) • David Herman, ed., Modern Fiction Studies, 47, 3 (2001). [Special Issue on Iris Murdoch] • Peter Kalliney, Cities of Affluence and Anger: A Literary Geography of Modern Englishness (Charlottesville: U of Virginia P, 2007) • Brian McHale, Postmodernist Fiction (London: Methuen, 1987) • Bran Nicol, Iris Murdoch: The Retrospective Fiction (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2004) • Rowe, Anne, ed., Iris Murdoch: A Reassessment (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2007) • Lorna Sage, Women in the House of Fiction: Post-War Women Novelists (Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1992)

Background Reading for Week 4

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 159 of 246

• Theodor W. Adorno, ‘Trying to Understand Endgame’ [1961], trans. Michael T. Jones, New German Critique, 26 (1982): 119-150 • Samuel Beckett, Molloy (1951/55), Malone Dies (1951/56), The Unnamable (1953/58) • Sarah Birch, Christine Brooke-Rose and Contemporary Fiction (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1994) • George Craig, et al (eds), The Letters of Samuel Beckett, Vols 2/3 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2011/14) • Sara Crangle, Prosaic Desires: Modernist Knowledge, Boredom, Laughter, and Anticipation (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2010) • Gilles Deleuze, ‘The Exhausted’, trans. Anthony Uhlmann, SubStance: A Review of Theory and Literary Criticism, 24.3 (1995): 3–28 • Ellen J. Friedman and Richard Martin (eds), Utterly Other Discourse: The Texts of Christine Brooke- Rose (Normal, IL: Dalkey Archive Press, 1995) • S. E. Gontarski (ed.), The Edinburgh Companion to Samuel Beckett and the Arts (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2014) • Julia Jordan, Chance and the Modern British Novel: From Henry Green to Iris Murdoch (London: Continuum, 2010) • James Knowlson, Damned to Fame: The Life of Samuel Beckett (London: Bloomsbury, 1996). • Karen R. Lawrence, Techniques for Living: Fiction and Theory in the Work of Christine Brooke-Rose (Columbus, OH: Ohio State University Press, 2010) • Jean-Michel Rabaté, Think, Pig!: Beckett at the Limit of Human (New York: Fordham University Press, 2016) • Alain Robbe-Grillet, Snapshots and Towards a New Novel, trans. Barbara Wright (London: Calder & Boyars, 1965) • Nathalie Sarraute, Tropisms and The Age of Suspicion, trans. Maria Jolas (London: Calder, 1963). • Shane Weller, Beckett, Literature, and the Ethics of Alterity (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006)

Background Reading for Week 5

• Carol Jacobs, Sebald’s Vision (New York: Columbia University Press, 2015) • David James, Contemporary British Fiction and the Artistry of Space: Style, Landscape, Perception (London: Continuum, 2008) • J.J. Long and Anne Whitehead, W.G.Sebald: A Critical Companion (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2004) • Ann Scott, Real Events Revisited: Fantasy, Memory and Psychoanalysis (London: Virago, 1996) • Marianna Torgovnik, The War Complex: World War II in Our Time (Chicago: Chicago University Press, 2005) • Rebecca Walkowitz, Cosmopolitan Style: Modernism Beyond the Nation (New York: Columbia University Press, 2007). [Includes chapters on Ishiguro and Sebald] • Michael Wood – ‘The Discourse of Others’ [Ishiguro] in Children of Silence: Studies in Contemporary Fiction (1998)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 160 of 246

Background Reading for Week 6

• Peter Boxall, Since Beckett: Contemporary Writing in the Wake of Modernism (Continuum, 2009) • ---, Twenty-First Century Fiction: A Critical Introduction (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2013) • Mark Currie, About Time: Narrative, Fiction and the Philosophy of Time (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2006) [Contains chapter on Ali Smith’s The Accidental] • Dennis Duncan (ed.), Tom McCarthy: Critical Essays (Canterbury, Gylphi, 2016) • Tom McCarthy, Typewriters, Bombs, Jellyfish: Essays, (New York Review of Books [publications], 2017)

Humanitarian Fictions Professor Ankhi Mukherjee Mondays 11 am - 1 pm (weeks 1-6) Knowles Room, Wadham College

This course looks at the revived idea of Humanitarianism in English, Anglophone, and World literary studies and raises specific questions about how the novel in particular embraces the discourse of human rights and humanitarianism to address global modernity’s emergences and discontents. In the six weeks of the course we will look at key areas in which contemporary fiction or narrative non-fiction in English push against the limits of social justice discourse and civil rights litigation - and the remit of creative literature - to develop humanitarian critiques that confer maximal visibility to and an affective script for vulnerable lives and habitations.

Throughout the course, we will explore the relationship between the world novel, humanitarianism, liberal humanism, the ‘human,’ and the humanities. Some of the questions we will address are as follows: the destitute as what Dipesh Chakrabarty calls “the figure of difference,” who fractures from within the very signs that seem to proclaim the emergence of abstract labour; alternative accounts of “life, death, and hope,” to borrow from the subtitle of Katherine Boo’s Behind the Beautiful Forevers, which challenge hegemonic understandings of modernity as linked to the global expansion of the capitalist mode of production; international warfare; environmental crises; social and global injustice; the limits of human rights discourse. Paying attention to traditional and aberrational forms of fiction, we will also re-examine, in the twenty-first century, the ends and objectives associated with the novel: social circulation and mobility, distributive justice, and equivocal forms of national belonging.

Week 1: Urban Poverty

• Katherine Boo, Behind the Beautiful Forevers • Arjun Appadurai, Fear of Small Numbers • Mike Davis, Planet of Slums • Swati Chattopadhyay, Unlearning the City: Infrastructure in a New Optical Field M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 161 of 246

• Ashis Nandy, The Intimate Enemy: Loss and Recovery of Self under Colonialism

Week 2: Race, Racism, Critical Race Studies

• Ta-Nehisi Coates, Between the World and Me • Achille Mbembe, Critique of Black Reason • Claudia Rankine, Citizen: An American Lyric • Mikko Tuhkanen, “Native Son and Diasporic Modernity,” The Oxford History of the Novel in English, vol. 6: The American Novel, 1870-1940, ed. Priscilla Wald and Michael A. Elliott (Oxford UP, 2014), 517-29.

Week 2: Global War

• Mohsin Hamid, The Reluctant Fundamentalist • Judith Butler, Frames of War • Ankhi Mukherjee, "'Yes, sir, I was the one who got away': Postcolonial Emergence and the Vernacular Canon," What is a Classic? Postcolonial Rewriting and Invention of the Canon • Bruce Robbins, Perpetual War: Cosmopolitanism from the Viewpoint of Violence • Jacqueline Rose, Why War: Psychoanalysis, Politics and the Return to Melanie Klein

Week 4: Violence and Information Technology

• Jennifer Egan, A Visit from the Goon Squad • Robert Eaglestone, Contemporary Fiction: A Very Short Introduction • Martin Jay, Refractions of Violence • Pankaj Mishra, "Modernity's Undoing," London Review of Books 33.7 (31 March 2011) • Roy Rosenzweig, Clio Wired: The Future of the Past in the Digital Age • Slavoj Žižek, Violence: Six Sideways Reflections

Week 5: Environmental Crises

• Indra Sinha, Animal’s People • Rob Nixon, Slow Violence and the Environmentalism of the Poor • Pablo Mukherjee, Postcolonial Environments: Nature, Culture and the Contemporary Indian Novel in English • Ramchandra Guha and Joan Martinez-Alier, Varieties of Environmentalism

Week 6: Women's Rights

• Han Kang, The Vegetarian • Elizabeth Anker, Fictions of Dignity: Embodying Human Rights in World Literature • Rita Felski, Literature after Feminism M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 162 of 246

• Minor Transnationalism ed. Françoise Lionnet and Shu-mei Shih • Ella Shohat, Talking Visions: Multicultural Feminism in a Transnational Age

Further Reading:

• Pheng Cheah, Inhuman Conditions: On Cosmopolitanism and Human Rights • Margaret Cohen and Christopher Prendergast, Spectacles of Realism: Body, Gender, Genre • Michael Ignatieff, Human Rights as Politics and Idolatory • Samuel Moyn, The Last Utopia • ---, Not Enough: Human Rights in an Unequal World • Julie Peters et al, ed. Womens' Rights, Human Rights: International Feminist Perspectives • Joseph Slaughter, Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law • Rosalind C. Morris, ed., Can the Subaltern Speak? Reflections on the History of an Idea • David Palumbo-Liu, The Deliverance of Others: Reading Literature in a Global Age • Gavin Jones, American Hungers: The Problem of Poverty in US Literature, 1840-1945 • Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, A Critique of Postcolonial Reason • Michael Warner, Publics and Counterpublics • Chantal Zabus, Between Rites and Rights: Excision in Women's Experiential Texts and Human Contexts

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 163 of 246

Contemporary Canadian Literature and the World M.St. C-Course Michaelmas Term 2018 Professor Michèle Mendelssohn [email protected]

Schedule of seminars and readings SEMINAR 1 Defining Multiculturalism, Pluralism, Cosmopolitanism

• Kwame Anthony Appiah, Cosmopolitanism: Ethics in a World of Strangers (2006). Chapters 1-5 • Evelyne de la Chenelière, Bashir Lazhar (2011) • From Act for the Preservation and Enhancement of Multiculturalism in Canada, Bill C-93. Canadian Multiculturalism Act (1985/88) in Sugars, Cynthia Conchita, and Laura F. E. Moss. Canadian Literature in English: Texts and Contexts. Toronto: Pearson Longman, 2009. (pages 544-546) • From Neil Bisoondath, Selling Illusions: the Cult of Multiculturalism in Canada (1994) in Sugars, Cynthia Conchita, and Laura F. E. Moss. Canadian Literature in English: Texts and Contexts. Toronto: Pearson Longman, 2009. (pages 637-642) • George Elliott Clarke, “What Was Canada?” Is Canada Postcolonial? Unsettling Canadian Literature. Ed. Laura Moss. Waterloo: Wilfred Laurier Press, 2003. pages 27-40 • Charles Foran, “The Canada Experiment: is this the world’s first ‘postnational’ country?” The Guardian 4 January 2017 https://www.theguardian.com/world/2017/jan/04/the-canada- experiment-is-this-the-worlds-first-postnational-country

OPTIONAL

• Osaa Ahmed, “My Journey as a Refugee” The Walrus Talks Africa’s Next Generation (Ottawa 2017) https://thewalrus.ca/my-journey-as-a-refugee/ • 19 Days (2016) directed by Asha Siad and Roda Siad, National Film Board of Canada (26 minutes) https://www.nfb.ca/film/19_days/ • Things Arab Men Say (2016) directed by Nisreen Baker, National Film Board of Canada (52 minutes) https://www.nfb.ca/film/things_arab_men_say/

SEMINAR 2 Indigenous Peoples, Empathy and Ethics

• Kwame Anthony Appiah, Cosmopolitanism: Ethics in a World of Strangers (2006). Chapters 6-10 • Eden Robinson, Son of a Trickster (2017). • Chief Dan George, “A Lament for Confederation” (1967) in Sugars, Cynthia Conchita, and Laura F. E. Moss. Canadian Literature in English: Texts and Contexts. Vol. 2. Toronto: Pearson Longman, 2009. (pages 251-252) • From Truth and Reconciliation Commission of Canada. "Volume 5. The Legacy." Montreal: McGill- Queen's University Press, 2016. Pages 20-29 (in Chapter 1: The Challenge of Reconciliation) and pages 157-172 and 178-182 (in “Chapter 5: Public Memory: Dialogue, The Arts and

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 164 of 246

Commemoration”) • Marche, Stephen. “Northern Shadows: CanLit in an Era of Truth and Reconciliation and ‘Peak’ Diversity.” Literary Review of Canada (November 2017): 12-19. • From Charles Taylor, From “The Politics of Recognition” (1992) in Sugars, Cynthia Conchita, and Laura F. E. Moss. Canadian Literature in English: Texts and Contexts. Toronto: Pearson Longman, 2009. (pages 547-551)

OPTIONAL

• Wendell Adjetey, “Reconciling the Fruits of Citizenship” The Walrus Talks (7:40 minutes) https://thewalrus.ca/reconciling-the-fruits-of-citizenship/ • Robinson, Eden. The Sasquatch at Home: Traditional Protocols and Modern Storytelling. Edmonton: University of Alberta Press, 2011 • ---. “Dogs in Winter” from Traplines (1996) • Sugars, Cynthia. "Strategic Abjection: Windigo Psychosis and the "Postindian" Subject in Eden Robinson's "Dogs in Winter"." Canadian Literature 181 (2004): 78-91

SEMINAR 3 Policy, Philosophy and Memory

• Kim Thúy, Ru. Trans. Sheila Fischman (2012) • From Irene Bloemraad, Becoming a Citizen: Incorporating Immigrants and Refugees in the United States and Canada (2006), “Chapter 2: The Social Nature of Citizenship and Participation” (pages 65-101) • Dawson, Carrie. "On Thinking Like a State and Reading (About) Refugees." Journal of Canadian Studies 45 2 (2011): 58-75 • From Robbins, Bruce, and Paulo Lemos Horta, eds. Cosmopolitanisms. New York: New York University Press, 2017. “Introduction” (pages 1-20) • Gérard Bouchard, “What is Interculturalism?” McGill Law Journal 56. 2, February, 2011 (pages 444-468 only) https://www.erudit.org/en/journals/mlj/2011-v56-n2- mlj1517315/1002371ar.pdf

OPTIONAL

• Nussbaum, Martha. "Patriotism and Cosmopolitanism." The Cosmopolitan Reader. Ed. Brown, Garrett Wallace and David Held. Cambridge: Polity, 2010. 155-162 • ---, "Toward a Globally Sensitive Patriotism." Daedalus 137 3 (2008): 78-93 • George Elliott Clarke, Québécité: A Jazz Fantasia in Three Cantos (2003)

SEMINAR 4 OMG

• Miriam Toews, A Complicated Kindness (2004) • Ariela Freedman, Arabic for Beginners (2017)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 165 of 246

• Jean Bethke Elshtain, “Cosmopolitanism and the Claims of Religious Identity” Bruce Robins and Paulo Lemos Horta eds., Cosmopolitanisms (2017), pages 127-134. • Joshua Ostroff, “It’s Been a Tough Summer to Be a Jew” The Walrus, 5 September 2017, https://thewalrus.ca/its-been-a-tough-summer-to-be-a-jew/ • Okin, Susan Moller. "Is Multiculturalism Bad for Women?" Is Multiculturalism Bad for Women?/ Susan Moller Okin with Respondents. Eds. Cohen, Joshua, Matthew Howard and Martha C. Nussbaum. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1999. 7-36

SEMINAR 5 Black Lives

• George Elliott Clarke, Black (2006) • Chariandy, David. Brother (2014)

OPTIONAL

• Clarke, George Elliott. Directions Home: Approaches to African-Canadian Literature. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2012 • Nelson, Charmaine, ed. Ebony Roots, Northern Soil: Perspectives on Blackness in Canada. 2010 • Maynard, Robyn. Policing Black Lives: State Violence in Canada from Slavery to the Present. Halifax: Fernwood Publishing, 2017

SEMINAR 6 Facts, Fictions and National Narratives

• Alice Munro, The View from Castle Rock (2006) • Noah Richler, This is My Country, What’s Yours? (2006). Chapter 1: The Virtues of Being Nowhere, pages 1-36 • From Northrop Frye, “Conclusion to a Literary History of Canada” (1965/1971) in Sugars, Cynthia Conchita, and Laura F. E. Moss. Canadian Literature in English: Texts and Contexts. Toronto: Pearson Longman, 2009. (pages 252-253) • From Margaret Atwood, Survival: A Thematic Guide to Canadian Literature (1972) in Sugars, Cynthia Conchita, and Laura F. E. Moss. Canadian Literature in English: Texts and Contexts. Toronto: Pearson Longman, 2009. (pages 446-462) • Margaret Atwood, “The Martians Claim Canada” Granta. Issue 141: Canada. Autumn 2017 (pages 107-113) • Douglas Coupland, “The Canada Pictures” Granta. Issue 141: Canada. Autumn 2017 (pages 247- 257)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 166 of 246

Virginia Woolf: Literary and Cultural Contexts M.St. C-Course, Michaelmas Term 2018

Dr Michael Whitworth, Merton College

This course aims to place Woolf’s novels and other writings in dialogue with texts by her contemporaries. Although Woolf often emphasised her formal originality, in several weeks the course will ask about the ways that the idea of genre might retain some value in relating Woolf’s works to the works of others. The course also aims to ask about the value and limits of understanding literary context in terms solely of texts: what happens to non-literary texts when they are reworked in literary ones? How can we deal with contexts that are, in the first instance, non-verbal?

Week 1. Life-Writing as a genre: bildungsroman and biography

The Voyage Out (1915), Jacob’s Room (1922), Orlando (1928), Flush (1933)

Other writers, in order of priority:

• Strachey, Lytton. Eminent Victorians (1918) • Nicolson, Harold. Some People (1927) • Nicolson, Harold. The Development of English Biography (1927)

It would be advantageous to be aware of Victorian and early twentieth-century examples of bildungsroman, e.g., Dickens’s Great Expectations, George Eliot’s The Mill on the Floss, D. H. Lawrence’s Sons and Lovers, James Joyce’s Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man.

Week 2. Materiality: domestic objects and urban spaces.

‘Solid Objects’ (1920) (in The Mark on the Wall and other stories, ed. D. Bradshaw), Mrs Dalloway (1925), The Years (1937).

Other primary texts:

Ford (Hueffer), Ford Madox. The Soul of London (also available as part of England and the English).

Secondary reading:

Brown, Bill. ‘The Secret Life of Things (Virginia Woolf and the Matter of Modernism).’ Modernism/Modernity, 6 no.2 (1999), 1-28.

Week 3. Middlebrow Fantasy as genre.

Orlando (1928), Flush (1933).

Other primary texts:

• Garnett, David. Lady into Fox (1924) • Sackville-West, Vita. Seducers in Ecuador (1925) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 167 of 246

• West, Rebecca. Harriet Hume (1929)

There is very little secondary reading on this genre, so it’s especially important to read as many of the primary texts as possible.

Week 4. The Group and the Family.

Mrs Dalloway (1925), The Waves (1931), The Years (1937). (You could also additionally bring in Night and Day (1919), To the Lighthouse (1927), and Between the Acts (1941)).

Other writers:

• Lawrence, D. H. The Rainbow (1915), and/or Galsworthy, as examples of the family saga genre • Galsworthy, John. The Man of Property (1906), reprinted in The Forsyte Saga (1922) • Romains, Jules. Death of a Nobody (translation of Mort de quelqu’un) (to be provided as a PDF) (as an example of unanimist writing.) • Harrison, Jane. Unanimism and Conversion (1912) (to be provided as a PDF)

Week 5. War and Civilization

• Mrs Dalloway (1925), Between the Acts (1941), Three Guineas (1938); also reconsider The Years (1937)

Other primary texts:

• Mary S. Florence, Catherine Marshall, and C. K. Ogden, Militarism versus Feminism (1915). A reprint (Virago, 1987) can be found second-hand very cheaply • Bell, Clive. Peace at Once (1915) (to be provided as a PDF) • Starr, Mark. Lies and Hate in Education (1929) (extracts to be provided as a PDF)

Week 6. The Purposes of Art.

• To the Lighthouse (1927), Orlando (1928), The Waves (1931) • Harrison, Jane. Ancient Art and Ritual (1913) (extracts to be provided as a PDF) • Fry, Roger. Vision and Design (1910) (to be provided as a PDF) • Bell, Clive. Art (1914) (extracts to be provided as a PDF)

EDITIONS

For Woolf’s novels, you should obtain the most recent Oxford World’s Classics editions. In term-time, you should also refer to the available editions in the Cambridge Edition, which by October should cover Night and Day, Mrs Dalloway, Orlando (forthcoming 2018), The Waves, The Years, and Between the Acts.

SECONDARY READING

This is a brief list of preparatory secondary reading; fuller lists of secondary material will be provided at the start of the term.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 168 of 246

• Sellers, Susan, ed. The Cambridge Companion to Virginia Woolf, 2nd edition (2010) • Randall, Bryony, and Jane Goldman, eds. Virginia Woolf in Context (2012) • Whitworth, Michael H. Virginia Woolf (Authors in Context) (2005)

The Second Wave of Anglo-American Feminism (cross-listed with Women’s Studies M.St.)

Course tutor: Professor Debbie Cameron. Email [email protected]

Class meetings: MT, weeks 1-6, Thursdays, 11-12.30, Worcester College, Nuffield Building room 3.

Course description

This option will examine aspects of the theory, practice, political activism and cultural production of the so-called ‘second wave’ of feminism which began in the late 1960s in the USA. (There’s disagreement on when it ended: some historians put it as early as 1975, but I’ve chosen to go with those who see it as continuing into the 1980s. Though any end-date is a bit arbitrary, I’ve picked 1987, when the term ‘third wave’ was first used in print by feminists.) A range of materials will be used to examine second wave feminism and interrogate today’s received wisdom—both feminist and non-feminist—about it. As well as looking at its origins, its development over time and some of the different political currents within it, we will ask what was distinctive about it and what it has contributed to today’s feminist thought and activism. We will also consider the strengths and limitations of the ‘wave’ model itself.

The class readings will emphasise primary source materials produced during the relevant period (especially the early part of it, which today’s feminists often know very little about), rather than secondary texts written about the second wave by later scholars (though we will read some of those, and there are more for you to find if you want to). Many of these texts are non-academic writings: this was a movement that made theory, but (to begin with) from the grassroots, not in the academy. It also produced journalism, fiction, memoir, poetry, film and drama, and I’ll be encouraging you to look at those too. We can’t go back in time, but we can try to get a sense of what it was like to be a woman, and a feminist, at a particular historical moment, and we can try to understand—before making comparisons or judgments from our own vantage point in the 21st century—what second wave feminists themselves thought and felt.

We will mainly be considering texts and events from the US and Britain (though students are welcome to bring in material from other places). The most familiar account of the second wave is in reality very largely a story about the US, and the history of feminism elsewhere does not necessarily fit that narrative exactly, either temporally or politically. At the same time, the transnational cultural influence of the US during the late 20th century meant that the US (or ‘Anglo-American’) variant of feminism did have a significant influence on feminism in other parts of the world (especially, but not only, in western Europe). When planning/writing assignments you are free to go outside the geographical boundaries I’ve set if relevant materials are available and if you have the necessary language skills. You are also free to focus on issues which are not covered in any of the class sessions, so long as they fall within the remit of the option (i.e., relate to feminism between 1968 and c.1987). Inevitably I have had to be selective in designing a course of this length: the general histories you read will give you a fuller picture of feminist activity during

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 169 of 246

the period, but what we focus on in detail will be only a subset of possible topics. However, if you want to work on something that doesn’t feature directly on the programme, tell me and I should be able to suggest suitable readings.

Teaching

The course will be taught through group discussion based on the readings for the week. I will specify what I expect everyone to have read for each session in the programme below. There is also a list of further reading on the various topics at the end of the programme. These can be used for follow-up work, but I encourage you to dip into them during the course if you have time: the more you’re able to read, the more interesting our discussions are likely to be. One section of the list contains a selection of novels and memoirs (and a small number of films). There’s only one session where you’re specifically asked to read from this part of the list, but I hope you’ll find time to read several items during the term, choosing the ones that appeal to you or are relevant to the topic you want to write about. I’ve also listed the online archives for Spare Rib, Britain’s best-known feminist publication in the 1970s and 80s—usable both for research and for random browsing to get a feel for what was going on.

Advance preparation

I advise you to try to do some preparatory reading before the class starts. There are things I can’t reasonably expect you to read before you have access to Oxford’s libraries, but many of the readings listed below are available free online (where this is the case I’ve included links).

There are two things you’ll find it particularly useful to get a head start on. One is reading a couple of the novels on the reading list (I’m not expecting you to read more than a few of them—apart from those specified as class reading for week 3, you can make your own selection to reflect your own interests). Although these titles are all available via the Oxford library system, some are only available in reference rather than lending libraries. If you’d rather not read this kind of material in a library, they are available to purchase online in a range of formats (print and electronic), and often very cheaply.

The second thing you should try to do ahead of time is read (which may mean buying) an overview of the history of feminism. The one I recommend is:

Dorothy Cobble, Linda Gordon and Astrid Henry, Feminism Unfinished: A Short, Surprising History of American Women’s Movements (Norton 2014).

Linda Gordon’s section on the second wave is the most relevant part, but if you read the whole book (which covers all three feminist ‘waves’), that will help you both to contextualise the second wave in relation both to the preceding period (from the advent of suffrage in the 1920s) and to the present. Another history of US feminisms which will give you a good overview, though it pays more attention to women’s activism in mixed movements and less to post-second wave developments, is:

Annelise Orleck, Rethinking American Women’s Activism (Routledge 2015).

Both of these are about the USA: unfortunately there is nothing as good as either of them for Britain, but see the further reading list for some resources on Britain, France and elsewhere. M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 170 of 246

Class Programme

Week 1: What was the second wave?

In this first session we’ll explore some general historical, political and theoretical questions about the second wave—and particularly about the emergence of an autonomous Women’s Liberation Movement (WLM) in the US towards the end of the 1960s. We’ll consider how feminism related to other contemporary political movements (Civil Rights, the student anti-war movement, the ‘new Left’ in general) and what prompted the women who founded the WLM to break away to form their own groups; we’ll ask what was distinctive about these feminists’ political aims; and we’ll also ponder what it means— and what is gained, lost, revealed or obscured—when we conceptualise feminism’s history as a series of ‘waves’.

Required reading (before you panic, note that the last four readings, all primary texts from the early WLM, are very short)

• Gordon, Linda, ‘The Women’s Liberation moment’, in Cobble, D,S., Gordon, L. and Henry, A., Feminism Unfinished (Norton, 2014). • Women’s Liberation: A National Movement (British Library ‘Sisterhood and after’ project) https://www.bl.uk/sisterhood/articles/womens-liberation-a-national-movement (contains material on the formation of the WLM in Britain, and the ‘seven demands’ that were formulated during the 1970s). • Eberle, Ashley, ‘Breaking with our brothers: the source and structure of Chicago Women’s Liberation in 1960s activism’. Western Illinois Historical Review Vol.1, spring 2009 http://www.wiu.edu/cas/history/wihr/pdfs/EberleWIHRSp09.pdf • Henry, Astrid, Not My Mother’s Sister: Generational Conflict in Third Wave Feminism (Indiana UP, 2004), Introduction and chs 1&2. (available as an e-resource via SOLO, Oxford’s library catalogue.) In spite of the title, this isn’t only about the third wave: it problematizes the concept of ‘waves’, and examines the relationship of the (so-called) second wave to both what preceded and what followed it. • Anne Koedt, ‘Women and the radical movement’ (1968) https://www.marxists.org/subject/women/authors/koedt-anne/radical-movement.htm • Redstockings, Manifesto (1969) http://www.redstockings.org/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&id=76&Itemid=59 • Beal, Frances, ‘Double jeopardy: to be Black and female’ (1969) • http://www.hartford-hwp.com/archives/45a/196.html • Morgan, Robin ‘Goodbye to all that’ (1970) http://blog.fair-use.org/2007/09/29/goodbye-to- all-that-by-robin-morgan-1970/

Week 2: ‘The personal is political’: feminism as a politics of experience

One thing that struck many contemporary observers as distinctive about the new feminist movement was its concern with issues that were typically thought of as ‘private’ or ‘personal’ rather than political—like

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 171 of 246

sex, marriage, domestic violence, housework and childcare, objectification and beauty standards. In this session we’ll read some texts (and about some political actions) in which feminists politicised the personal experience of women, and examine one of the distinctive second-wave practices which supported analysis and activism, namely consciousness raising. We’ll also discuss the way some feminists used fiction to explore women’s experiences and in some cases to popularise feminist political analysis.

Required reading:

• Carol Hanisch, ‘The personal is political’ http://www.carolhanisch.org/CHwritings/PIP.html • Kathie Sarachild, ‘A program for feminist consciousness raising’ (1968) http://rhetoricalgoddess.wikia.com/wiki/Kathie_Sarachild:_%22A_Program_for_Feminist:_Conscio usness_Raising%22 • Anne Koedt, ‘The myth of the vaginal orgasm’ (1970) https://wgs10016.commons.gc.cuny.edu/the-myth-of-the-vaginal-orgasm-by-anne-koedt- 1970/ • Pat Mainardi, ‘The politics of housework’ (1970) https://caringlabor.wordpress.com/2010/09/11/pat-mainardi-the-politics-of-housework/ • Judy Syfers, ‘I want a wife’ (1970) http://www.columbia.edu/~sss31/rainbow/wife.html • Lilian Mohin, ‘Storming the Wimpy Bars’ (1984) http://www.troubleandstrife.org/issues/Issue03_FullScan.pdf (p.29-31)

Also read at least one and ideally two of the following: Marge Piercy, Small Changes (1973) or Woman on the Edge of Time (1976), Marilyn French, The Women’s Room (1977), Zoe Fairbairns, Benefits (1979). [In the additional reading section I’ve given bibliographical information, but actually it doesn’t matter what edition you read—anything you can find is fine]

Week 3: Theorizing women’s oppression: patriarchy, capitalism and feminist revolution

Feminists saw the oppression of women as a structural phenomenon, and they were struck by how universal it appeared to be, existing across cultures and classes and throughout recorded history (though some feminists did posit a prehistoric matriarchal society). However, there were competing views on its origins and mechanisms, and whose interests it mainly served. In this session we’ll look at the attempts of socialist feminists to incorporate a feminist analysis of patriarchy into the Marxist model and the production by radical feminists of theories that put patriarchy at the centre.

Required reading:

• Firestone, Shulamith, The Dialectic of Sex (1970; reissued Verso, 2015) • Dunbar, Roxanne, ‘Female liberation as the basis for social revolution’ (1970) https://www.waste.org/~roadrunner/RDO/_single_RDO_Female_Liberation_as_Basis_for_Social_ Revolution.pdf

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 172 of 246

• Eisenstein, Zillah, ‘Constructing a theory of capitalist patriarchy and socialist feminism’, Critical Sociology 25(2/3), 1999. available via Oxford eJournals with SSO, http://journals.sagepub.com/doi/abs/10.1177/08969205990250020901 (in case the date’s confusing, this is a republication of an older article) • Delphy, Christine, ‘The main enemy’, Feminist Issues, 1980 http://libcom.org/files/delphymainenemy.pdf (note: this was originally written in French)

Week 4: Before we said ‘intersectionality’: race and class in the Anglo-American second wave

Second wave feminism is frequently presented as a middle-class white women’s movement, one which lacked the commitment of present-day feminism to inclusivity and intersectional analysis. But while tensions and conflicts around differences/inequalities of race and class have affected feminism in all phases of its history, and it is undoubtedly true that the WLM was dominated by college-educated white women, historians like Linda Gordon and Annelise Orleck argue that the ‘standard’ narrative has had the paradoxical effect of downplaying or erasing the significant contributions Black and ethnic minority women did in fact make to the second wave. In this session we will look at some texts in which Black feminists in the US and UK both challenged racism in the movement and offered compelling analyses of women’s situation—analyses that took account of the way women’s experiences and political aspirations were shaped by both race and class.

Required reading:

• Morrison, Toni, ‘What the Black Woman thinks about Women’s Lib’, New York Times (1971) http://www.nytimes.com/1971/08/22/archives/what-the-black-woman-thinks-about- womens-lib-the-black-woman-and.html?_r=0 • The Combahee River Collective, Statement (1977) http://circuitous.org/scraps/combahee.html • Davis, Angela, Women, Race and Class (Vintage, 1983), chs. 11-13. • Carby, Hazel, ‘White Woman Listen!’(1982) http://jan.ucc.nau.edu/~sj6/carby%20white%20woman%20listen.pdf • Amos, Valerie and Parmar, Pratibha, ‘Challenging imperialist feminism’, Feminist Review 17 (1984): Many Voices, One Chant: Black Feminist Perspectives (available through Oxford e-journals) • Farnham, Margot, ‘Still working against the grain: an interview with Southall Black Sisters’, Trouble & Strife 23, 1992 http://www.troubleandstrife.org/issues/Issue23_FullScan.pdf (a 1990s piece tracing the history of a UK group that formed in 1979)

Week 5: An explosive issue: sex

It’s sometimes been suggested that the sexual politics of the second wave was driven by the concerns of lesbian separatists who didn’t have anything to say to the majority of (heterosexual) women; a claim made even more often is that radical feminism (the label originally used by most women in the autonomous WLM) gradually degenerated into a ‘victim’ feminism whose opposition to pornography and prostitution aligned it with the forces of social/religious conservatism. In this session we’ll look at some feminist M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 173 of 246

debates on sex, focusing particularly on two issues: (1) lesbianism (especially when conceived of as a political choice feminists could or should make), and (2) tensions between what one influential anthology of the early 1980s called ‘pleasure and danger’, i.e. between affirming women’s sexual freedom and their right to define their own erotic desires, and recognising that sex under patriarchy is a key terrain for the exploitation and subjugation of women (this is a very large topic: for the purposes of the session we’ll approach it via one issue that featured prominently in debates on it—pornography).

Required reading

• Bunch, Charlotte, ‘Lesbians in revolt’ (1972), http://www.feminist- reprise.org/docs/lwmbunch.htm • Federici, Silvia, ‘On sexuality as work’ (1975) [tbc as a pdf] • Rich, Adrienne, ‘Compulsory heterosexuality and lesbian existence’ (1980), repr. Journal of Women’s History Vol. 15(3), 2003, https://ezproxy- prd.bodleian.ox.ac.uk:5184/article/48874/pdf • Leeds Revolutionary Feminist Group, ‘Love Your Enemy?’ (Onlywomen Press, 1981) [to be circulated as a pdf] • Campbell, Beatrix, ‘A feminist sexual politics: now you see it, now you don’t’, Feminist Review 5, 1980: 1-18. [tbc as a pdf, but also available via Oxford e-journals] • Willis, Ellen, ‘Feminism, moralism and pornography’, in Powers of Desire (also pub.in the UK as Desire: The Politics of Sexuality, ed. Ann Snitow et al. (NYU Press, 1983). • MacKinnon, Catharine, ‘Not a moral issue’ (1983), in Feminism Unmodified (Harvard UP, 1987)

Week 6: Looking back/ looking forward

In this final session we’ll read two essays looking back at the second wave—one written in the late 1980s (when, as the title suggests, there was an increasing sense of the second wave as a historical moment that had now passed, but a ‘third wave’ had not yet emerged), and the other written in 2001. These texts raise several issues which we might want to explore in discussion, such as the question of ‘post-feminism’ and the ‘backlash’ (a concept later popularised by Susan Faludi’s 1991 book Backlash), and the challenges represented by 1980s ‘sexual difference’ feminism and post-1990s queer theory and politics. The last part of the session will be reserved for each of you to talk briefly about your assignment topic and how you plan to develop your ideas about it.

Required Reading

• Rosenfelt, Deborah and Stacey, Judith, ‘Second thoughts on the second wave’, Feminist Review 27, 1987 (available via Oxford e-journals) • Rudy, Kathy, ‘Radical feminism, lesbian separatism and queer theory’, Feminist Studies, Vol. 27, No. 1 (Spring, 2001), pp. 190-222

FURTHER READING

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 174 of 246

Note: This list is divided into sections which reflect the organisation of the week-by-week programme. What and how much you take from it is up to you. If you want to follow up on a topic for your final assignment, these lists offer a selection of references to use as a starting point. If you want a second wave ‘immersion experience’, you can dip into some of the journalism, novels, memoirs and films listed at the end.

All the print sources listed below are available from at least one of Oxford’s many libraries, and many are available in multiple copies; but they aren’t handily collected in one place: they may be in the Bodleian stacks, in the WS collection at the Taylorian, in the Faculty libraries of English, History or Social Sciences, or in one or more college libraries. So, be aware you will need to plan ahead to get hold of library copies, especially if you want to borrow, by consulting SOLO, the main catalogue, to find out where the books are held.

Feminist histories of/ including the second wave

• Cobble, Dorothy Sue, Gordon, Linda and Henry, Astrid, Feminism Unfinished: A Short, Surprising History of American Women’s Movements (Norton, 2014). • Echols, Alice, Daring to be Bad: Radical Feminism in America 1967-75 (U. Minnesota Press, 1989). • Evans, Sara, Personal Politics: The Roots of Women’s Liberation in the Civil Rights Movement and the New Left (Vintage, 1979). • Giddings, Paula, Where and When I Enter: The Impact of Black Women on Race and Sex in America. (Bantam Books, 1984), especially Part III. • Henry, Astrid, Not My Mother’s Sister: Generational Conflict in Third Wave Feminism (Indiana UP, 2004) • Orleck, Annelise, Rethinking American Women’s Activism (Routledge, 2015), chs 4-6. Especially good on women’s activism outside the autonomous WLM, e.g. in the Labour movement. • Coote, Anna and Beatrix Campbell, Sweet Freedom (Picador, 1982)—deals with the British feminist movement • Mackay, Finn, Radical Feminism: Feminist Activism in Movement (Palgrave 2015)—mainly a history and assessment of the Reclaim the Night movement, but the early chapters are more generally informative on British radical feminism. • Duchen, Claire, Feminism in France from 1968 to Mitterand (Routledge, 1986).

Anthologies of writing from and about second wave feminism in the US, UK and elsewhere (note on the ‘elsewhere’ references: I have given details of collections designed to introduce different national traditions to English-speaking readers, but if you read the relevant language(s) you can also look for the original works)

• Crow, Barbara (ed.) Radical Feminism: A Documentary Reader (NYU Press, 2000). This contains nearly 600 pages of primary source material (including most of the papers I’ve given online links to for class reading in the first three sessions): if you’re particularly interested in US radical feminism in the 60s and 70s it may be worth obtaining your own copy. • Lovell, Terry (ed), British Feminist Thought (Verso, 1990)—actually this is about one major current in British feminist thought, namely socialist feminism. M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 175 of 246

• Mirza, Heidi (ed) British Black Feminism: A Reader (Routledge 1997), especially Part I. • Wandor, Michelene (ed.) The Body Politic: Writings from the WLM in Britain, 1969-72. (Stage 1, 1972) • Bono, Paola and Kemp, Sandra (eds.) Italian Feminist Thought (Oxford UP, 1991)—sections 2, 3, 11 and 12 contain documents from the Italian women’s movement of the 1970s and early 80s. • Herminghouse, Patricia and Mueller, Magda (eds.) German Feminist Writings (Continuum, 2001)—not just about the second wave, but includes the relevant period—with material from both West Germany and the GDR (the former was quite strongly influenced by the Anglo- American tradition). • Marks, Elaine and de Courtivron, Isabelle (eds.) New French Feminisms (Harvester, 1981)—an anthology of (often very) short extracts from a range of writings by feminists based in France. The selection and editorial material make it interesting as evidence of how ‘French feminism’ was presented and received in the US and UK in the early 1980s, but if you’re interested in the work of a specific writer (e.g. Cixous, Irigaray, Kristeva, Wittig), look for the original text (if you read French) or for a more recent translation/ critical edition (or a collection like ’s Kristeva Reader), which will offer a better representation of the work. • Morgan, Robin (ed) Sisterhood is Global (Anchor Books, 1984)—contains short essays summarising the state of feminism in most of the world’s countries in the mid-1980s, with reading suggestions that may be helpful if you’re interested in a specific country.

Theorizing women’s oppression

• Brownmiller, Susan, Against Our Will (Fawcett, 1975). • Dallacosta, Mariarosa and James, Selma (1971) ‘Women and the subversion of the community’. https://libcom.org/library/power-women-subversion-community-della-costa-selma-james (NB: the relevant part, with the title quoted, is buried in the middle of a lot of other stuff on this website). This analysis was the basis for the Wages for Housework movement. • Davis, Angela, Women, Race and Class (Vintage, 1983). The later chapters (11-13) deal with rape, reproductive rights and domestic labour, and they include critiques of Brownmiller and Dallacosta • Delphy, Christine, Close to Home: A Materialist Analysis of Women’s Oppression (Verso 2016) • Dinnerstein, Dorothy, The Rocking of the Cradle and the Ruling of the World (Women’s Press, 1987; originally published in the US in 1976 as The Mermaid and the Minotaur). Drawing on psychoanalytic theory, this argues that sexism and male dominance are effects of the social fact that both male and female children are cared for by women • Dworkin, Andrea, Woman Hating (Penguin, 1976). [content note: very graphic] You can download this (and other works by Dworkin) free at http://radfem.org/dworkin/ • Firestone, Shulamith, The Dialectic of Sex (Verso, 2015) • Greer, Germaine, The Female Eunuch (1970; reissued Harper Perennial 2006) • Lerner, Gerda, The Creation of Patriarchy (OUP, 1986) • Millett, Kate, Sexual Politics [1970] (Virago, 1977)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 176 of 246

• MacKinnon, Catharine, Feminism Unmodified (Harvard UP, 1987). A collection in which a lot of the content is from before 1985 • Rich, Adrienne, Of Woman Born (Virago, 1977) • Solanas, Valerie, SCUM Manifesto (Verso 2015)

Writing by Black feminists and feminists of colour

• Cade Bambara, Toni (ed) The Black Woman (Washington Square Press, 1970). This is an early anthology including both political essays and creative writing. • Davis, Angela, Women, Race and Class (Vintage, 1983) • Giddings, Paula, Where and When I Enter: The Impact of Black Women on Race and Sex in America. (Bantam Books, 1984), especially Part III. • Feminist Review 17 (1984): Many Voices One Chant: Black Feminist Perspectives. • Lorde, Audre, Sister Outsider (Crossing Press, 1984) • Moraga, Cherríe and Anzaldúa, Gloria (eds.) This Bridge Called My Back: Writings by Radical Women of Color (Kitchen Table Press, 1981). This collection is now in its 4th (2015) edition; my reference is to the original. • Mirza, Heidi (ed) British Black Feminism: A Reader (Routledge 1997), especially Part I. • Wallace, Michele, Black Macho and the Myth of the Superwoman (1978; reissued Verso 2015)

Pornography and related controversies

• Carter, Angela, The Sadeian Woman (Virago, 1979) • Cornell, Drusilla (ed) Feminism and Pornography (Oxford UP, 2000). Collection including contributions from both second wave and post-second-wave sources. • Dworkin, Andrea, Pornography: Men Possessing Women (Women’s Press, 1981) • Kappeler, Susanne, The Pornography of Representation (Polity Press, 1986) • MacKinnon, Catharine, Feminism Unmodified (Harvard UP, 1987), Section III • Snitow, Ann et al. (eds.) Powers of Desire (NYU Press, 1983) [the UK edition is titled Desire: the Politics of Sexuality] • Vance, Carole (ed.) Pleasure and Danger: Exploring Women’s Sexuality (Routledge, 1984)

Fiction, memoir, drama and film

US

• Brown, Rita Mae, Rubyfruit Jungle (1973; repr Penguin 2015) • French, Marilyn, The Women’s Room (1977, repr. Virago 2007) • Hong Kingston, Maxine, The Woman Warrior: Memories of a Girlhood Among Ghosts (1975, repr. Picador 2002) • Jong, Erica, Fear of Flying (1973, repr. Vintage 1998) • Kaufman, Sue, Diary of a Mad Housewife (Penguin, 1971) • Lorde, Audre, Zami: A New Spelling of My Name (1982; Crossing Press 2001) • Millett, Kate, Flying (Ballantine, 1975)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 177 of 246

• Morrison, Toni, The Bluest Eye (1970; repr. Vintage, 1999) • Piercy, Marge, Small Changes (Doubleday, 1973) • ----- Woman on the Edge of Time (1979; reissued Del Rey, 2016) • Russ, Joanna, The Female Man (1975, reissued Orion 2010) • Shange, Ntozake, For Colored Girls Who Have Considered Suicide: When the Rainbow is Enuf (Prentice-Hall, 1997). This is a performance piece first seen in 1974: what I’ve listed details for is the text/script but it is also available in recorded performance on DVD. • Walker, Alice, Meridian (1976, reissued Phoenix 2004)

Britain

• Barker, Pat, Union Street (Virago, 1982) • Fairbairns, Zoe, Benefits (Virago, 1979) • Roberts, Michele, A Piece of the Night (Women’s Press, 1978) • Wilson, Anna, Altogether Elsewhere (Onlywomen Press, 1975) • Winterson, Jeanette, Oranges are not the Only Fruit (1985, reissued Vintage, 2014)

Some classic second wave feminist films (* means a DVD is available—with subtitles where relevant—via Oxford’s libraries; ** indicates it’s available in the original language but not with English subtitles)

(dir., Belgium) Jeanne Dielman, 23 Quai du Commerce, 1080 Bruxelles*, 1975. • Agnès Varda (dir., France) One Sings, the Other Doesn’t [L’Une Chante, L’Autre Pas*], 1977. • Helke Sander (dir., Germany) The All-Round Reduced Personality, 1978. • Margarethe von Trotta (dir., Germany) The Second Awakening of Christa Klages, 1978. (Also Die Bleierne Zeit**, 1981, which went by different English language titles in the UK (‘The German Sisters’) and the US (‘Marianne and Juliane’). • Marleen Gorris (dir., Netherlands), . 1982. • Lizzie Borden (dir., USA) Born in Flames*, 1983 and Working Girls*, 1984.

Online archives/resources

BBC broadcasts on second wave feminism, http://www.bbc.co.uk/archive/70sfeminism/

British Library, Spare Rib magazine (the UK’s most-read feminist publication during this period) http://www.bl.uk/spare-rib

British Library, ‘Sisterhood and after’. British movement history resource, including interviews with second wave activists. https://www.bl.uk/sisterhood

Trouble & Strife: the radical feminist magazine, http://www.troubleandstrife.org (a British publication founded in 1983: the archive area of the site contains pdfs of the early print issues, and some later issues contain oral history pieces on the British second wave).

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 178 of 246

Assessment and written work

The regulations differ for Women’s Studies and English students (you should refer to your course handbook for full information on the requirements and submission dates), but in both cases the option is assessed by a piece of written coursework on a topic to be agreed with me. I will make individual appointments to discuss this with each of you in the second half of Michaelmas Term. As noted in the programme, you’ll be asked to present your topic and ideas-in-progress briefly to the group in the final class session.

During the term I will ask for two short pieces of writing, which serve a formative purpose (they do not contribute in any way to the formal assessment of this option; rather they are intended to get you writing, and to enable me to give feedback on specific writing-related issues before you start on a longer and more complicated piece of written work). The requirements for the two pieces are as follows.

Piece (1): a response/reflection paper, to be sent to me (as an email attachment to the address at the top of this document) one day before our first meeting (by noon on Wednesday of 3rd week). Please write a response to one or more of the primary texts (manifestoes and short essays written between 1968 and 1970) which you’ve read for the first and second sessions. It’s entirely up to you how you respond, but here are some questions you could use to prompt reflection. (These are suggestions only: you don’t have to use any of them.) What did you find striking about the text(s)? (It could be something about the content, but it could equally be the language and tone.) How did you react to reading them—positively, negatively or neither? Did they match your expectations of what feminist writing was like in c.1970 or were they surprising? Did they tell you anything you didn’t know about the feminism of the time? How do they compare with the feminist discussions of today? This paper should be no longer than approximately 1000 words (and it’s fine for it to be shorter). Otherwise you can choose how you want to write it (e.g. whether you write in an ‘academic’ or more informal and ‘personal’ style, whether you present a thesis/argument or just a series of observations or questions).

Piece (2): an argument/analysis paper, to be sent to me by noon on Wednesday of 6th week. Choose something (i.e. one thing) you’ve read for this class that makes an argument, and analyse the argument critically. It’s probably easiest to do this if you choose something you disagree with or have reservations about, but it’s also possible to present a critical analysis of something you agree with or are neutral/undecided about. Your paper should offer a fair summary of the argument while also assessing its strengths/weaknesses and advancing reasons/evidence for whatever view you take on it. If you are undecided it should be clear why; ditto if you’re strongly for or against the author’s position. This paper can be up to 2500 words long, though it’s OK to go shorter (there is never any virtue in writing more words than you need to make your point), and it should be written in an ‘academic’ way: if you make reference to other sources (which do not have to be drawn from the reading for this option, they can be anything you think is relevant) then please make sure they are properly cited and referenced in footnotes or a bibliography.

Optional extra: blogging

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 179 of 246

In 2016 I started a blog, Re-reading the Second Wave, as an outlet for writing related to this course (it began when people outside Oxford expressed an interest in seeing the course syllabus and developed from there, though I only maintain it while the course is running). You can find it at https://wordpress.com/view/hyenainpetticoatsblog.wordpress.com. Most posts are written by me, but some were written by students, who either adapted the papers they were required to write for the course or else wrote brief pieces on texts/issues of their choice especially for the blog. If you are interested in contributing yourself, please talk to me about it.

Political Histories of Modern Reading Professor Lloyd Pratt Michaelmas 2018

For many scholars, the history of reading and the history of modernity are inextricable from each other. Precisely those things associated with modern culture—expansion of the franchise, secularisation, liberalism, critique, democratisation in general—would seem to follow from the broadened access to reading identified with the so-called reading and print ‘revolutions’ of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. This seminar interrogates such assumptions about the relation of reading to democratisation.

Our texts will be theories of reading and its political meaning from C18 to the present, and from across the North Atlantic world, including Ruskin, Emerson, Proust, the European Romantics, the African American intellectual tradition, feminist and queer theory, Marxist theory, theories of race and ethnicity, etc. The aim is to develop a clarified sense of which historical traditions of thinking about reading are taken up in the humanities, in general, and in literary studies, in particular, when we aim to produce ‘critical readers’.

The seminar will be structured as an experiment in the ethics and pedagogy of reading. Those enrolled will be expected to have read all of the materials from the reading list in advance of our first meeting in Week 0. At the Week 0 meeting, we will collectively identify six ‘topoi of reading’, each one of which makes an appearance in one or more of the seminar readings. The seminar’s members will then be divided into groups responsible for identifying selections drawn from the reading list that most helpfully illuminate a given topos, as well as for composing a twenty-minute presentation on that topos.

In addition, seminar members will participate in a two-day colloquium in late November, also titled ‘Political Histories of Modern Reading’, that will bring scholars from the UK and abroad to discuss the long history of modern reading. The final reading lists for the seminar and for the colloquium will be provided to seminar members upon their enrolment for this C Course.

The written work for the seminar will include weekly one-page, single-spaced response papers and a final C Course paper. Each seminar member will have at least two one-one one meetings with the C Course tutor.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Michaelmas Term C-Courses Page 180 of 246

Although this seminar is a main option for students on the English and American Studies strand, participation from across the strands is both welcome and encouraged.

Reading List

• Althusser, Louis, et al. Reading Capital. 1965.Trans. Ben Brewster and David Fernbach. London: Verso, 2016 • Apter, Emily. Introduction. Against World Literature. London: Verso, 2013. 1-31 • Berlant, Lauren and Michael Warner. “Sex in Public.” Critical Inquiry, Vol. 24, No. 2, Intimacy. (Winter, 1998), pp. 547-566 • Best, Sharon and Stephen Marcus. “Surface Reading.” Representations. 108.1 (Fall 2009): 1-21 • Cavell, Stanley. Conditions Handsome and Unhandsome: The Constitution of Emersonian Perfectionism. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1990. 1-31 • DuBois, W. E. B. The Souls of Black Folk. New York: Norton, 1999 • Felski, Rita. The Limits of Critique. Chicago: University of Chicago, 2015. 14-52 • Gallop, Jane. Reading Lacan. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1985. 13-31 • Gates, Jr., Henry Louis. The Signifying Monkey: A Theory of African American Literary Criticism. 1988. Twenty-Fifth Anniversary Edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2014. 3-138 • Habermas, Jurgen. The Structural Transformation of the Bourgeois Public Sphere: An Inquiry into a Category of Bourgeois Society. 1962. Trans. Thomas Burger and Frederick Lawrence. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1989 • Johnson, Walter. Soul by Soul: Life inside the Antebellum Slave Market. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1999 • Kaye, Anthony. Joining Places: Slave Neighborhoods in the Old South. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2007. 1-83 • Mbembe, Achille. Critique of Black Reason. Durham: Duke University Press, 2017 • Negt and Kluge, Public Sphere and Experience: Toward an Analysis of the Bourgeois and Proletarian Public Sphere. 1972. Trans. Peter Labanyi, Jamie Owen Daniel, and Assenka Oksiloff. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1993 • Quashie, Kevin. The Sovereignty of Quiet: Beyond Resistance in Black Culture. New Brunswick: Rutgers University Press, 2012 • Rooney, Ellen. “Live Free or Describe: The Reading Effect and the Persistence of Form.” Differences: A Journal of Feminist Cultural Studies. 21.3 (2010): 112-39 • Sedgwick, Eve Sedgwick. “Paranoid Reading and Reparative Reading, Or, You’re So Paranoid You Probably Think this Essay Is About You.” Touching Feeling: Affect, Pedagogy, Performativity. Durham: Duke University Press, 2003. 123-52 • Warner, Michael. Publics and Counterpublics. New York: Zone Books, 2005

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 181 of 246

Hilary Term C-Courses

Old Norse Literature

Professor Heather O’Donoghue ([email protected])

This course is designed to be flexible enough to meet two needs. On the one hand, beginners in Old Norse will be introduced to a varied range of Old Norse Icelandic prose and poetry, and be able to set these texts in their historical and cultural contexts. On the other, those who have already studied some Old Norse will be able to focus on texts directly relevant or complementary to their own interests and expertise. There will be language classes in Old Norse, and a series of introductory classes on the literature, in Michaelmas Term 2018. These classes are mandatory for anyone who wishes to do the option in Hilary Term but has not done any Old Norse at undergraduate level. Prospective students are very welcome to contact Heather O’Donoghue with any queries.

Preliminary Reading List

Language:

• E.V.Gordon, Introduction to Old Norse (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1981) • Michael Barnes, A New Introduction to Old Norse, Part I Grammar (London: Viking Society for • Northern Research, 1999)

Old Norse-Icelandic literature:

• Heather O’Donoghue, Old Norse-Icelandic Literature: A Short Introduction (Blackwell, 2004) • 162 • Preben Meulengracht Sorensen, Saga and Society, transl. John Tucker (Odense: Odense University • Press, 1993) • G. Turville-Petre, Origins of Icelandic Literature (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1953) • E.O.G. Turville-Petre, Scaldic Poetry (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1976) • Margaret Clunies Ross, ed., Old Icelandic Literature and Society (Cambridge: Cambridge University • Press, 2000) • Phillip Pulsiano, ed., Medieval Scandinavia: an encyclopaedia (New York; London: Garland: 1993) • Jenny Jochens, Old Norse Images of Women (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1996) • William Ian Miller, Bloodtaking and peacemaking: feud, law and society in saga Iceland (London; • Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1990) • Carolyne Larrington, et.al., A Handbook to Eddic Poetry (Cambridge, 2016) • Vésteinn Ólason, Dialogues with the Viking Age (University of Chicago Press, 1998)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 182 of 246

Translations:

• The Sagas of the Icelanders: a selection, ed., Viðar Hreinsson (London: Penguin, 2000) • The Complete Sagas of Icelanders, ed.Viðar Hreinsson (five volumes, various translators) (Reykjavík: • Leifur Eiríksson Publishing, 1997)(now being published separately as Penguin Classics, various • translators) • Snorri Sturluson: Edda , trans. Anthony Faulkes (London: Dent, 1987) • The Poetic Edda, trans. Carolyne Larrington (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2014), or trans. Andy Orchard as The Elder Edda (Penguin Classics, 2011)

The Age of Alfred Dr Francis Leneghan [email protected]

Outline: King Alfred of Wessex (871-99) has been credited with not only with the invention of English prose but of the Anglo-Saxon kingdom and even the idea of “Englishness”. But recent scholarship has questioned the extent of the king’s personal involvement in the so-called ‘Alfredian renaissance’. This course interrogates these issues by exploring the burgeoning vernacular literary culture associated with Alfred’s court and its wider impact on English writing and society in the ninth and tenth centuries. Texts will be studied in Old English, so some prior knowledge of the language will be required. Key texts will include the Old English translations of the following works:

• Gregory the Great, Pastoral Care • Boethius, The Consolation of Philosophy • St Augustine, Soliloquies • Psalms 1-50 • Orosius, Seven Books of History Against the Pagans We will also look at other important contemporary vernacular works such as Alfred’s Lawcode (Domboc), Wærferth’s translation of Gregory’s Dialogues, Bald’s Leechbook and The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle (MS A), while considering continental influences on Alfredian writing.

Editions and translations: • Aykerman, J. Y. et al. The Whole Works of King Alfred the Great: With Preliminary Essays, Illustrative of the History, Arts, and Manners, of the Ninth Century, 2 vols (London, 1858). [Full translations of the OE Orosius, Laws (with Alfred’s Preface), Boethius, and Soliloquies; readable as a pdf on solo] • Bately, Janet M., ed. The Old English Orosius, EETS, ss. 6 (Oxford, 1980)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 183 of 246

• Browne, Bishop G. F. King Alfred’s Books (London, 1920). [Translation of excerpts from OE Soliloquies, Dialogues, Orosius, Pastoral Care, Bede, Boethius] • Carnicelli, Thomas A., ed. King Alfred’s Version of St. Augustine’s ‘Soliloquies’ (Cambridge, MA, 1969) • Godden, Malcolm, transl. The Old English History of the World: An Anglo-Saxon Rewriting of Orosius (Harvard, 2016). [Facing-page translation of OE Orosius] • Godden, Malcolm and Susan Irvine, eds, The Old English Boethius, 2 vols (Oxford, 2010) • ———— ed. and transl. The Old English Boethius with Verse Prologues and Epilogues Associated with King Alfred (Harvard, 2012) [Facing-page translation of C-text, i.e. prosimetrical OE Boethius, as well as various Alfredian prologues and epilogues] • Hargrove, Henry L., transl. King Alfred’s Old English Version of St. Augustine’s Soliloquies, Turned into Modern English (New York, 1904) • Hecht, Hans, ed., Bischof Wærferths von Worcester Übersetzung der Dialoge Gregors des Grossen, Bibliothek der Angelsächsischen Prosa, 5 (Liepzig: 1900; repr. Darmstadt:, 1965) • Keynes, Simon and Michael Lapidge. Alfred the Great: Asser’s ‘Life of King Alfred’ and Other Contemporary Sources (London, 1983). [Translation of excerpts from Boethius, Soliloquies, Laws (without preface), Preface to Pastoral Care, Alfred’s Will] • Liebermann, Felix (ed.). 1903. Die Gesetze der Angelsachsen, Volume 1: Text und Übersetzung. Halle: Max Niemeyer. [Alfred’s Laws (with Preface – Einleitung)] • O’Neill, Patrick P. ed. King Alfred’s Old English Prose Translation of the First Fifty Psalms (Cambridge, MA, 2001). • ———— ed. and transl. Old English Psalms (Harvard, 2016) [Facing-page translation of the OE text of the Paris Psalter, i.e. Prose Psalms 1-50 and Metrical Psalms 51-150]. • Preston, Todd, ed. and transl. King Alfred’s Book of Laws: A Study of the ‘Domboc’ and Its Influence on English Identity (Jefferson, NC, 2012). • Swanton, Michael, transl. Anglo-Saxon Prose (London, 1993). [Translations of Orosius (Ohthere and Wulfstan), Preface to Pastoral Care, Preface to Soliloquies] • Sweet, Henry, ed. and transl. King Alfred’s West-Saxon Version of Gregory’s Pastoral Care, 2 vols, Rolls Series (London, 1887-89) Recommend preliminary reading:

• Abels, Richard. Alfred the Great: War, Kingship and Culture in Anglo-Saxon England (London, 1998) • Anlezark, Daniel. Alfred the Great (Kalamazoo, MI, 2017) • Bately, Janet M. The Literary Prose of King Alfred’s Reign: Translation or Transformation? (London, 1980) • ————. ‘Did King Alfred Actually Translate Anything? The Integrity of the Alfredian Canon Revisited’, Medium Ævum 78 (2009), 189-215 • Discenza, Nicole G. and Paul E. Szarmach. (eds). A Companion to Alfred the Great, Brill Companions to the Christian Tradition 58 (Leiden: Brill, 2014 • Foot, Sarah. ‘The Making of Angelcynn: English Identity Before the Norman Conquest’, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society, 6th ser. 6 (1996), 25-49 M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 184 of 246

• Frantzen, Allen J. King Alfred (Boston, 1986) • Godden, Malcolm. ‘Did King Alfred Write Anything?’, Medium Ævum 76 (2007), 1-23 • ————. ‘The Alfredian Project and its Aftermath: Rethinking the Literary History of the Ninth and Tenth Centuries’, Proceedings of the British Academy 162 (2009), 93-122 • ————. ‘Alfredian Prose: Myth and Reality’, Filologia Germanica 5 (2013), 131-58 • Karkov, Catherine E. The Ruler Portraits of Anglo-Saxon England (Woodbridge, 2004), pp. 23-52 • Pratt, David. The Political Thought of King Alfred the Great (Cambridge, 2007) • ————. ‘Problems of Authorship and Audience in the Writings of King Alfred the Great’, in Lay Intellectuals in the Carolingian World, ed. Patrick Wormald and Janet L. Nelson (Cambridge, 2007), pp. 162-91 • Waite, Greg. Annotated Bibliographies of Old and Middle English Literature Volume VI: Old English Prose Translations of King Alfred’s Reign (Cambridge, 2000) • Whitelock, Dorothy. ‘The Prose of Alfred’s Reign’, in Continuations and Beginnings: Studies in Old English Literature, ed. E. G. Stanley (London, 1966), pp. 67-103

The Pearl Poet Professor Helen Barr

Hilary Term

This course will explore a range of critical approaches to the four poems contained in British Library Cotton Nero A.x: Pearl, Patience, Cleanness, and Sir Gawain and the Green Knight. The topics we will discuss will include time and space, gender and sexuality, aesthetics, social environment, and theology.

Preliminary reading:

• Poems of the Pearl Manuscript ed. M.Anderson and R.A.Waldron (Exeter UP, 1987) • Anderson, J. J. Language and Imagination in the Gawain-Poems (2005) • R.J.Blanch, M.Y. Miller and J.N.Wasserman, eds., Text and Matter: New Critical Perspectives on the Pearl-Poet (1991) • R.J. Blanch and Julian N Wasserman, From Pearl and to Gawain: Form to fynisment (1995) • Bowers, John M., R. Barton Palmer, and Tison Pugh, An Introduction to the Gawain Poet (2012). • Brewer, Derek, and Jonathan Gibson. A Companion to the Gawain-Poet (1997) • Putter, Ad. Sir Gawain and the Green Knight and French Arthurian Romance (1995) • ---, An Introduction to the Gawain-Poet (1996) • A.C.Spearing, The Gawain-Poet (1970) • Stanbury, Sarah. Seeing the Gawain-Poet: Description and the Act of Perception (1991)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 185 of 246

Early Modern Biography Professor Peter McCullough & Dr Kate Bennett Hilary Term 2019

Oxford English has long been distinguished by its commitment to historical approaches to literature. Such an approach is at the heart of the M.St. itself, not least in its attention to periodicity, authors, and the political, social, and material contexts that shaped writing at precise historical moments in its production and reception. Work in this tradition offers some of the most exciting research opportunities in the field, but requires knowing about the lives of those involved in the production and reception of the texts we study. These include not only authors themselves, but also, inter alia, their families, teachers, patrons, dedicatees, printers, copyists, early readers, imitators, and detractors. Relatively few ‘major authors’ (most of them men) have been the subject of a recent scholarly biography, and even those have their gaps and blind spots. So we frequently need to undertake original, often archival, research to find even basic facts about the lives of many of the early moderns we would like to know more about. Doing so of course requires knowing what sources to look for and where to find them. But, crucially, it also requires learning how to interpret the radically different kinds of biographical evidence we might find in sources that can be as various as letters, government papers, parish registers, court cases, portraits, pedigrees, marginalia, libels, wills, apprenticeship bonds, or a botanical specimen pressed in a book. The early modern period also saw the beginnings of ‘life writing’ or ‘biography’ as we have come to understand it, but originating from impulses often different from our own, not least eulogies in funeral sermons, the ‘godly life’ tradition, prefaces to posthumously published works of an author, responses to or constructions of celebrity, and collections of lives promulgated as political acts of memorialisation.

This course will hold in creative tension both the biographical efforts of early moderns and the biographical needs and achievements of modern scholars, and place a strong emphasis on acquiring the research skills necessary for gathering biographical evidence and interpreting it carefully and effectively. Students will be required to use the unrivalled resources of the Bodleian, but also strongly encouraged to pursue creative avenues of biographical research in, for example, other archival repositories, college libraries, and county record offices, and to be alert to material evidence found elsewhere such as monuments in churches, art and artefacts in museums, and surviving built or natural environments. Work in original sources will be an outstanding way for students to consolidate palaeographical and bibliographical skills learned on the ‘B-course’.

Presentations. Biographical research (not unlike palaeography or learning a language) is a skill best learned by doing, and weekly assignments and active participation in workshop style seminars will play a key role. The first seminar will be devoted entirely to agenda-setting student presentations (described below). In weeks 2-5 fifteen minutes will be set aside to share and discuss results from of a short biographical assignment or ‘treasure hunt’ assigned the week before (e.g., to find a female subject’s name before marriage, an annotated book, a will, or evidence of profession or trade, or to disambiguate persons with

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 186 of 246

the same name). Week 6 will give each student the chance to present a short overview of their planned project for examination.

Assessment. Students will be required to submit in 5th week a piece of work (maximum 5,000 words) for written feedback; topics will be discussed in advance with the tutors, and most likely be an extension of work done for one of the previous ‘treasure hunts’, and focussed primary source material. The final examined piece of work may, but is not required to be, related to the formative work. The examined essay should demonstrate a combination of primary research skills and the application of current methodologies to them. It may take a number of forms, including: a biography (or aspect of one) of an early modern individual or group; an interrogation of a particular class of evidence discussed with reference to a range of biographical subjects (e.g. ‘using widows’ wills’, or ‘women in livery company records’, or ‘can we trust anecdote?’); or a critical assessment of existing biographical work that uses further new research to engage and refine it (e.g. filling gaps in an ODNB article, or a sustained critique, or revision of an aspect of, a major modern biographical monograph, or a consideration of what biography is expected/necessary/helpful in an introduction to a scholarly edition of literary works).

Term Plan. More detailed instructions and bibliography will be distributed before the start of term. The short descriptions and core reading below should give students a clear sense of course priorities, and material to begin reading during the vacations if they opt for the course. See also below a short selection of further indicative reading which illustrates a range of the biographical methodologies and research opportunities in the field.

Week 1 Student Presentations 1: Encountering Biographical Research: Choose a biographical subject from the period for whom there is not a standard scholarly biography, (but who may have an Oxford Dictionary of National Biography entry) and try to find as many as you can of the following: 1) mother’s or wife’s name before marriage, 2) a life record (baptism, marriage, burial), 3) a holograph manuscript, 4) an image (e.g. portrait), 5) appearance in a legal document, 6) evidence of school or university career, 7) anecdote, mention, or assessment by a contemporary or near-contemporary, 8) an example of ‘misinformation’, ‘bad evidence’, or missing information that would be valuable, 9) a pertinent surviving physical context or artefact (e.g. house, school, landscape, book with ownership evidence, church monument). Further guidance will be circulated during Michaelmas Term, but a vital part of this exercise will not only be to share discoveries (‘successes’), but also to acknowledge the difficulties encountered and to begin to identify research strategies to address them.

Week 2 Sources: Where to Find Them and How to Use Them. An intensive introduction to the primary sources of biographical evidence now available in print, archives, and digital databases. Trends in historical literary criticism, social history, and the huge popularity of amateur family history have made vast tranches of material much more accessible than ever, but many ‘health warnings’ apply to them. We will cover here the major printed sources (Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Historical Manuscript Commission reports, History of Parliament, calendars of State Papers, school and university registers, journals and publications of topographical, heraldic, and antiquarian societies, Victoria County Histories), core life records (parish registers), testamentary records (wills and administrations), records relating to professions, property, and law (the Church, livery companies, manor courts, Chancery, Exchequer, M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 187 of 246

Admiralty, auction catalogues) and art and architecture. Particular attention will be given to the complexities (and flaws) of indexes and finding aids and how best to use them, how to maximise digital searches and associated databases of images of original documents (e.g. The National Archives ‘Discovery’, Ancestry.com, digital catalogues of county record office collections).

Week 3 Early Lives. We will consider the roots of English biography in funeral sermons and the tradition of ‘the godly life’, with particular attention to what early moderns considered to be appropriate ‘evidence’, and how that was shaped by the original contexts and motives behind such written lives.

Primary Texts:

• Izaak Walton, ‘The Life and Death of Dr. Donne’ in Donne, LXXX Sermons (1640) and in Lives (1670), ed. G. Saintsbury (Oxford, 1927) • John Buckeridge, ‘A Sermon Preached at the Fvneral of . . . Lancelot late Lord Bishop of Winchester’, in Andrewes, XCVI Sermons (1629), 5Q2r – 5R6v • Henry Isaacson, An Exact Narration of the Life and Death of . . . Lancelot Andrewes (1651)

Secondary Reading:

• ODNB entries for Donne, Walton, Andrewes, and Isaacson • Jessica Martin, Walton’s Lives: Conformist Commemorations and the Rise of Biography (2001)

Week 4 How to read the unreliable, the undignified, or 'pleasant' story. We will consider how to approach those unorthodox biographical materials which preserve neither the strict facts nor the subject's dignity. These were usually ephemeral, transmitted orally or in manuscript, but some were printed. George Villiers, 2nd duke of Buckingham, was the subject of 'personal satires of singular venom and grossness', while the associates of Isaac Barrow, master of Trinity College, Cambridge, affectionately preserved anecdotal 'particulars which are gratefull to talk over among Friends' but which were 'not so proper perhaps to appear in a publick Writing.' Town anecdotes were highly ephemeral, while Samuel Butler's character of the country bumpkin has him endlessly retelling very 'old family stories and jests'.

Primary texts:

• The Life of Ralph Kettell in John Aubrey, Brief Lives (ed. Bennett, Oxford, 2015), I. xlii–lv; 174— 83 • II. Harold Love, English Clandestine Satire 1660-1702 (Oxford, 2004), Walter Pope, a Brief Account of Isaac Barrow in the Life of Seth, Lord Bishop of Salisbury (London, 1697), 128–70

Secondary texts:

• Steven N. Zwicker, 'Why Are They Saying These Terrible Things about John Dryden?', Essays in Criticism vol. 64 no. 2 (2014), 158—79 • Plays, Poems, and Miscellaneous Writings Associated with George Villiers Second Duke of Buckingham ed. by Robert D. Hume and Harold Love, 2 vols. (Oxford, 2007), I. vii-li; 231–38

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 188 of 246

Week 5 Antiquarian lives. 'Damn him, he has told a great deal of truth, but where the devil did he learn it?' (Francis Atterbury, on Gilbert Burnet's History of his Own Time). Biographical questions that we might want to ask were also posed by early-modern readers of printed lives; and writers of 'secret' lives were extremely resourceful in their use of new and innovative historical sources. Many of these sources, such as those compiled by Clarendon, Aubrey, and Wood, are in the Bodleian Library, in the form of massive and under-explored manuscript and print collections. We will examine a group of late 17th c (and early 18th c.) biographies which aimed to tell the candid story of their own times in a culture of censorship; and consider how to research, not just a literary text or texts, but a collection. This class will be held in the Weston library, where we will examine items from the Wood and Aubrey collections.

Primary texts:

John Aubrey, Brief Lives with An Apparatus for the Lives of our English Mathematical Writers 2 vols. (Oxford, 2015)

• Francis Potter (I. 184–95), • Dr William Harvey (I. 195–204) • Sir Francis Bacon (I. 205–27) • John Hoskyns (I. 412–20) • Anthony Wood, Athenae Oxonienses (London, 1691)

Please look at some of the following:

• Richard Hooker (I. 262–5) • John Rainolds (I. 289) • Henry Lyte (I. 293–4) • Nicholas Hill (I. 312–3) • Walter Raleigh (I. 369–74) • Thomas James (I. 458–61) • Robert Burton (I. 534–5) • James Shirley (II. 260–5) • James Harrington (II. 436–42)

Please find one item (inscription, monument, sundial, jewel, manuscript, nativity, book) alluded to by either Aubrey or Wood and give a brief report to the class).

Week 6 Student Presentations 2: Each student will give a prospective report on their planned final research topic, for group discussion and tutors’ feedback.

Related Further Reading

Oxford Dictionary of National Biography. Students should become obsessively habitual users of this unrivalled collection of lives; throughout the M.St. you should read the ODNB entry for anyone you

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 189 of 246

encounter (and you will be surprised how many subjects merit an entry). Here you can begin to internalise some of the formal conventions of biographical writing, get a quick sense of what is and isn’t known about someone – and begin to experiment with original sources by paying close attention to the citations gathered at the end of each article under the headings ‘Sources’, ‘Archives’, ‘Likenesses’, and ‘Wealth at Death’, many of which are hyper-linked to institutional websites and finding aids.

Representative Scholarly Biographies and Editions

• Kate Bennett, ed., John Aubrey: Brief Lives with an Apparatus for the Lives of our English Mathematical Writers (Oxford, 2015) • R C Bald, John Donne: a Life (Oxford, 1970) • Reid Barbour, Sir Thomas Browne: a Life (Oxford, 2013) • David Colclough, ed., The Oxford Edition of the Sermons of John Donne, Volume III: Sermons Preached at the Court of Charles I (Oxford, 2013), ‘Introduction’ • Ian Donaldson, Ben Jonson: a Life (Oxford, 2011) • Katherine Duncan-Jones, Sir Philip Sidney: Courtier Poet (New Haven, 1991) • Andrew Hadfield, Edmund Spenser: a Life (Oxford, 2012) • M P Hannay, Philip’s Phoenix: Mary Sidney, Countess of Pembroke (Oxford, 1990) • Diarmaid MacCulloch, Thomas Cranmer (New Haven & London, 1996) • Peter McCullough, ed., Lancelot Andrewes: Selected Sermons and Lectures (Oxford, 2005), ‘Introduction’ • James Wynn, John Dryden and His World (New Haven & London, 1987)

Specialised Biographical Monographs

Gemma Allen, The Cooke Sisters: Education, Piety and Politics in Early Modern England (Manchester, 2013). The lives of three of the most learned early modern women told through their education and surviving books.

Lena Cowen Orlin, Locating Privacy in Tudor London (Oxford, 2007). A remarkable reconstruction of the life of a mid-Tudor gentlewoman, Alice Barnham, using a brilliant range of material and archival evidence. (The choice of title itself raises interesting questions about how biography is perceived by and marketed for the academy.)

Henry Woudhuysen, Sir Philip Sidney and the Circulation of Manuscripts, 1558-1640. Life and afterlife in manuscripts.

Monographs about Early Modern Biography

• Andrea Walkden, Private Lives Made Public (Pittsburgh, Penn., Duquesne University Press, 2016) • Richard Wendorf, The Elements of Life (Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1990) • Jane Darcy, Melancholy and Literary Biography, 1640--1816 (New York, Palgrave, Macmillan, 2013)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 190 of 246

• Kevin Sharpe and Steven N. Zwicker, Writing Lives (Oxford, OUP, 2008) • Adam Smyth, ed., A History of English Autobiography (Cambridge: CUP, 2016) • Adam Smyth, Autobiography in Early Modern England (Cambridge: CUP, 2010)

Articles To Illustrate a Range of Biographical Sources and Approaches

• Peter McCullough, ‘Print, Publication, and Religious Politics in Caroline England’, The Historical Journal, 51.2 (June 2008), 285-313. A ‘trade biography’ of a London printer • ---, ‘Robert Veysey of Chimney: “From Nothing to a Very Great Estate”’, Oxoniensia, LXXXII (2017), 59-83. An orgy of local and family history sources used to document the origins of a rare lower-gentry family library bequeathed to an Oxford college • Claude Rawson and Aaron Santesso (eds.), John Dryden (1631-1700): His Politics, His Plays, and His Poets (2004). Excellent, includes Harold Love's essay 'Dryden, Rochester, and the Invention of the "Town"

The Forensic Imagination Professor Lorna Hutson

Hilary Term, 2019

Roberto Unger proposes that society ‘reveals through its law the innermost secrets of the manner in which it holds men together’. In sixteenth-century England, those innermost secrets were themselves in productive turmoil, as legal institutions and jurisdictions were being transformed. The English Reformation, for example, enlarged the common law’s ordinary powers, altering the nature of spiritual jurisdiction and drawing critical attention to the monarch’s ‘extraordinary’ powers. At the same time, an exponential growth in litigation led to a general law-mindedness and an identification of legal procedure with political rights. In plays and stories, family dynamics and emotions tend to be legally inflected. Heirs, younger brothers, daughters, bastards are all legal as well as familial identities. Both comedies and tragedies are preoccupied with the manipulation of marriage law, contract and inheritance. In grammar school, classical forensic rhetoric underpinned literary composition of all kinds. Fiction and drama are consequently preoccupied with construing, from outward signs and proofs, the secrets of others’ intentions. Conscience, the forum of inward judgement, undergoes transformation by the changed relations of spiritual and secular jurisdictions. The period also sees the emergence of political theology in the doctrine of the King’s Two Bodies.

We will cover the following topics: 1) forensic rhetoric in law and literature; 2) concepts of witnessing in law and literature; 3) detection and providence in narrative; 4) contract and conscience; 5) sexuality and consent; 6) political theology.

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 191 of 246

Week 1. Forensic rhetoric: status theory, artificial proof and topics of circumstance.

In this seminar, we will examine the considerable overlap between classical forensic rhetoric (legal argument) and the modes of literary composition taught in 16th century grammar schools such as Shakespeare’s, Marlowe’s, Spenser’s. We’ll read Quintilian on ‘status theory’, artificial proof and the topics of circumstance and look at the way these elements work in Shakespeare’s Rape of Lucrece (1594). We will also consider how these techniques might adapted to dramatic writing: each student will bring to class one example of a speech made by a character in a play which ‘reports’ something supposed to have happened offstage, and we will look at the status of such ‘reports’ as forms of proof or witness- statements.

Reading:

• Quintilian, Institutia oratoria (‘The orator’s education’) trans. Donald Russell (Harvard, 2001) book 3, chs (on status theory); 4, chs 2-5 (on narrative) and book 5 (on proofs). Cicero • Shakespeare, The Rape of Lucrece in The Complete Sonnets and Poems ed. Colin Burrow (Oxford, 2002) • Kathy Eden, ‘Legal Proof and Tragic Recognition: The Aristotelian Grounds for Discovery’, Poetic and Legal Fiction in the Aristotelian Tradition (Princeton University Press, 1986), 724 • Barbara J. Shapiro, “Classical Rhetoric and the English Law of Evidence’ in Rhetoric and Law in Early Modern Europe ed. Victoria Kahn and Lorna Hutson (New Haven: Yale University Press, 2001) 54-72 • Quentin Skinner, Forensic Shakespeare (Oxford University Press, 2014), 11-48 • Lorna Hutson, Circumstantial Shakespeare (OUP, 2015), 1-35, 76-86 • William Weaver, “O, teach me how to make mine own excuse”: Forensic Performance in Lucrece’, Shakespeare Quarterly, 59 (2008) 424-30

Week 2. Legal epistemologies: the witness and the jury trial.

In the sixteenth century, justice systems all over Europe were reformed, instituting professional prosecutors and strict tariffs of proof. England alone adapted its nonprofessional institutions, the justice of peace and the jury trial, to new roles of evidence gathering and fact-trying. In this seminar, we will discuss what English legal procedure implies about how knowledge, ‘facts’ and witnessing. We will also look at models of how this epistemology might apply to ways of knowing in drama, and ask how witnessing and modes of artificial and inartificial proof might work in dramatic texts. Hamlet will be our literary exemplar (the assumption will be that students have read it!), but questions of witnessing have a much wider relevance for thinking about early modern drama and literature generally.

Reading:

• Shakespeare, Hamlet ed. Ann Thomson and Neil Taylor

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 192 of 246

• John H., Langbein, Prosecuting Crime in the Renaissance: England, Germany, France (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1974), especially ch. 5 • Andrea Frisch, ‘The Witness and the Judge’, Inventing the Eyewitness: Witnessing and Testimony in Early Modern France (Chapel Hill: 2004) 21-40 • Christopher W. Brooks, ‘Courts, lawyers and legal thought under the early Tudors’ in Law, Politics and Society in Early Modern England (Cambridge, 2008) 1-29 • J. H. Baker, ‘Criminal Courts and Procedure at Common law, 1550-1800’, Crime in England 1550- 1800 ed. J. S. Cockburn (Princeton, N. J., 1977), 49-71 • Barbara Shapiro, A Culture of Fact: England, 1550-1720 (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 2000) 8-33 • Adele C. Scafuro, ‘Acting Before Witnesses’ in The Forensic Stage: Settling Disputes in Graeco- Roman New Comedy (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997), 42-50 • Lorna Hutson, The Invention of Suspicion (Oxford, 2007), 259-270 • John Kerrigan, Revenge Tragedy: Aeschylus to Armageddon (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1996). • Holger Syme, Theatre and Testimony in Shakespeare’s England: A Culture of Mediation (Cambridge, 2012)

Week 3. Crimes of blood.

For this week, each student will choose a murder pamphlet from EEBO and will analyze its representation of hierarchies of social agency and its rhetoric of proof and of providential discovery.

• Malcolm Gaskill, ‘Crimes of blood and their representation’ and ‘Murder, prosecution and proof’ in Crime and Mentalities in Early Modern England (Cambridge, 2000), 203-241, 242- 280 • Cynthia Herrup, ‘From crime to criminal accusation’, The Common Peace: Participation and the Criminal Law in Seventeenth Century England, 67-92 • Lorna Hutson, ‘Providence and Due Process’, Invention of Suspicion, 271-277 • Subha Mukherji, ‘Evidence and representation in “the theatre of God’s judgements”’, Law and Representation in Early Modern Drama (Cambridge, 2007) 55-94. • Peter Lake and Michael Questier, The Anti-Christ’s Lewd Hat: Protestants, Papists and Players in Post-Reformation England (Yale, 2002)

Week 4. Contract, Equity and Conscience.

This week we turn to the question of secularization: before the Reformation, the spiritual courts had jurisdiction over conscience through confession. How did the post-reformation English common law adjudicate questions of conscience or of inward intention? What did this imply for the literary representation of inwardness?

Reading

• Milton, Samson Agonistes ed. John Carey Milton: Complete Shorter Poems (Longman, 1968, 1997) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 193 of 246

• Victoria Kahn, ‘Language and the Bond of Conscience’, in Wayward Contracts: The Crisis of Political Obligation in England, 1640-1674 (Princeton, 2004) 33-56. • Abraham Stoll, Conscience in Early Modern English Literature (Cambridge, 2017) chs. 1 and 6 • Kathy Eden, ‘Poetry and Equity: Aristotle’s Defense of Fiction’, Poetic and Legal Fiction in the Aristotelian Tradition (Princeton University Press, 1986) 25-61 • John Guy, 'Law, Equity and Conscience in Henrican Jurist Thought' in John Guy & Alistair Fox, Reassessing the Henrican Age: Humanism, Politics and Reform 1500-1550 (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1986) 179-98 • Alan Cromartie, ‘Epiekeia and Conscience’ in The Oxford Handbook of English Law and Literature ed. L. Hutson (Oxford, 2017) 320-36. • David Harris Sacks, ‘The Promise and the contract in Early Modern England: Slade’s Case in Perspective’, in Rhetoric and Law in Early Modern Europe ed. Kahn and Hutson, 28-53. Christopher Brooks, ‘The politics of jurisdiction I: the liberty of the subject and the ecclesiastical polity 1560- c.1610’, Law, Politics and Society in Early Modern England (Cambridge, 2008) 93-123

Week 5: Consent, Proof and Sexuality.

This week we will look at two plays which in which legal epistemologies or ways of knowing are dramatized in relation to problems of proving consent in marriage formation and proving paternity in bastardy cases. Students will need to familiarize themselves briefly with the common law doctrine of ‘coverture’ (described in Baker) and with the canon law’s modes of proving consent in marriage formation (described in Mukherji, Ingram, Gowing).

Reading:

• John Webster, The Devils Law Case (1619) and John Webster and William Rowley, A Cure for a Cuckold (1624) in The Duchess of Malfi and Other Plays ed. René Weiss (Oxford Worlds Classics, 1996) • J. H. Baker, Introduction to Legal History (1979) 395, ‘femme coverte’ and ‘coverture’. Martin Ingram, ‘Matrimonial Causes: Marriage Formation’ in Church Courts, Sex and Marriage, 189-218 • Laura Gowing, ‘The Economy of Courtship’ in Domestic Dangers: Women, Words and Sex in Early Modern London, 139-179 • Martin Ingram, ‘Matrimonial Causes: Marriage Formation’ in Church Courts, Sex and Marriage, 189-218 • Subha Mukherji, ‘ “When women go to law, the devil is full of business”: women, law and dramatic realism’, Law and Representation in Early Modern Drama (Cambridge, 2006) 20632. [see also chapter 1 on the formation of marriage] • R.H.Helmholz, ‘Bastardy Litigation in Medieval England’, The American Journal of Legal History, 4 (1969) 360-383

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 194 of 246

• Bradin Cormack, ‘“To Law for our Children: Norm and Jurisdiction in Webster, Rowley and Heywood’s Cure for a Cuckold in A Power to do Justice: Jurisdiction, English Literature and the Rise of the Common Law, 1509-1625 (Chicago: 2008) 291-329 • Tim Stretton, ‘Contract and Conjugality’ in The Oxford Handbook of English Law and Literature ed. Lorna Hutson (Oxford, 2016) 410-30

Week 6. Political theologies: The King’s Two Bodies.

This week we’ll look at the early twentieth century reading of ‘political theology’ into Renaissance legal and literary texts. We will discuss various literary-critical and political science interpretations of Kantorowicz’s book, The King’s Two Bodies (1957). Students will also be asked to look at an example of the writings of the lawyer, Edmund Plowden, from whom Kantorowicz drew his theory, and to consider Plowden’s innovativeness as a theorist of equity and writer of law reports. We’ll discuss two Shakespeare plays, one about England (Richard II) and one about Britain (Cymbeline) as contrasting dramatizations of ‘the body politic’ conceived as a geopolitical entity.

Reading:

• Shakespeare, Richard II and Shakespeare, Cymbeline. • Ernst Kantorowicz, The King’s Two Bodies (Princeton,1957 – repr. 1997) • Marie Axton, Queen’s Two Bodies: Drama and the Elizabethan Succession (London: Royal Historical Society, 1977) • Lorna Hutson, ‘Not the King’s Two Bodies: Reading the ‘Body Politic’ in Shakespeare’s Henry IV, parts 1 and 2’, in Rhetoric and Law in Early Modern Europe ed. Victoria Kahn and Lorna Hutson (New Haven: Yale University Press, 2001) 166-198 • Victoria Kahn, ‘Political Theology and Fiction in The King’s Two Bodies’, Representations, 106 (2009) 77-101 • Alan Cromartie, The Constitutionalist Revolution (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2006), ch. 4 or Alan Cromartie, ‘The Constitutionalist Revolution: The Transformation of Political Culture in Early Stuart England’, Past and Present 163 (1999) 76-120 • Constance Jordan, Shakespeare’s Monarchies: Ruler and Subject in the Romances (Ithaca and London: Cornell, 1997) • Henry Turner, The Corporate Commonwealth (Chicago, 2016) • Bradin Cormack, ‘ “To Stride a Limit”: Imperium, Crisis and Accommodation in Shakespeare’s Cymbeline and Pericles’, A Power to do Justice: Jurisdiction, English Literature and the Rise of the Common Law, 1509-1625 (Chicago: 2008) 227-290

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 195 of 246

Thinking With The Faerie Queene

Dr Joe Moshenska [email protected]

In the sixth of his Meditations, René Descartes discussed a thousand-sided shape (a ‘chiliagon’), which, he claimed, could be understood but not imagined. Whereas a small shape like a triangle can be pictured by my mind, I have only “a confused representation of some figure” when imagining a chiliagon: I might envisage myself traversing its thousand sides one by one, but I could hardly experience the shape as a whole in all of its details.

The Faerie Queene is a poetic chiliagon: its vast sprawl is a profound challenge to the reader, all the more so because of its finely-wrought verbal texture that often seems to demand attention moment by moment (it’s even harder to count one’s way round the thousand sides of a shape if each one is distractingly ornamental). In this course we will, on the most basic level, work our way sequentially through Spenser’s poem and ask what we are to do with it, and what it seems to want to do with (or to) us. We will familiarise ourselves with Spenser’s habits of thought and his technical virtuosity on the level of the poetic line, the stanza, and, the architecture of the poem as a whole. As we move through The Faerie Queene, however, we will treat each of its books not only as an autonomous entity, but as an intense point of convergence for many central early modern debates – poetic, cultural and political. Topics to be considered along the way will include: epic; romance; allegory; lyric; gender and sexuality; empire and colonialism; virtue ethics. We will also familiarise ourselves with some of Spenser’s shorter poems, and with recent debates in Spenser criticism. Our priority, however, will be to make our way, in one another’s company, through the plains and labyrinths of The Faerie Queene itself.

Text: We will use the Longman edition of The Faerie Queene, second revised edition, ed. A.C. Hamilton, with Hiroshi Yamashita, Toshiyuki Suzuki & Shohachi Fukuda.

Essential preparatory reading: these are readings focused on the basic unit of The Faerie Queene – the stanza form that Spenser invented for it – and some general questions of how it contains and makes its meanings, all of which will be helpful for the more thematically organised approaches of the weekly seminars.

• Paul Alpers, ‘Narrative and Rhetoric in The Faerie Queene,’ SEL 2 (1962), 27-46 • Harry Berger, Jr., ‘Narrative as Rhetoric in The Faerie Queene,’ ELR 21 (1991), 3-48 • Martha Craig, ‘The Secret Wit of Spenser’s Language,’ in Elizabethan Poetry: Modern Essays in Criticism, ed. Paul Alpers, 447-72 • William Empson, Seven Types of Ambiguity, pp. 33-4 • Kenneth Gross, ‘Shapes of Time: On the Spenserian Stanza,’ Spenser Studies 19 (2004), 27-35 • Theresa Krier, ‘Time Lords: Rhythm and Interval in Spenser’s Stanzaic Narrative,’ Spenser Studies 21 (2006), 1-19 M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 196 of 246

• C.S. Lewis, The Allegory of Love, ch. 7

In addition, while Spenser’s sources will not be the focus of the seminar, it will be helpful to have a working knowledge of his most persistent intertexts, especially Virgil’s Aeneid, Ovid’s Metamorphoses, Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales, and Ariosto’s Orlando Furioso. Anybody who would like advice on ways into these works is welcome to contact me by e-mail.

Week 1: Allegory and Interpretation

Primary Texts:

The Faerie Queene, Book 1 and proem; dedicatory sonnets; ‘Letter to Raleigh.’

Secondary Reading:

• Gordon Teskey, ‘Allegory,’ in The Spenser Encyclopedia, ed. A.C. Hamilton; • Paul de Man, ‘The Rhetoric of Temporality’ in Blindness and Insight • Maureen Quilligan, The Language of Allegory, ch.1: ‘The Text’ • Stephen Orgel, ‘Spenser from the Margins,’ in The Reader in the Book.

Week 2: Bodies Politic

Primary Texts: • The Faerie Queene, Book 2 • Spenser, A View of the State of Ireland, ed. Andrew Hadfield & Willy Maley (selections)

Secondary Reading: • Stephen Greenblatt, Renaissance Self-Fashioning, ch. 4 • Richard McCabe, Spenser’s Monstrous Regiment, chs. 2 & 6; Michael Schoenfeldt, Bodies and Selves in Early Modern England, ch.2

Week 3: The Genders of Romance

Primary Texts: The Faerie Queene, Book 3.

Secondary Reading: • Patricia Parker, ‘Romance,’ in The Spenser Encyclopedia, ed. A.C. Hamilton • Fredric Jameson, ‘Magical Narratives,’ from The Political Unconscious • Susanne Wofford, ‘Gendering Allegory: Spenser’s Bold Reader and the Emergence of Character in The Faerie Queene III,’ Criticism 30 (1988), 1-21 • Barbara Fuchs, Romance (selections) M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 197 of 246

Week 4: The Ethics and Erotics of Friendship

Primary Texts: • The Faerie Queene, Book 4 • Spenser and Gabriel Harvey, Proper, and wittie, Familiar Letters • Geoffrey Chaucer, ‘The Squire’s Tale.’

Secondary Reading: • Jonathan Goldberg, Endlesse Work (selections) • Alan Bray, ‘Homosexuality and the Signs of Male Friendship in Elizabethan England,’ and Dorothy Stephens, ‘Into Other Arms: Amoret’s Evasion,’ (both in Queering the Renaissance, ed. Goldberg; Alexander Nehamas, On Friendship.)

Week 5: Violence and Empire

Primary Texts: The Faerie Queene, Book 5.

Secondary Reading: • Angus Fletcher, The Prophetic Moment (selections) • Jeff Dolven, Scenes of Instruction, ch.6 • Benedict Robinson, Islam and Early Modern English Literature: The Politics of Romance, ch.1 • Tiffany Jo Werth, ‘“Degendered”: Spenser’s “Yron Man” in a “Stonie” Age,’ Spenser Studies 30 (2015), 393-413

Week 6: Hospitality and Mutability

Primary Texts: • The Faerie Queene, Book 6 • Spenser, The Shepheardes Calendar, selected eclogues

Secondary Reading: • Paul Alpers, ‘Spenser’s Late Pastorals,’ ELH 56 (1989), 797-817 • Elizabeth Fowler, ‘The Failure of Moral Philosophy in the Work of Edmund Spenser,” Representations 51 (1995), 47–76 • Gordon Teskey, ‘“And Therefore as a Stranger Give it Welcome”: Courtesy and Thinking,’ Spenser Studies 18 (2003), 343-59

Suggested Further Reading

There is a huge and ever-growing bibliography on every imaginable aspect of The Faerie Queene. This list is by no means comprehensive, but focuses on useful overviews of Spenser’s life and work, and on critical M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 198 of 246

works that will complement the larger concerns of the course in particularly relevant ways. As participants develop their own interests within the poem I will be happy to discuss secondary works on particular issues or episodes with them.

Overviews

• Colin Burrow, Edmund Spenser [writers and their work series]. • Andrew Escobedo (ed.) Spenser in Context. • Andrew Hadfield (ed.) The Cambridge Companion to Edmund Spenser. • Andrew Hadfield, Edmund Spenser [now the standard biography] • Richard McCabe (ed.) The Oxford Handbook of Edmund Spenser.

Critical Works

• Judith Anderson, Reading the Allegorical Intertext • Leonard Barkan, The Gods Made Flesh • Elizabeth J. Bellamy, ‘Em(body)ments of Power: Versions of the Body in Pain in Spenser,’ LIT 2.4 (1991), 303-21 • Harry Berger, Jr., Revisionary Play: Studies in the Spenserian Dynamics • --- ‘Kidnapped Romance: Discourse in The Faerie Queene,’ in Unfolded Tales: Essays on Renaissance Romance, ed. George M. Logan & Gordon Teskey • --- ‘Displacing Autophobia in Faerie Queene I: Ethics, Gender, and Oppositional Reading in the Spenserian Text,’ ELR 28 (1998), 163-82. • --- ‘Archimago: Between Text and Countertext,’ SEL 43 (2003), 19-64. • --- ‘Wring Out the Old: Squeezing the Text, 1951-2001,’ Spenser Studies 18 (2003), 81- 121 • Christopher Burlinson, Allegory, Space and the Material World in the Writings of Edmund Spenser • Colin Burrow, ‘Original Fictions: Metamorphoses in The Faerie Queene,’ in Ovid Renewed: Ovidian Influences in Literature and Art from the Middle Ages to the Twentieth Century • Joseph Campana, The Pain of Reformation: Spenser, Vulnerability, and the Ethics of Masculinity • Sheila T. Cavanagh, Wanton Eyes and Chaste Desires: Female Sexuality in “The Faerie Queene” • Leigh DeNeef, Spenser and the Motives of Metaphor • Katherine Eggert, ‘Spenser’s Ravishment: Rape and Rapture in The Faerie Queene,’ Representations 70 (2000), 1-26 • Angus Fletcher, Allegory: The Theory of a Symbolic Mode • Stephen Greenblatt, ‘Murdering Peasants: Status, Genre, and the Representation of Rebellion,’ in Representing the English Renaissance, ed. Stephen Greenblatt (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988), 1-29 • Roland Greene, ‘A Primer of Spenser’s Worldmaking: Alterity in the Bower of Bliss,’ in Worldmaking Spenser: Explorations in the Early Modern Age, ed. Patrick Cheney & Lauren Silberman • Linda Gregerson, The Reformation of the Subject: Spenser, Milton and the English Protestant Epic • Kenneth Gross, Spenserian Poetics: Idolatry, Iconoclasm, and Magic M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 199 of 246

• --- ‘“Each Heav’nly Close”: Mythologies and Metrics in Spenser and the Early Poetry of Milton,’ PMLA 98.1 (1983), 21-36 • --- ‘The Postures of Allegory’, in Edmund Spenser: Essays on Culture and Allegory, ed. Jennifer Klein Morrison and Matthew Greenfield • James Kearney, The Incarnate Text: Imagining the Book in Reformation England, ch.2 • Theresa M. Krier, Gazing on Secret Sights: Spenser, Classical Imitation, and the Decorums of Vision • David Lee Miller, The Poem’s Two Bodies: The Poetics of the 1590 Faerie Queene • Joe Moshenska, ‘The Forgotten Youth of Allegory: Figures of Old Age in The Faerie Queene,’ Modern Philology 110.3 (2013), 389-414 • --- Feeling Pleasures: The Sense of Touch in Renaissance England, ch.4 • --- Why Can’t Spenserians Stop Talking About Hegel? A Response to Gordon Teskey," Spenser Review 44.1.2 (Spring-Summer 2014) • --- ‘Spenser at Play,’ PMLA 133.1 (2018), 19-35 • James Nohrnberg, The Analogy of The Faerie Queene • Maureen Quilligan, Milton’s Spenser: The Politics of Reading • Richard Rambuss, Spenser’s Secret Career • Tracey Sedinger, ‘Women’s Friendship and the Refusal of Lesbian Desire in The Faerie Queene,’ Criticism 42.1 (2000), 91-113 • Lauren Silberman, Transforming Desire: Erotic Knowledge in Books III and IV of “The Faerie Queene” • Gordon Teskey, Allegory and Violence • --- “Thinking Moments in The Faerie Queene.” Spenser Studies 22 (2007), 103-25 • --- “Edmund Spenser Meets Jacques Derrida: On the Travail of Systems.” Spenser Review 43.3.51 (2014) • Susanne L. Wofford, The Choice of Achilles: The Ideology of Figure in the Epic

The Philosophical Poem: Pope, Wordsworth, and Tennyson Dr Timothy Michael

This seminar will take it as a given that verse is not the ideal vehicle for the exposition of systematic philosophy. It will also take it as a given that our understanding of certain kinds of poems is enriched by a knowledge of the intellectual background to which they respond and, in rare cases, alter. We shall focus on three poets - Pope, Wordsworth, and Tennyson - and on three of the most ambitious philosophical poems in the language: An Essay on Man (1733-34), the 1805 Prelude, and In Memoriam (1850).

The aim of the seminar will be to move beyond critical platitudes about these poems’ relationship to the broader history of ideas: in Pope’s case, that he simply gave old ideas - none terribly interesting - elegant new expression; in Wordsworth’s case, that he articulated a revolutionary philosophy about the union of man and nature and about the powers of the creative imagination; in Tennyson’s case, that scientific developments occasioned a re-evaluation of his metaphysics. We will focus, rather, on specific points of

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 200 of 246

philosophical contact and influence as realized in the poems themselves, tracing their origins in primary works of philosophy.

Students will be expected to find out and read a substantial amount of philosophy, criticism (contemporary, classic, and current), and biography-according to their own interests and passions-in order to gain a fuller understanding of the relationship of these poems to their social and intellectual contexts.

Vacation Reading and Editions

Students are strongly encouraged to get as much of the primary reading done over the vacation as possible (i.e., An Essay on Man, the 1805 Prelude, and In Memoriam). Ideally, you will have read the primary works over the vacation so that you can spend the term itself pursuing philosophical and critical sources. The following editions are recommended, as they contain extensive annotation which will point you in useful directions during the term:

• Pope, An Essay on Man, ed. Tom Jones (Princeton, 2016) • Wordsworth, William. The Prelude: 1799, 1805, 1850, ed. Abrams, Gill, and Wordsworth (Norton, 1979) • Tennyson, Alfred. Tennyson: A Selected Edition, ed. Ricks (Routledge, 2006) OR In Memoriam, ed. Erik Gray (Norton, 2003)

General Criticism and Biography

This is not an exhaustive list of relevant criticism, but should be enough to get you started. Feel free to make a start on the asterisked items over the vacation.

• *Abrams, M.H. Natural Supernaturalism (1971) • Barnard, John (ed.). Pope: The Critical Heritage (1973) • Dixon, P. (ed.). Writers and their Background: Alexander Pope (1972) • Erskine-Hill, Howard. The Social Milieu of Alexander Pope (1985) • Engell, James. The Creative Imagination (1981) • Gill, Stephen. William Wordsworth: A Life (1989) • *Gilmore, Robin. The Victorian Period: The Intellectual and Cultural Context of English Literature, 1830-1890 (1994) • Lockridge, Laurence. The Ethics of Romanticism (1989) • Mack, Maynard. Alexander Pope: A Life (1985) • Martin, Robert. Tennyson (1980) • Perry, Seamus. Tennyson (2004) • Ricks, Christopher. Tennyson (1989) • Russell, Bertrand. The History of Western Philosophy (1945) • *Willey, Basil. The Eighteenth-Century Background (1940) • *---. The Seventeenth-Century Background (1934)

Course Schedule M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 201 of 246

WEEK 1: Pope: An Essay on Man I

Primary:

• Epistles I and II (1733)

Secondary:

• Damrosch, Leopold. The Imaginative World of Alexander Pope (1987) • Goldgar, Bertrand. ‘Pope’s Theory of the Passions: The Background of Epistle II of the Essay on Man’, Philological Quarterly 41:4 (1962): 730-43 • Hammond, B.S. Pope and Bolingbroke (1984) • Leranbaum, Miriam. Alexander Pope’s ‘Opus Magnum’ 1729-1744 (1977) • Lovejoy, A.O. The Great Chain of Being • McColley, Grant. ‘Locke’s Essay Concerning Human Understanding as a Partial Source of Pope’s Essay on Man’, The Open Court 46 (1932): 581-84 • Nuttall, A.D. Pope’s ‘Essay on Man’ (1984) • White, Douglas. Pope and the Context of Controversy: The Manipulation of Ideas in ‘An Essay on Man’ (1970)

WEEK 2: Pope: An Essay on Man II

Primary:

• Epistles III and IV (1733 and 1734)

Secondary:

• McLaverty, James. Pope, Print, and Meaning (2001) • ---. ‘Warburton’s False Comma: Reason and Virtue in Pope’s Essay on Man’, Modern Philology 99:3 (February 2002): 379-92 • Noggle, James. The Skeptical Sublime: Aesthetic Ideology in Pope and the Tory Satirists (2001) • Parker, Fred. Scepticism and Literature: An Essay on Pope, Hume, Sterne, and Johnson (2003) • Solomon, Harry. The Rape of the Text: Reading and Misreading Pope’s ‘Essay on Man’ (1993) • ---. ‘Reading Philosophical Poetry: A Hermeneutics of Metaphor for Pope’s Essay on Man’, in The Philosopher as Writer, ed. Ginsberg, pp. 122-39 (1987)

WEEK 3: Wordsworth: The Prelude I

Primary:

• The 1805 Prelude, Books 1-7

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 202 of 246

Secondary:

• Abrams, M.H. The Mirror and the Lamp: Romantic Theory and the Critical Tradition (1958) • ---. Natural Supernaturalism (1971) • Gill, Stephen. William Wordsworth: “The Prelude” (1991) • Rader, Melvin. Wordsworth: A Philosophical Approach (1967)

WEEK 4: Wordsworth: The Prelude II

Primary:

• The 1805 Prelude, Books 8-13

Secondary:

• Engell, James. The Creative Imagination (1981), pp. 265-76 • Jarvis, Simon. Wordsworth’s Philosophic Song (2006) • Michael, Timothy. British Romanticism and the Critique of Political Reason (2016), pp.1-60 • Potkay, Adam. Wordsworth’s Ethics (2012)

WEEK 5: Tennyson: In Memoriam I

Primary:

• In Memoriam (1850): 1-67

Secondary:

• Culler, Dwight. The Poetry of Tennyson (1977) • Ricks, Christopher. Tennyson (1989) • Perry, Seamus. Tennyson (2004)

WEEK 6: Tennyson: In Memoriam II

Primary:

• In Memoriam (1850): 68-133

Secondary:

• Armstrong, Isobel. ‘The Collapse of Object and Subject: In Memoriam’. Language as Living Form in Nineteenth-Century Poetry (1982) • ---. Victorian Poetry: Poetry, Poetics, and Politics (1993) • Dean, D.R., Tennyson and Geology (1985) • Himmelfarb, Gertrude. Darwin and the Darwinian Revolution (1959) • Stevenson, Lionel. Darwin Among the Poets (1932)

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 203 of 246

Forming the Critical Mind M.St. C-Course, Hilary Term 2019

Professor Nicholas Halmi

This course examines four conceptual frames of Enlightenment and Romantic reflection on literature, including that of literature itself. The timetable is intended to follow historical chronology— approximately—in the gradual diminution of critical attention to (production-centred) prescriptive poetics and the emergence of the new (reception-centred) discipline of aesthetics and of the modern concepts of literature and literary history. The final class will be devoted to questions of canon-formation and the legitimation of vernacular literary studies.

Key: * = to be available in PDF on the course web site; † = to be distributed in photocopy. The remaining texts you will be expected to locate on your own; CHLC = C. Rawson and H. B. Nisbet (gen. eds.), The Cambridge History of Literary Criticism, 9 vols. (1989–2001)

Required readings are listed first in bold, recommended additional readings afterwards.

Week 1: Poetics

• *Thomas Blount, De re poetica: Or, Remarks upon Poetry (1694), pp. 28–33 • *Alexander Pope, An Essay on Criticism (1711) [PDF or any modern edition acceptable] • *Samuel Johnson, Rambler no. 156 (14 Sept. 1751) • Wordsworth, Preface to Lyrical Ballads (1800, 1802) [N.B. Please read the 1802 version, which adds considerable material and is reprinted in most modern editions of Lyrical Ballads] • *D. L. Patey, ‘The Institution of Criticism in the Eighteenth Century’, in CHLC, iv.3–31

• *René Le Bossu, Treatise of the Epick Poem, tr. W.J. (1695), book 1, chaps. 1 and 3 [originally published as Traité du poëme épique (1675)] • W. J. Bate, From Classic to Romantic: Premises of Taste in Eighteenth-Century England (1946), chap. 1 • *Pat Rogers, ‘Theories of Style’, in CHLC, iv.365–80 • Paul Baines, The Complete Critical Guide to Alexander Pope (2000), pp. 49–57 [available online through SOLO] • James Engell, Forming the Critical Mind: Dryden to Coleridge (1989), chap. 7 [on Johnson] • S. T. Coleridge, Biographia Literaria (1817), from chap. 1 (in Coleridge’s Poetry and Prose, ed. N. Halmi, P. Magnuson, R. Modiano [2003], pp. 380–3; or Collected Works, gen. ed. K. Coburn, vol. vii [1982], pt. 1, pp. 8–12)

Week 2: Rhetoric

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 204 of 246

• *Hugh Blair, Lectures on Rhetoric and Belles Lettres (1783), lects. 1, 14, and 32 [also available with annotations in P. Bizzell and B. Herzberg (eds.), The Rhetorical Tradition: Readings from Classical Times to the Present, 2nd ed. (2001)] • †Adam Smith, Lectures on Rhetoric and Belles Lettres (1762–3), lects. 22 and 24, ed. J. C. Bryce (1983), pp. 128–34, 142–7 • Wordsworth, Preface to Lyrical Ballads [again] • †Thomas Conley, Rhetoric in the European Tradition (1990; rpt. 1994), 188–93 [with useful bibliographies] • *David Wellbery, ‘The Transformation of Rhetoric’, in CHLC, v.185–202

• *George Kennedy, ‘The Contributions of Rhetoric to Literary Criticism’, in CHLC, iv.349–64 • W. S. Howell, Eighteenth-Century British Logic and Rhetoric (1971), chs. 6 and 7 • John Bender and David Wellbery (eds.), The Ends of Rhetoric: History, Theory, Practice (1990), pp. 9–22

Week 3: Aesthetics

 *Anthony Ashley Cooper, third earl of Shaftesbury, Soliloquy: or Advice to an Author 1.3, and The Moralists, A Rhapsody 2.4, in Characteristicks of Men, Manners, Opinions, Times (1711) [also available in Characteristicks, ed. Philip Ayres (1999), i.110–11 and ii.50–4]  *Jean-Baptiste Dubos, Critical Reflections on Poetry, Painting, and Music, tr. Thomas Nugent (1748), pt. 1, chaps. 1; pt. 2, chaps. 1–2, 22 [originally published as Réflexions critiques sur la Poësie et sur la Peinture (1719)]  *Joseph Addison, ‘The Pleasures of Imagination’ (Spectator nos. 411–21, 21 June–3 July 1721) [also available in The Spectator, ed, D.F. Bond (1965), iii.535–82; N.B. at the end of no. 421 the helpful summary of the contents of all the papers]  *Anna Barbauld, ‘On the Pleasure Derived from Objects of Terror’ (1773)  †Ernst Cassirer, The Philosophy of the Enlightenment, tr. F.C.A. Koelln and J.P. Pettegrove (1951), pp. 297–312 [originally published as Die Philosophie der Aufklärung (1932)]

 †James Engell, The Creative Imagination: Enlightenment to Romanticism (1981), pp. 22–5

Week 4: Aesthetics

• *Henry Home, Lord Kames, Elements of Criticism (1762), Introd. and chap. 23 • *David Hume, ‘Of the Standard of Taste’, in Essays and Treatises on Several Subjects (2nd. ed., 1758) [also available in Selected Essays, ed. S. Copley and A. Edgar (1993), pp. 133–53] • *Edmund Burke, Philosophical Enquiry in the Origin of Our Ideas of the Sublime and Beautiful (2nd ed., 1759): Introduction on Taste; pt. 2, §§ 1–8; pt. 3, §§ 10–12; pt. 4, §§ 5–11 [also available in Philosophical Enquiry, ed. J. T. Boulton (2nd ed., 1987), and other editions] M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 205 of 246

• S. T. Coleridge, ‘Essays on the Principles of Genial Criticism’ (1814), Essays 2 and 3 [available in Coleridge’s Poetry and Prose, ed. N. Halmi, P. Magnuson, and R. Modiano (2003), pp. 338–50; and in Collected Works, vol. 10 (Shorter Works and Fragments, 1995), pp. 361–86] • *Hans Reiss, ‘The Rise of Aesthetics from Baumgarten to Humboldt’, in CHLC, iv.658–80

• David Marshall, The Frame of Art: Fictions of Aesthetic Experience, 1750–1815 (2005), pp. 1– 15, 176–96 • Immanuel Kant, Critique of the Power of Judgement §§ 1–7, 15–20, 43–53 [originally published as Kritik der Urteilskraft (1790); use the Cambridge translation by Paul Guyer and Eric Matthews (2000) or the Hackett one by Werner Pluhar (1987), not the superseded Oxford one by James Meredith (1911)] • †Nicholas Halmi, outline of Kant’s critical philosophy

Week 5: Literature/literary history

• *Edward Gibbon, Essay on the Study of Literature (1764), pp. 1–11 • *Thomas Warton, History of English Poetry (1774–81), vol. 1, sect. 18; vol. 2, sect. 18 • *Clara Reeve, from The Progress of Romance (1785) • †Thomas De Quincey, ‘Letters to a Young Man Whose Education Has Been Neglected’ (1823), Letter 1, in The Works, gen. ed. G. Lindop (2000–3), iii.39–49 • *David Perkins, ‘Literary History and Historicism’, in CHLC, v.338–61

• †René Wellek, The Rise of English Literary History (1941), pp. 47–53, 61–74 • Raymond Williams, ‘Literature’, in Keywords: A Vocabulary of Culture and Society, rev. ed. (1988), pp. 183–8 • *Nicholas Halmi, ‘Romanticism, the Temporalization of History, and the Historicization of Form’, MLQ, 74 (2014), 363–89

Week 6: Canon-formation

• *Robert Anderson (ed.), Preface to The Works of the British Poets (1792–5) • †John Guillory, Cultural Capital (1993), chap. 2 • *Linda Zionkowski, ‘Territorial Disputes in the Republic of Letters: Canon Formation and the Literary Profession’, The Eighteenth Century: Theory and Interpretation, 31 (1990), 3–22 • *Stuart Curran, ‘Romantic Poetry: Why and Wherefore’, in Curran (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to British Romanticism (1993) [also available online through SOLO] • *Greg Kucich, ‘Gendering the Canons of Romanticism: Past and Present’, The Wordsworth Circle, 27 (1996), 95–102

M.St. & M.Phil Course Details 2018-19 v1.1 Hilary Term C-Courses Page 206 of 246

• Barbara Benedict, Making the Modern Reader: Cultural Mediation in Early Modern Literary Anthologies (1996) • James Engell, Forming the Critical Mind (1989), ch. 6 • Jon Klancher, The Making of English Reading Audiences, 1790–1832 (1987), esp. chaps. 3 and chap. 5 • *——, ‘The Vocation of Criticism and the Crisis of the Republic of Letters’, in CHLC, iv.296–320 • Laura Mandell’s ‘Romantic Canons: A Bibliography (and an Argument)’: www.english.ucsb.edu/faculty/ayliu/research/canonweb.html

Women's Poetry 1680-1830 Professor Christine Gerrard Hilary Term 2019

This course will explore the rich diversity of verse written by women poets during the long eighteenth century and Romantic era. The approach will be thematic and generic, focusing on issues such as manuscript versus print culture, women’s coterie writing, the imitation and contestation of male poetic models, amatory and libertine poetry, public and political verse on issues such as dynastic struggle, revolution and slavery, and representations of domestic and manual labour. Students will be encouraged to explore the work of less familiar female poets and to pursue original lines of research. We will be paying particular attention to the work of Ann Finch, Sarah Fyge Egerton, Mary Collier, Mary Leapor, Mary Barber, Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, Martha Fowke, Anna Laetitia Barbauld, Ann Yearsley, Ann Robinson, Charlotte Smith, Hannah More an